Anapurna L XL Service Manual
-
Upload
jason-furnell -
Category
Documents
-
view
679 -
download
129
Transcript of Anapurna L XL Service Manual
:Anapurna L/XL
Service ManualV1.0
Company Confidential
1 - 2 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
Trademarks and Copyright
AGFA, the Agfa rhombus, Anapurna L and Anapurna XL are registered trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert N.V. or its affiliates.
Those names and product names not mentioned here are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
For more information about Agfa Graphics products, visit www.agfa.com or contact us at the following address:
Copyright © 2007 Agfa Graphics, Belgium.
All software and hardware described in this document are subject to change without notice.
Agfa Graphics.Septestraat 27B-2640 Mortsel, BelgiumTel: (+)32 3 444 2111
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - i:Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
Contents
About this Service Manual ............................................................................................................................. 0 - 1
1. Service Manual Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 0 - 12. Scope .................................................................................................................................................................................... 0 - 13. Related Documentation ................................................................................................................................................ 0 - 1
Chapter 1 Functional Description ......................................................................................................................................... 1 - 1
1. General Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 1 - 31.1. System Description ............................................................................................................................................ 1 - 31.2. Block Diagram ...................................................................................................................................................1 - 13
2. Safety Circuits .................................................................................................................................................................1 - 142.1. Emergency Stop Circuit ..................................................................................................................................1 - 142.2. Door Open Detection ......................................................................................................................................1 - 15
3. Power Distribution ........................................................................................................................................................1 - 183.1. Functional Description ...................................................................................................................................1 - 18
4. Compressed Air Distribution ......................................................................................................................................1 - 204.1. Functional Description ...................................................................................................................................1 - 20
5. Data flow ...........................................................................................................................................................................1 - 285.1. Functional Description ...................................................................................................................................1 - 285.2. Printed Circuit Boards .....................................................................................................................................1 - 28
6. Media Transport .............................................................................................................................................................1 - 296.1. Functional Description ...................................................................................................................................1 - 296.2. Printed Circuit Boards .....................................................................................................................................1 - 44
7. Ink Supply System ........................................................................................................................................................1 - 457.1. Functional Description ...................................................................................................................................1 - 457.2. Printed Circuit Boards .....................................................................................................................................1 - 54
8. Head Carriage Movement ...........................................................................................................................................1 - 558.1. Functional Description ...................................................................................................................................1 - 558.2. Printed Circuit Boards .....................................................................................................................................1 - 60
9. Print Head .........................................................................................................................................................................1 - 619.1. Functional Description ...................................................................................................................................1 - 619.2. Printed Circuit Boards .....................................................................................................................................1 - 65
10. UV Curing .......................................................................................................................................................................1 - 6610.1. Functional Description .................................................................................................................................1 - 6610.2. Printed Circuit Boards ..................................................................................................................................1 - 74
11. Programmable Logic controller (PLC) .................................................................................................................1 - 7511.1. Functional Description .................................................................................................................................1 - 75
12. Anapurna Control Program ......................................................................................................................................1 - 8012.1. Control Program .............................................................................................................................................1 - 8012.2. Buttons used for Maintenance Purposes ..............................................................................................1 - 8112.3. Setup Parameters ...........................................................................................................................................1 - 8112.4. Test Menu .........................................................................................................................................................1 - 88
13. Working with White Ink - Guidelines ..................................................................................................................1 - 9013.1. Printing Jobs without White Ink ...............................................................................................................1 - 9013.2. Application requires no White Ink at All ...............................................................................................1 - 9013.3. Putting White Ink into the Circuit ...........................................................................................................1 - 91
14. Printed Circuit Boards ...............................................................................................................................................1 - 9514.1. MAIN PCB .........................................................................................................................................................1 - 9514.2. FPGA PCB ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 - 10214.3. HEAD PCB ...................................................................................................................................................... 1 - 10814.4. REFILL PCB ..................................................................................................................................................... 1 - 11714.5. CARTRIDGE PCB .......................................................................................................................................... 1 - 123
ii 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.6. HEAD LIFT PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 12714.7. ITV CONTROLLER PCB ............................................................................................................................... 1 - 13314.8. SUB PCB ......................................................................................................................................................... 1 - 13614.9. IF PCB .............................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 14014.10. I/O PCB ........................................................................................................................................................ 1 - 14414.11. TAKE UP PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 14814.12. REFILL CONTROL PCB ............................................................................................................................. 1 - 15014.13. INDICATOR PCB ........................................................................................................................................ 1 - 15314.14. DRIVER COMMUNICATION PCB ......................................................................................................... 1 - 156
Chapter 2 Technical Features and Specifications ............................................................................................2 - 1
1. Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................................2 - 21.1. Anapurna's Print Quality ...................................................................................................................................2 - 21.2. Outstanding Printing Potential ......................................................................................................................2 - 21.3. Inspired Design ....................................................................................................................................................2 - 31.4. User Profile ............................................................................................................................................................2 - 3
2. Features ...............................................................................................................................................................................2 - 42.1. Borderless Printing .............................................................................................................................................2 - 42.2. Roll to Roll and Rigid Printing .......................................................................................................................2 - 42.3. Dual Board Printing ............................................................................................................................................2 - 42.4. White Color Printing ..........................................................................................................................................2 - 42.5. Status Signal Lamp .............................................................................................................................................2 - 42.6. Automatic Ink Filling System .........................................................................................................................2 - 52.7. UV Curing ...............................................................................................................................................................2 - 52.8. Changeable UV Lamps ......................................................................................................................................2 - 52.9. Exhausting System ..............................................................................................................................................2 - 52.10. Automatic Print Head Height .......................................................................................................................2 - 52.11. Easy and Quick Installation ..........................................................................................................................2 - 52.12. Simple Maintenance .......................................................................................................................................2 - 5
3. Specifications ....................................................................................................................................................................2 - 63.1. Print Technology ..................................................................................................................................................2 - 63.2. Head Technology .................................................................................................................................................2 - 63.3. Media .......................................................................................................................................................................2 - 73.4. Inks ...........................................................................................................................................................................2 - 83.5. Working Conditions ............................................................................................................................................2 - 93.6. Electricity ...............................................................................................................................................................2 - 93.7. RIP PC ...................................................................................................................................................................2 - 103.8. Service PC ...........................................................................................................................................................2 - 103.9. Anapurna L ..........................................................................................................................................................2 - 113.10. Anapurna XL .................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 11
Chapter 3 Repair and Service ....................................................................................................................................................3 - 1
1. Safety Notes .......................................................................................................................................................................3 - 21.1. Warning/Caution/Note ....................................................................................................................................3 - 21.2. Emergency Stop ...................................................................................................................................................3 - 21.3. Handling UV Curable Ink ..................................................................................................................................3 - 31.4. UV Radiation .........................................................................................................................................................3 - 31.5. Electricity ...............................................................................................................................................................3 - 41.6. Maintenance Safety Instructions ..................................................................................................................3 - 41.7. MSDS Contents ....................................................................................................................................................3 - 5
2. Overview Safety Labels ..................................................................................................................................................3 - 63. Preparing for Service .......................................................................................................................................................3 - 8
3.1. Moving Head Carriage to Home or Purge Position .................................................................................3 - 83.2. Putting the print Engine in Service Mode .................................................................................................3 - 8
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - iii :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4. Disassembly/Assembly of Major Components .....................................................................................................3 - 94.1. Disassembly/Assembly of the Air Pressure Panel Components .......................................................3 - 94.2. Disassembly/Assembly of the Media Transport System Components ........................................ 3 - 134.3. Disassembly/Assembly of the Ink Supply System Components at Refill Unit ........................ 3 - 244.4. Disassembly/Assembly of the Ink Supply System Components at Head Carriage Unit ...... 3 - 464.5. Disassembly/assembly of the Head Carriage Movement Components ...................................... 3 - 534.6. Disassembly/Assembly of the Print Head Components ................................................................... 3 - 604.7. Disassembly/Assembly of the UV Curing System Components .................................................... 3 - 72
5. Installing the PCI I/O Card ....................................................................................................................................... 3 - 835.1. Location ............................................................................................................................................................... 3 - 835.2. Replacement of the PCI I/O Card .............................................................................................................. 3 - 84
6. Adjustment and Alignment Procedures ............................................................................................................... 3 - 896.1. Vacuum Blower Adjustments ...................................................................................................................... 3 - 896.2. Print Head Adjustments ................................................................................................................................. 3 - 916.3. Conveyer Belt Alignment .............................................................................................................................. 3 - 976.4. Head Base Alignment ..................................................................................................................................... 3 - 996.5. Lamp house Alignment ................................................................................................................................3 - 103
Chapter 4 Preventive Maintenance ...................................................................................................................................4 - 1
1. Maintenance Schedule ..................................................................................................................................................4 - 22. Print Media Unit Maintenance ...................................................................................................................................4 - 5
2.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction ...............................................................................................4 - 52.2. Conveyer Belt .......................................................................................................................................................4 - 62.3. Vacuum Holes ......................................................................................................................................................4 - 92.4. LM Guide ............................................................................................................................................................. 4 - 102.5. LM Blocks ........................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 112.6. Carriage Belt (S5M Belt) ................................................................................................................................ 4 - 132.7. S3M Belt .............................................................................................................................................................. 4 - 162.8. Linear Scale Encoder ...................................................................................................................................... 4 - 242.9. Bearings Print Media Unit ............................................................................................................................ 4 - 332.10. Waste Tank ...................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 35
3. Head Carriage Unit Maintenance ............................................................................................................................ 4 - 363.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction ............................................................................................ 4 - 363.2. Print Head ........................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 383.3. UV Lamp Box / UV Lamp Box Housing .................................................................................................... 4 - 463.4. Head Carriage .................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 53
4. Refill Unit Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................. 4 - 544.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction ............................................................................................ 4 - 544.2. Air filter 6 Color and White .......................................................................................................................... 4 - 554.3. Ink Filter .............................................................................................................................................................. 4 - 56
5. Purge Unit Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................ 4 - 635.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction ............................................................................................ 4 - 635.2. Purge box ............................................................................................................................................................ 4 - 63
6. Home Unit Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................ 4 - 656.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction ............................................................................................ 4 - 656.2. Home box ............................................................................................................................................................ 4 - 65
7. Safety Circuit .................................................................................................................................................................. 4 - 677.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction ............................................................................................ 4 - 677.2. Emergency Stop Circuit ................................................................................................................................. 4 - 67
8. Air Tank Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 4 - 698.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction ............................................................................................ 4 - 698.2. Air Tank ................................................................................................................................................................ 4 - 69
9. Air Pressure Panel Maintenance ............................................................................................................................. 4 - 709.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction ............................................................................................ 4 - 709.2. Air Pressure Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 4 - 70
iv 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
10. Engine .............................................................................................................................................................................4 - 7510.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction ..........................................................................................4 - 7510.2. Engine Level .................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 75
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................................5 - 1
1. Troubleshooting Based on Visible Problems .........................................................................................................5 - 21.1. Troubleshooting Based on Tower Lamp Indications ..............................................................................5 - 21.2. Troubleshooting Based on Mechanical and/or Electrical Problems ................................................5 - 2
2. Troubleshooting Based on UI Error Messages ....................................................................................................5 - 133. Troubleshooting based on Image Quality Control ............................................................................................5 - 14
3.1. Encoder (MARK) Error ......................................................................................................................................5 - 143.2. Black Strips .........................................................................................................................................................5 - 153.3. Waves on the Media Surface .......................................................................................................................5 - 153.4. Only UNI MODE Output .................................................................................................................................5 - 163.5. Image Quality Failure .....................................................................................................................................5 - 163.6. Spray on your Image .......................................................................................................................................5 - 183.7. Print Length Exceeds Maximum Platen Length ....................................................................................5 - 18
4. UV Lamp Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................................................5 - 205. Servo Motor Driver Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................... 5 - 21
Chapter 6 Glossary ..................................................................................................................................................................................6 - 1
Chapter 7 Annex .........................................................................................................................................................................................7 - 1
1. Pneumatic Diagrams .......................................................................................................................................................7 - 31.1. Pneumatic Diagram ............................................................................................................................................7 - 5
2. Electrical Diagrams ..........................................................................................................................................................7 - 72.1. Main Power Distribution in the Electrical Circuit Panel .......................................................................7 - 92.2. Power Supply Distribution - 3 Phase with neutral with ground star 380V (EU) .......................7 - 112.3. Power Supply Distribution - 3 Phase no neutral with ground delta 208-240V (US) ...............7 - 132.4. UV Lamp Power Box Connections ..............................................................................................................7 - 152.5. UV Lamp Power Circuit ..................................................................................................................................7 - 172.6. UV Lamp Head Part ..........................................................................................................................................7 - 192.7. UV Lamp Power Cables ..................................................................................................................................7 - 21
3. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Block Diagram ....................................................................................7 - 233.1. Main PLC .............................................................................................................................................................7 - 253.2. UV Lamp PLC ......................................................................................................................................................7 - 27
4. Printed Circuit Boards ..................................................................................................................................................7 - 294.1. Total PCB Diagram Layout ............................................................................................................................7 - 314.2. MAIN PCB ............................................................................................................................................................7 - 334.3. FPGA PCB ............................................................................................................................................................7 - 354.4. HEAD PCB ............................................................................................................................................................7 - 374.5. REFILL PCB ..........................................................................................................................................................7 - 394.6. CARTRIDGE PCB ................................................................................................................................................7 - 414.7. HEAD LIFT PCB ..................................................................................................................................................7 - 434.8. ITV CONTROLLER PCB .....................................................................................................................................7 - 454.9. SUB PCB ...............................................................................................................................................................7 - 474.10. IF PCB .................................................................................................................................................................7 - 494.11. I/O PCB .............................................................................................................................................................7 - 514.12. TAKE UP PCB ...................................................................................................................................................7 - 534.13. REFILL CONTROL PCB ...................................................................................................................................7 - 554.14. INDICATOR PCB ..............................................................................................................................................7 - 574.15. DRIVER COMMUNICATION PCB ...............................................................................................................7 - 59
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 0 - 1:Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
About this Service Manual
This section of the Service Manual explains how this document is structured.
1. Service Manual Overview
Functional DescriptionThis chapter describes how the Anapurna L/XL functions.
Technical Features and SpecificationsThis chapter briefly describes the features and technical specifications of the Anapurna L/XL.
Repair and ServiceThis chapter describes the preventive maintenance procedures for the Anapurna L/XL.
Preventive MaintenanceThis chapter describes repair and service procedures for the Anapurna L/XL.
TroubleshootingThis chapter describes how you can recognize and solve mechanical, electrical and image problems you could encounter when printing with the Anapurna L/XL.
GlossaryThis chapter describes definitions and abbreviations used throughout the Service Manual which you may not be familiar with.
AnnexThis chapter gives an overview of the diagrams and printed circuit boards of the Anapurna L/XL. Finally, you can find a spare parts list.
2. Scope
The Service Manual is intended to provide all necessary information for the service technician to maintain the Anapurna L/XL so that the system runs smoothly, professionally and under optimum conditions.
3. Related Documentation
The following document can be referred to for more information:
! Anapurna L/XL Pre-Site Survey
! Anapurna L/XL Installation Guide
! Anapurna L/XL Operator Manual
ABOUT THIS SERVICE MANUAL RELATED DOCUMENTATION
0 - 2 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
CHAPTER
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 1:Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
1 Functional Description
This chapter describes how the Anapurna L/XL functions.
1. General Description ............................................................................................................................................... 1 - 31.1. System Description .................................................................................................................................. 1 - 31.2. Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................................ 1 - 13
2. Safety Circuits ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 - 142.1. Emergency Stop Circuit ....................................................................................................................... 1 - 142.2. Door Open Detection ........................................................................................................................... 1 - 15
3. Power Distribution .............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 183.1. Functional Description ........................................................................................................................ 1 - 18
4. Compressed Air Distribution ........................................................................................................................... 1 - 204.1. Functional Description ........................................................................................................................ 1 - 20
5. Data flow ................................................................................................................................................................ 1 - 285.1. Functional Description ........................................................................................................................ 1 - 285.2. Printed Circuit Boards .......................................................................................................................... 1 - 28
6. Media Transport ................................................................................................................................................... 1 - 296.1. Functional Description ........................................................................................................................ 1 - 296.2. Printed Circuit Boards .......................................................................................................................... 1 - 44
7. Ink Supply System .............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 457.1. Functional Description ........................................................................................................................ 1 - 457.2. Printed Circuit Boards .......................................................................................................................... 1 - 54
8. Head Carriage Movement ................................................................................................................................ 1 - 558.1. Functional Description ........................................................................................................................ 1 - 558.2. Printed Circuit Boards .......................................................................................................................... 1 - 60
9. Print Head .............................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 619.1. Functional Description ........................................................................................................................ 1 - 619.2. Printed Circuit Boards .......................................................................................................................... 1 - 65
10. UV Curing ............................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 6610.1. Functional Description ...................................................................................................................... 1 - 6610.2. Printed Circuit Boards ....................................................................................................................... 1 - 74
11. Programmable Logic controller (PLC) ....................................................................................................... 1 - 7511.1. Functional Description ...................................................................................................................... 1 - 75
12. Anapurna Control Program ............................................................................................................................ 1 - 8012.1. Control Program .................................................................................................................................. 1 - 8012.2. Buttons used for Maintenance Purposes ................................................................................... 1 - 8112.3. Setup Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 1 - 8112.4. Test Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 88
13. Working with White Ink - Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 1 - 9013.1. Printing Jobs without White Ink ................................................................................................... 1 - 9013.2. Application requires no White Ink at All ................................................................................... 1 - 9013.3. Putting White Ink into the Circuit ................................................................................................ 1 - 91
14. Printed Circuit Boards ..................................................................................................................................... 1 - 9514.1. MAIN PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 9514.2. FPGA PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 10214.3. HEAD PCB ............................................................................................................................................ 1 - 10814.4. REFILL PCB .......................................................................................................................................... 1 - 11714.5. CARTRIDGE PCB ................................................................................................................................ 1 - 12314.6. HEAD LIFT PCB ................................................................................................................................... 1 - 12714.7. ITV CONTROLLER PCB ..................................................................................................................... 1 - 13314.8. SUB PCB ............................................................................................................................................... 1 - 13614.9. IF PCB .................................................................................................................................................... 1 - 140
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1 - 2 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.10. I/O PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 14414.11. TAKE UP PCB ................................................................................................................................... 1 - 14814.12. REFILL CONTROL PCB ................................................................................................................... 1 - 15014.13. INDICATOR PCB .............................................................................................................................. 1 - 15314.14. DRIVER COMMUNICATION PCB ............................................................................................... 1 - 156
GENERAL DESCRIPTION FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 3 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
1. General Description
1.1. System Description
1.1.1. General View Of the Anapurna L/XL
The illustration below indicates the front, rear, left and right side of the Anapurna L/XL.
Figure 1.1: Notation conventions
The front, rear, left and right side are defined according to the opposite transport direction of the print media.
! The front side of the Anapurna L/XL corresponds with the print media output side.
! The rear side of the Anapurna L/XL corresponds with the print media input side.
1.1.2. Components And Locations
The Anapurna L/XL is separated in physical entities, called units. We distinguish 5 major units:
! Purge unit.
! Head carriage unit.
! Print media unit
! Home unit.
! Refill unit.
Left
Right
Front
Rear
PrintMediaTransportDirection
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1 - 4 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
1.1.2.1. Front view with printer parts and locations
Figure 1.2: Front view Anapurna XL
1.1.2.2. Rear view and composition
Figure 1.3: Rear view Anapurna XL
Vacuum controlFront cover
Emergency stop
Exhaust system
Towerlamp
Ink temperature and ink vacuum control
Refill unitPurge unit Print media unit Home unit
Emergency stop
Conveyer belt
Exhaust system
Head carriage unit
Emergency stop
Emergency stop
Vacuum control
Rear cover
Vacuum table Roll to roll systemCompressed air inlet
GENERAL DESCRIPTION FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 5 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
1.1.2.3. Purge unit
! Purging part.
Accessible via the purge front door and the purge rear door.
! Main box left
Located behind the main box left side door.
! Feed servo motor driver (1).
! UV lamp power box (=UV system power supply) (2).
purging part view (rear)purging part view (front)
1
2
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1 - 6 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
! Main power panel.
Located behind the main box rear door.
1.1.2.4. Head carriage unit
Movable head carriage system (linear scale encoder) with 8 printing heads (printing the image), two UV sources (on the fly curing) positioned symmetrically left and right of the printing heads and a sub ink tank (ink buffer) mounted above the printing heads (ink supply to the heads).
1 4 5 6 72 3 8
3
1 UV lamp 5 Sub ink tank (6 colors)
2 Purge switch button 6 Sub ink tank (white)
3 Ink valve 7 Head base plate
4 Print head 8 Cleaning solution valve
GENERAL DESCRIPTION FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 7 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
1.1.2.5. Print media unit
! Roll to roll.
Automated winder/unwinder system to wind/unwind the print medium rolls.
! Rigid table.
Media transport table consisting of roller bars used to transport rigids towards the printing table. Easy to hook up to the printer.
! Print table.
The vacuum print table consists of a polyester woven conveyor belt driven by a servo motor and 2 adjustable vacuum blowers which hold the media during printing and transport.
1.1.2.6. Home unit
! Console.
Digital system that controls the Anapurna L/XL. It consists of a built-in monitor (UI) and a control PC.
! Control system.
Indicators and control buttons to control the head/ink quality parameters, the paper supply system, the vacuum system, the UV lamps and finally a tower light to indicate alarm conditions.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
12
4
10
9
11
1 Emergency button 7 UV lamp control (Left and right)
2 Vacuum control 8 Monitor
3 Media set (media register pins) 9 Take up control system
4 Media fixing bar (front and rear) 10 Ink temperature and ink vacuum control
5 Air inlet + air regulators 11 Tower lamp
6 Head base temperature control
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1 - 8 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
! Main box right
Located behind the control system cover. Accessible via the ink supply door.
! Control box,
! SMPS panel,
! PLC.
! Components behind home rear door
! Ink supply chain / hose fixing guide(1),
! Shock absorber (3),
! Limit Switch (4),
! Carriage servo motor driver (2)
1 2 43 5
1 PLC 4 Sensor controller
2 Control box 5 SMPS panel
3 Stirrer timer (white)
21
3 4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 9 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
! Components behind home right door:
Behind a protection cover you can find the double pulley assembly with
! Carriage servo motor (1),
! Driver belt S3M(2),
! Carriage belt S5M(3),
1.1.2.7. Refill unit
! Stainless steel ink tanks
! Ink tank indicator
! Refill system
3
2
1
3
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1 - 10 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
1.1.2.8. Tower lamp
The tower lamp indicates if there are troubles. This is indicated by beeping and flashing of one or more lamps of the tower lamp. Along the color of the flashing lamp(s), the problem is defined. This is shown on the image below.
Each lamp of the tower lamp can also burn continuously. According to the color of the burning lamp, the Anapurna L/XL is in a certain state.
For more information about how to solve the alarm indications (flashing + beeping), refer to �Troubleshooting Based on Tower Lamp Indications� on page 5-2 (chapter Troubleshooting).
Color Status Function
1 Red ON � Power ON
Flashing + Beeping � Air pressure below 0.3 MPa
2 Yellow Flashing + Beeping � Low ink level (at main tank)
3 Green ON � Ready state -> UV lamp curing available
Flashing + Beeping � Overheat� Lamp power off
4 Blue ON � Media register pins down
Flashing + Beeping � Full waste tank (> 3.5 litre)
5 White ON � Vacuum in use
All colors Flashing + Beeping � Overflow (of ink) in sub air tank
2
3
4
5
1
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
BLUE
WHITE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 11 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
1.1.3. Covers and Doors
Figure 1.4: Front side doors/covers
Figure 1.5: Rear side doors/covers
1 2 3 4 5
1 Purge front door 4 Monitor cover2 Main box front cover 5 Control system cover3 Front cover
3
5
4
2
1
1 Purge rear door 4 Home rear door2 Main box rear door 5 Air pressure cover3 Rear cover
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1 - 12 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
Figure 1.6: Left side doors/covers
Figure 1.7: Right side doors/covers
1
2 3
1 Purge top door 3 Main box left side door2 Purge left side door
1 2
3
4
1 Home right side door 3 Ink tank indicator cover2 Ink supply door 4 Ink Refill system cover
GENERAL DESCRIPTION FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 13 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
1.2. Block Diagram
The illustration below shows the total system diagram.
The printed circuit boards (PCB) are indicated in yellow.
P C
PC FOR RTL FILE(RIPPING)
HEAD LIFTPCB
UP/DOWNSENSOR
UP/LOCKSOLENOID
STEP MOTOR
MEMORY
FPGA CIRCUIT
RS 232
FPGA PCB
CONTROL CIRCUIT
INTERFACE CIRCUIT
MAIN PCB
SUB PCB
P L C (K7M-DR60S)
PUSH ROLLER(FRONT/REAR)
UV LAMP CONTROL
TOWER LAMP CONTROL
MEDIA STOP CONTROL
UV LAMP
REFILL PCB
PRESSURE SENSOR
NEGATIVEPRESSURECONTROL
FEED BACK ON/OFF
ZERO GAIN CONTROL
ITVCONTROLLERPCB
ITV
SUB INK TANK FLOAT SENSOR
HEAD PCB
CARTRIDGE PCB
PRINT HEAD
HEATING120VDC
WASTE TANK OVER FLOW SENSOR
SUB SOLUTION TANK FLOAT SENSOR
REFILL CONTROL PCB
MAIN INK TANK INDICATOR PCB
TAKE UPMOTOR
TAKE UP PCB
I/O PCB DRIVER COMM. PCB
IF PCB
PID CONTROLLER
CARRIAGE SERVO MOTOR DRIVE
FEED SERVOMOTOR DRIVE
FEED MOTORCARRIAGE
MOTOR
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SAFETY CIRCUITS
1 - 14 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2. Safety Circuits
2.1. Emergency Stop Circuit
The system is provided with 4 emergency stops, two at the front side and two at the back side.The emergency stop circuit is activated when one of the emergency buttons is activated. When the emergency button is activated all systems are cut off from the mains, but certain parts remained powered.
! In case of emergency, push the emergency stop button immediately to stop the Anapurna L/XL.
The emergency button cuts off the power, except for the PC and SMPS8.
! By pulling the emergency button back, the emergency stop is cancelled.
The Anapurna L/XL must be restarted.
3P2P1P
zH06/05 ,V083CA ESAHP-3
ELBAC FTCV 21#GWA)KCALB(
A-CM
11P
CDV42+
V42 CD
DNG 2
W/S CP
ELBAC FTCV 21#GWA)KCALB(
TRATSER
1 OME OME OME OME3
8# SPMS
SPMS-CPW003
CP ROTAREPO
N
4
22P 32P 22PN
22PN
EP
N
N
1 21 21 21 2
)A05(1# CM )A05(1# CM1 2 3
4 5 6
1 2
1 2
3P2P1P
ESAHP-3(1# BCLE)A05,V083CA
zH06/05 ,V042~802CA ESAHP-3
ELBAC FTCV 21#GWA)KCALB(
A-CM
11P
CDV42+
V42 CD
DNG 2
W/S CP
ELBAC FTCV 21#GWA)KCALB(
TRATSER
1 OME OME 3
8# SPMS
SPMS-CPW003
CP ROTAREPO
4
22P 32P11P22P
11P
32P
EP N
)1(
)4(
)3(
)5(1 2 1 2
)A05(1# CM )A05(1# CM1 2 3
4 5 6
1 2 1 2
1 2
1 2
OME OME
SAFETY CIRCUITS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 15 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.2. Door Open Detection
2.2.1. Door Open Sensor
The engine is equipped with a safety sensor on the front and rear cover. Carriage movements and printing can only be done with covers closed. Check the working of the door sensors in the two following cases:
Figure 1.8: Door sensor
! Waiting mode
When the carriage is at its home or purge position and you start a print job with open front or rear cover, a �door open error� appears.
! Printing mode
For engine < V1.1:When you open the front or rear cover during printing, the head carriage will move to the home position after finishing the �swath�. The print will be cancelled and the UV lamps will go off and the UV lamp shutter will be closed automatically.
For engines V1.1 and V1.2:When you open the front or rear cover during printing, the head carriage stops, the UV lamps will go off, the UV lamp shutter will be closed and the UV cooling will start automatically.
1 2
1 Door sensor front cover 2 Door sensor rear cover
WARNING: Opening the covers during printing will result in a cancelled print. Only open the covers in emergency situations. Head carriage movements and printing can only be done with closed covers.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SAFETY CIRCUITS
1 - 16 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2.2.2. Sensor Controller
The sensor controller, PA10-U, detects when doors or open or closed for safety reasons. The PA10-U module reads the information coming form the 2 sensors IN1 and IN2 (front and back door) and returns the information to the MAIN PCB.
The sensor controller is located behind the control system cover. To get access to the sensor controller, open the ink supply door.
Figure 1.9: Sensor controller
2.2.2.1. Connectors
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
PA10-U
SENSOR CON-TROLLER
- 1 ACI NPUT L51 SMPS#6 6
2 OUT NC
3 OUT COM MAIN PCB J10 4
4 OUT NO MAIN PCB J10 5
5 ACI NPUT L52 SMPS#6 7
6 N.C
7 N.C
8 N.C
9 SEN#1 DC12V FRONT SENSORPR12-4DN
brown DC12-24V
1
10 SEN#1 GND blueGND
2
11 IN 1 blackSIGNAL OUT
3
12 O.C OUT 1
13 SEN#2 DC12V REAR SENSORPR12-4DN
brown DC12-24V
1
14 SEN#2 GND blueGND
2
15 IN 2 blackSIGNAL OUT
3
16 O.C OUT 2
SENSOR CONTROLLER
SAFETY CIRCUITS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 17 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.2.2.2. Led�s
2.2.2.3. Switches
LED Type Color Indication
OUT 1 red Not in use
OUT 2 red Not in use
IN 1 orange Front door
IN 2 red Rear door
POWER green 220V AC
Switch Setting Description
AND/OR AND Select �AND� or �OR� for IN1 and IN2 inputs
Note: Switching this dipswitch from AND to OR means that the carriage movement is enabled when only ONE door is closed (for service purposes only).
NORM/INV NORM Selection switch to invert the inputs.
NORM/FLANK NORM Operating in a true/false mode
Selection switch for a true\false (NORM) situation or a flank trigger (FLANK). With a flank trigger a time setting is needed (TIME SET and TIME ANALOG).
MODE SA = ONSB, SC and SD = OFF
TIME SET T1 = ONT2 = OFF
With 2 switches you can set 4 time ranges, between 0.01 - 0.1 - 1 - 10 -100s. Here the range from 0.1 - 1s is used.
TIME ANALOG Fine adjustment for TIME SET switches
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION POWER DISTRIBUTION
1 - 18 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3. Power Distribution
3.1. Functional Description
3.1.1. Electrical Circuit Panel
Figure 1.10: Electrical circuit panel
1
2
1 3
4 5 6
7
8
9
1 Main power inlet terminal block 6 Ring blower #1 MC - Ring blower switch 1st step on, �Circuit Close�
2 1st circuit breaker (MCCB #1, main circuit braker 50A)
7 Ring blower #2 MC - Ring blower switch 2nd step on, �Circuit Close�
3 Noise filter 8 SMPS8 - supply power (+24VDC) to main MC and FAN in power distribution panel
4 Main MC (MC #1) - Closed by Start button - Open when activating one of the emer-gency stops.
9 Terminal blockRouting emergency switch, start button and Main MC
5 2nd circuit breaker (MCCB#2 to #6)MCCB #2, LampMCCB #3, Ring blower 1MCCB #4, Ring blower 2MCCB #5, Motor driverMCCB #6, Control Rack
POWER DISTRIBUTION FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 19 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3.1.2. System Needed Power
To check the permanent voltage, refer to �Checking the Permanent Voltage� on page 5-7 of the Troubleshooting chapter.
3.1.3. Circuit Diagrams
! Connections in the Electric Circuit Panel
For the electrical diagram (A3 format), refer to �Main Power Distribution in the Electrical Circuit Panel� on page 7-9 (chapter Annex).
! Power Supply Distribution
For the electrical diagrams EU and US version (A3 format), refer to:
! �Power Supply Distribution - 3 Phase with neutral with ground star 380V (EU)� on page 7-11 (chapter Annex).
! �Power Supply Distribution - 3 Phase no neutral with ground delta 208-240V (US)� on page 7-13 (chapter Annex).
S YS TE M N E E D P O W E R Model : :ANAPURNA
in le t p o w e r N o ite m F re q u e n c y d e ta ilso u tp u tvo lta g e(V )
c u rre n t(A )P o w e r(K w ) Q 'ty M A X (K w )w e ig h te
dva lu e
V oltage: P C 24 12.5 0.3 1 0.3
3P H A S E 120 2 0.24 2 0.48
380V 24 5 0.12 2 0.24
frequency 24 3 0.072 2 1.5
2.5
50/60H z :ANAPURNA L 220 2 0.44 2 0.88
220 2 0.44 1 0.44
220 3.6 0.8 1 0.8
3P hase 380V -50H z 380-50H z 3.8 1.5
3P hase 380V -60H z 220-60H z 3.7 1.75
3P hase 380V -50H z 220-50H z 3.8 1.5
3P hase 380V -60H z 220-60H z 3.7 1.75
3 LA M P V :230V / F :50H z 220 20 4.4 1 4.4
4 C O M P R E S S O R 220 2 0.44 1 0.44
5 E X H A U S T 220 2 0.44 1 0.44
11.66 11.66
12.02 13.42
100%
:ANAPURNA L
:ANAPURNA XL
2
2
3
3
S M P SC O N TR O L R A C K
:ANAPURNA XL
1 V :230V / F :50H z
S ub-Total
Total:ANAPURNA L
:ANAPURNA XL
S E R V O M O TO R
* M otor pem issible voltage: A C 200V ~ A C 240V (50H z/60H z) prevoltage test is required.
3 R IN G B LO W E R
2
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION COMPRESSED AIR DISTRIBUTION
1 - 20 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4. Compressed Air Distribution
4.1. Functional Description
4.1.1. Pneumatic Flow Chart & Circuit
The pneumatic air flow is represent in the diagram below. Each component, indicated by means of a colour, is discussed in this section.
! Compressed Air Pressure (purple flow),
! Carriage Part (blue rectangle),
! Air Tank (yellow rectangle),
! Lamp Shutter Left/Right Cylinders (light blue rectangle),
! Media Set Cylinders and Media Hold Front/Rear Cylinders (green and red rectangle).
For the pneumatic diagram (A3 format), refer to the �Pneumatic Diagram� on page 7-5 (chapter Annex).
R
P
A
Air Tank
Waste TankOver-flow Sig.
Setting Press UV lamp0.10 - 0.15 MPa
Air Filter # 1
Air Filter # 2
EBEA
A
P
B
EBEA
A
P
B
� �
INOUT
Media set Cylinders
Media Hold Front/Rear Cylinders
0.3 MPa 0.15 MPa
Setting Press Carriage
Setting Press CarriageSetting Press Carriage
0.03 MPa
VACUUMEJECTOR
Purge S/WSig.
Purge S/W Sig.
EBEA
A
P
B
EBEA
A
P
B
Lamp Shutter Left/Right Cylinders
I/O PC B Sig. I/O PC B Sig.
4f Air Tube
A P
R
SU P OU T
P A R
P
A
P A
R
PCB
E/PRegulator
Float Sensor Sig.
Float SensorSig.
Pressure Sig.Float SensorSig.
PSE531-M5
Checkvalve
Checkvalve
SOLUTIONSUB-TANK
SOLUTIONBAR
MAIN WASTEINKTANK
SUBAIR
TANK
INKTANK
T
Carriage Part
Main Air Press.0.4 - 0.8 MPa
Max. Press. 2MPaCapacity 0.005M3
Setting Press0.6 MPa
0.3 - 0.7 MPaPurge Sig.
COMPRESSED AIR DISTRIBUTION FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 21 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.1.2. Compressed Air Pressure
Figure 1.11: Air pressure panel
The system requires an industrial compressor working twenty-four hours a day (seven days a week) delivering a stable compressed air pressure of minimum 6 bar (range 0.4-0.8 MPa) and a flow of minimum 15 l/min. The capacity shall be over 3 HP (horsepower). The reinforced compressed air hose must have an outer diameter of 6 mm. The pressure vessel should be minimum 50l.
The reinforced compressed air hose coming from the compressed air supply is connected to the air inlet pressure hose, which is located in the air pressure panel.
Figure 1.12: Air pressure panel - pneumatic flow key parts
1
2 3 4 5 6 7
8
0.15 MPa0.10 - 0.15 MPa
0.40 - 0.80 MPa 0.30 MPa
1 Main air pressure inlet portMain air inlet pressure indicator
5 1st regulator at carriage div. (0.3 MPa)
2 Main regulator (0.4-0.8 MPa) 6 Air filter #2
3 Lamp shutter regulator (0.10 MPa-0.15 MPa)
7 2nd regulator at carriage div. (0.15 MPa)
4 Air filter #1 8 Water drain out
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION COMPRESSED AIR DISTRIBUTION
1 - 22 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.1.3. Carriage Part
4.1.3.1. Head carriage unit - pneumatic flow key parts
Figure 1.13: Rear side head carriage unit
! Purge air valve.
Operational when purging (push purge switch at the front of the head carriage unit).
! VT301V-025GB (Figure 1.13, item 10), range -0.1 to 1 bar.
! VT301-025GB (Figure 1.13, item 11), range 0 to 10 bar.
! Electro-pneumatic regulator ITV2010 (Figure 1.13, item 8 and 12).
The IVT controller displays the overpressure (default + 0.30 mbar or lower, in case the vacuum pressure is set to -0.032MPa) which is sent through a venturi tube to create the desired negative pressure setting in the sub air tank. The pressure sensor PSE531-M5-L (Figure 1.13, item 3) constantly measures the negative pressure in the sub air tank and the read-out is sent back to the IVT controller. Base on this read-out, the ITV controller adjusts the flow pressured air through the venturi tube to compensate.
1 2 5 6 7
8 11109
12
43
1 Sub air tank and ink overflow tank 7 Solution valve
2 Air relief valve sub air tank(speed V/V (AS1001F-06) + air filter)
8 Electro-pneumatic regulator ITV2010
3 Pressure sensor PSE531-M5-L 9 Vacuum ejector INO-4336-4
4 Drain cock (when overflow) 10 Purge air valve VT301V-025GB
5 Solution tank 11 Purge air valve VT301-025GB
6 Lamp shutter solenoid valves 12 ITV2010 display
COMPRESSED AIR DISTRIBUTION FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 23 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
Fluctuations in the meniscus vacuum source (negative pressure) should be minimized. The air relief (Figure 1.13, item 2) on the top of the sub air tank regulates the strength of the negative pressure inside the sub air tank.
Figure 1.14: Front side head carriage unit
NOTE: The other items of Figure 1.13 are discussed in other paragraphs.
1 2
1 Purge switch 2 Purge regulator (0.03 MPa)
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION COMPRESSED AIR DISTRIBUTION
1 - 24 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.1.4. Air Tank
The system is provided with a main air tank and serves as a buffer to remove the pressure fluctuations.
Figure 1.15: Air tank
! When the air pressure at the main air tank is lower than 0.3 MPa, the following can occur:
! Red tower lamp start flashing and beeping.
! Refill system stops to prevent excessive ink outlet from print head.
! Head carriage is forced automatically to the purge position to prevent damages on the print head.
! When the air pressure at the main air tank is higher than 0.7 MPa, the system automatically ejects the pressure.
! Drain water from the main air tank (1) by opening the drain cock (2).
4.1.5. Lamp Shutter Left/Right Cylinders
The two 5/2-way valves are mounted inside the UV lamp box housing and are driven by a signal coming from the I/O PCB. By pressing the lamp shutter solenoid valve, you can check the function-ality of the lamp shutter.
21
1 Main air tank 2 Drain cock
2 31
1 Lamp shutter solenoid valves 3 Lamp shutter closed
2 Lamp shutter open
COMPRESSED AIR DISTRIBUTION FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 25 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.1.6. Media Set Cylinders and Media Hold Front/Rear Cylinders
4.1.6.1. Location and Drivers
! Media set cylinders
The six 5/2-way valves are mounted inside the media register pins and are manually driven by means of the media set switch, located at the home rear side.
! Media hold front/rear cylinders
The two 5/2-way valves are mounted underneath the print table and moves the front/rear media fix bar up and down. The front media fix bar is manually driven by means of the front switch. The rear media fix bar is manually driven by means of the rear switch. There is one front and rear switch, at the home front side and one front and rear switch at the home rear side.
The illustration below, shows the front media fix bar.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION COMPRESSED AIR DISTRIBUTION
1 - 26 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.1.6.2. Functioning
The illustration below describes the functioning of the media set cylinders and the media hold front/rear cylinders.
Figure 1.16: Functioning media set cylinders and the media hold front/rear cylinders
HOME UNIT
PLC
Main Air Supply
Main Air Supply
8
6
1 2 3 4 5
7
MainAir Supply
MainAir Supply
Front
GND
Gnd24 Vdc
Back
NO
NO NC
3 Level SwitchMedia Set
Front
NO
P 040P 051P 052P 04E
P 04A
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1 A2
A1 A2
P 002P 000
P 018P 019
Back
NO
Front
NO
Rear
Front
Rear
1 2 3 6 5 4
COMPRESSED AIR DISTRIBUTION FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 27 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.1.7. Negative Pressure Setting
Without negative pressure, all ink in the sub ink tanks would be flowing away through the heads. By means of negative pressure, the ink is kept in the print heads. A too high setting will cause missing nozzles, or no ink firing at all. When the pressure is too low, the ink will leak out of the heads.
When the system is switched on (pushing the Start button), the uninterrupted compressed air should be supplied.
! The pressure distribution can be controlled as follows:
1 Check the positive pressure (Refer to Figure 1.12)
1.1 Go to the air pressure panel (home rear side).
1.2 Check the incoming compressed air pressure with a pressure gauge.
1.3 The main regulator should indicate 0.6 MPa.
1.4 Check the pressure of the other regulators with a pressure gauge.
The UV lamp regulator should indicate 0.1-0.15 MPa.
The first carriage regulator should indicate 0.3 MPa, the second 0.15 MPa.
2 Check the negative pressure
2.1 Go to the vacuum pressure PID panel (home front side).
2.2 Adjust the vacuum pressure by turning the pressure control adjustment knob until you reach the desired pressure (range -0.032 MPa to -0.038 MPa).
2.3 Drain water from the three air filters at the air pressure panel (home rear side).
For more informztion about draining water from the air filter, refer to �Draining the Air Filter� on page 4-70 (chapter Preventive Maintenance)
CAUTION: When controlling the regulator, in case of no pressure changes, check the connection of the hose and setting values of the regulators.
NOTE: Make sure the power part does not make contact with water.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION DATA FLOW
1 - 28 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
5. Data flow
5.1. Functional Description
The table below briefly describes the image data flow:
5.2. Printed Circuit Boards
The following printed circuits boards are part of the data flow:
! �FPGA PCB� on page 1-102
! �MAIN PCB� on page 1-95
! �HEAD PCB� on page 1-108
! �CARTRIDGE PCB� on page 1-123
Number Data Flow Connection
1 The image files (.rtl) generated on the RIP station are sent to the Anapurna PC via a network cable.
2 Direct connection between PC main board and the FPGA PCB via PCI I/O card.
3 The image data is transferred via a direct connection from the FPGA PCB to the MAIN PCB.
4 The ripped data is sent from the MAIN PCB (J16, pin 1-16) to the HEAD PCB (J9, pin 1-16)
5 Color data is sent from HEAD PCB (J1-J8, pin 6-7) to the eight (6C + 2 W) CARTRIDGE PCBs (J5, pin 6-7) via flat ribbon cable.
AnapurnaP C
PC FOR RTL FILE(RIP PC)
MEMORY
FPGA CIRCUIT
RS 232
FPGA PCB
CONTROL CIRCUIT
INTERFACE CIRCUIT
MAIN PCB
HEAD PCB
CARTRIDGE PCB
PRINT HEAD
1
2 3 4
5
6
MEDIA TRANSPORT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 29 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
6. Media Transport
6.1. Functional Description
6.1.1. General Information
P C
PC FOR RTL FILE(RIPPING)
HEAD LIFTPCB
UP/DOWNSENSOR
UP/LOCKSOLENOID
STEP MOTOR
MEMORY
FPGA CIRCUIT
RS 232
FPGA PCB
CONTROL CIRCUIT
INTERFACE CIRCUIT
MAIN PCB
SUB PCB
P L C (K7M-DR60S)
PUSH ROLLER(FRONT/REAR)
UV LAMP CONTROL
TOWER LAMP CONTROL
MEDIA STOP CONTROL
UV LAMP
REFILL PCB
PRESSURE SENSOR
NEGATIVEPRESSURECONTROL
FEED BACK ON/OFF
ZERO GAIN CONTROL
ITVCONTROLLERPCB
ITV
SUB INK TANK FLOAT SENSOR
HEAD PCB
CARTRIDGE PCB
PRINT HEAD
HEATING120VDC
WASTE TANK OVER FLOW SENSOR
SUB SOLUTION TANK FLOAT SENSOR
REFILL CONTROL PCB
MAIN INK TANK INDICATOR PCB
TAKE UPMOTOR
TAKE UP PCB
I/O PCB DRIVER COMM. PCB
IF PCB
PID CONTROLLER
CARRIAGE SERVO MOTOR DRIVE
FEED SERVOMOTOR DRIVE
FEED MOTORCARRIAGE
MOTOR
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION MEDIA TRANSPORT
1 - 30 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
6.1.2. Print Table
The vacuum print table consists of a polyester woven conveyor belt driven by a servo motor and 2 adjustable vacuum blowers which hold the media during printing and transport.
6.1.2.1. Media Fixing Roll Bars
The engine is equipped with two media fixing roll bars (1), one on the front and one on the rear. They are located underneath the front and rear covers. These bars will help to keep the media flat during transport on the conveyor belt. It can be used for roll media as well as for rigid media. To lower the bars, use the front/rear switched at the home unit (both front and rear).
1 132
2
4
1 Feed servo motor (400W) 3 Polyester woven conveyer belt
2 Vacuum blower 4 Reduction gear motor
1
2
NOTE: When you insert the media fixing roll bar (1), make sure:� the ball bearing is inside the guide (2),� the media fixing roll bar is always horizontally levelled between the left and right frame
when lowering the bar.
NOTE: For more information about the media fixing roll bar, refer also to �Media Set Cylinders and Media Hold Front/Rear Cylinders� on page 1-25.
MEDIA TRANSPORT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 31 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
6.1.2.2. Vacuum Plate Usage
On the table are 2 vacuum-zones with a fixed strength. The table is evenly divided in a right and a left side, which can be switched on in that order by means of the vacuum switch located at the home unit (front and rear).
! When printing on a banner/paper type of roll media, only the right vacuum side should be used. (Even when the media width is almost the engine width).
! When printing on two rigid media, both vacuum tables must be used.
6.1.3. Vacuum
6.1.3.1. Vacuum Blower - General Information
Two adjustable vacuum air pumps hold the media on the print table during printing and transport.
Figure 1.17: Vacuum air pump - parts
NOTE: Be aware that the vacuum (push) button at the home rear side is not connected (internal connection) with the vacuum (3 level) switch at the home front side (refer to Figure 1.18).
� the lamp in the push button (home rear side) is directly connected to the lamp tower,� the lamp in the green switch (home front side) is connected to the switch.
So if you switch the blowers on using the front switch, the lamp behind the switch is illuminated. If you switch on the blowers using the rear push button, the lamp behind the front switch is not illuminated.
NOTE: For more information about the vacuum blowers, refer to �Vacuum� on page 1-31.
5
1 2 3 4
1 Vacuum blower 4 Compressed air connection
2 Air controller with air relief valve 5 Electrical connection
3 Silencer
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION MEDIA TRANSPORT
1 - 32 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
The vacuum blower is set according to the engine configuration, star connection (Europe) or delta connection (USA).
The air relief valve is set according to the engine configuration (50 Hz or 60 Hz). Information can be found on the identification plate on top of the vacuum blower. The rated current 3.8A (50Hz engine) or 6.7A (60Hz engine).
MEDIA TRANSPORT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 33 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
6.1.3.2. Functioning
The illustration below describes the functioning of the vacuum blowers.
Figure 1.18: Functioning vacuum blowers
HOME UNIT
PLC
Step 10
NC NO
NCNO
1 2
0
NC NO
1 2
0
NC NO
1 2
Step 2
Step 3
Front
Gnd
3 Level SwitchFront Panel
Push buttonBack Panel
Gnd
24Vdc
41
42
4B
04
05
0C
Rear
A131
34
Relay #2A2
A1A2
L1 L2 L3
Gnd
24 Vdc
11
12
A141
44
Relay #3A2
A1A2Gnd
24 Vdc
11
12
NOTE: For more information about the use of the vacuum blowers, refer to �Vacuum Plate Usage� on page 1-31.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION MEDIA TRANSPORT
1 - 34 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
6.1.4. Roll to Roll Media
6.1.4.1. Auto Feeding System
For information about mounting the roll bars of the auto feeding system, refer to the paragraph �Installing the Roll Bars of the Roll to Roll System� of the Installation Manual.
The auto feeding system has 2 tension bars (in the form of gear type). Holding the media under a constant tension, those tension bars prevent distortion of and waves on the media, so stable and qualified print can be acquired.
4
1
3
2
1
Front side Rear side
1 Tension roll bar 3 Rear media roll bar
2 Front media roll bar 4 Rubber roll bar
NOTE: When you insert the tension roll bar, make sure:� the ball bearing is inside the guide,� the tension roll bar is always horizontally levelled between the left and right roll bar bracket
when lowering the bar.
MEDIA TRANSPORT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 35 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
The rear media roll bar unwinds the printed media, with a constant tension and height, acquired from media detection sensors (2). A reflection plate (1) detects the signal coming from the media detection sensor(2) mounted on the roll bar bracket at the home unit.
The front media roll bar winds the printed media, holding a constant tension to reduce distortion. The wind direction can be reversed.
6.1.4.2. Take Up Control System
! (1) In Manual Mode, motor rotates CW
! (2) In Manual Mode, motor rotates CCW
! (1)+(2) You can RESET by pushing the buttons for 1 sec.
! (3)
! In Auto Mode: select motor direction (CW or CCW)
! In Manual Mode: select motor (Back or Front)
! (4) Select Mode (Manual or Auto)
1 2
Take-up Motor Box1 2 3 4
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION MEDIA TRANSPORT
1 - 36 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
6.1.4.3. Roll Alignment
Always use the left or right dark blue border on the conveyer belt as a reference to align the paper edge of the print medium. When the roll media is loaded, measure the distance from the right side to the point where you want to start printing. Enter this value on the engine's Control Program, as a Left Margin.
When using roll to roll media, it is imperative to have a good roll to roll transportation, to ensure long print runs. The right way to load roll to roll media is dependent on the maximum printable width of the roll.
References: �Loading Roll to Roll Media� on page 1-36.
6.1.4.4. Loading Roll to Roll Media
When using roll to roll media, it is imperative to have a good roll to roll transportation, to ensure long print runs.
Use the rear media roll bar to mount the print medium roll. Mind the following print medium roll restrictions:
! The maximum allowed weight of the print medium roll is 50 kg (110.231 lb).
! The core diameter of the print medium roll must be 7.62 cm (3 inch).
! The maximum allowed roll diameter is 36 cm (14.17 inch).
! The maximum allowed print medium thickness is 50 mm.
The way to pull the print medium through the print engine is independent on the media width. But the way to load the print medium roll on the rear media roll bar is dependent on the maximum print-able width of the roll. Use the table below to check whether you use the correct loading procedure:
ti
Table 1.1 Loading a print medium roll
Media width Load procedure
Anapurna L 1,30 m - 1,58 m (max width) Load along the dark blue border of the printing table
< 1,30 m (20% of max width)
Load in the middle of the printing table
Anapurna XL 2,00 m - 2,48 m (max width) Load along the dark blue border of the printing table
< 2,00 m (20% of max width)
Load in the middle of the printing table
MEDIA TRANSPORT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 37 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
! Load a print medium roll as follows:
1 Remove the rear media roll bar.
The rear media roll bar is equipped with two movable flanges between which the print medium roll is clamped.
2 Remove one of the movable flanges by unscrewing the black turning knob.
3 Slide the print medium roll over the rear media roll bar.
4 Mount the flange.
5 Put both flanges on the proper position according to the width of the print medium roll and mount the black turning knobs again (refer to Table 1.1).
! If the print media roll is smaller than 20% of the maximum printable size, load the print media in the middle of the rear media roll bar and proceed with step 6.
! Otherwise, load the print medium roll to the far end of the rear media roll bar and proceed with step 7.
6 In case the print medium roll is positioned in the middle of the rear media roll bar, the print media is not positioned in the beam of the media detection signal sensor.
6.1 Hang a piece of media core over the tension roll bar and position the core in the beam of the media detection signal sensor. As a result the media will be detected and will provide the best tension onto the system.
2
1
1 Rear media roll bar with movable clamping flange
2 Flange with black turning knobs
CAUTION: If you do not use the media core, the tension roll bar will be lifted out of its position .
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION MEDIA TRANSPORT
1 - 38 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
6.2 Proceed with step 8.
7 In case the print medium roll is positioned to the far end of the rear media roll bar, always use the left or right dark blue border on the conveyer belt (print table) as a reference to align the paper edge of the print medium and to define the position of one of the flanges.
8 Remove the rear tension roll bar.
9 Pull the print medium over the rubber roll bar towards the print table.
10 Pull the print medium far enough towards the front side.
WWRONG OK
2
11
1 Dark blue border on the conveyer belt 2 Print medium positioned on the print table at the front side
MEDIA TRANSPORT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 39 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
11 Mount the rear tension roll bar on top of the print medium and slowly lower the rear tension roll bar to the bottom position.
12 Go to the front side and remove the front tension roll bar.
13 Pull the print medium to the front media roll bar.
14 Mount some dummy cores around the front media roll bar.
15 Use the two flanges and the dummy core(s) to roll up the print medium. Tape the front edge of the print medium to the front media core(s).
16 Mount the front tension roll bar on top of the print medium and slowly lower the front tension roll bar to the bottom position.
1
2
3
1 Rubber roll bar 3 Rear media roll bar2 Rear tension roll bar
NOTE: For more information about the operating instructions, refer to the Operator Manual of the Anapurna L/XL.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION MEDIA TRANSPORT
1 - 40 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
6.1.5. Rigid Media
6.1.5.1. Rigid table
The Anapurna L and Anapurna XL can handle rigid materials. You can level the rigid table with the print table using the height control handle.
6.1.5.2. Media register pins
To align rigids, proceed as follows:
1 Turn the Media Set switch to position 1 or 2.
When turning the �Media Set� switch once, all nr.1 pins will come down, allowing you to load one rigid. This rigid can be small or at full engine width. When you turn the switch once more, the nr.2 pin will also come down, allowing you to load two rigid media. While performing those actions, the blue tower lamp lights up.
2 Align/position the print media against the media register pins.
3 Turn on the vacuum using the vacuum button (home rear side) to fix the print media to the conveyer belt.
For more information about how to use the vacuum button, refer to �Vacuum Plate Usage� on page 1-31 and Figure 1.18.
MEDIA TRANSPORT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 41 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4 Set the margin values, top and left.
The "A" and "B" positions, the "o-point" at the corner of your media, are known distances. The "A" point has a Top Margin of 300 mm and 50 mm as a Left Margin. These can be entered in the Control program.
5 Start printing.
6.1.6. Servo Motor Driver Settings and Usage
! Feed servo driver (type MR-J2S-40CP), located behind the main box left side door.
! Carriage servo driver (type MR-J2S-70CP), located behind the home rear door.
NOTE: Image placement for printing on two rigids must be done at RIP level.
Feed Servo Motor Driver Carriage Servo Motor Driver
1 3 42
1 SW1: MODE change 3 SW3: DOWN - change by descending order
2 SW2: UP - change by ascending order 4 SW4: SET - save values, it can be consid-ered as �ENTER key�
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION MEDIA TRANSPORT
1 - 42 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
6.1.6.1. Servo motor parameters
Check the values of feed and carriage at the corresponding servo motor driver in the following cases:
! first installation to check the machine status,
! wrong carriage movement,
! irregular media feeding.
NOTE: The parameters marked with an * before their symbols are made valid by switching power off once and then switching on again after parameter setting.
NO. Symbol Name and functionInitial Value
Unit
Customer setting
Feed Carriage
Basic Parameters
0 *STY Command system/regenerative brake option selection 0000 0010 0410
1 *FTY Feeding function selection 0000 0001 0001
2 *OP1 Function selection 1 0002 0001 0002
3 ATU Auto tuning 0105 040B 0405
4 *CMX Electronic gear numerator 1 2048 2048
5 *CDV Electronic gear denominator 1 125 125
6 FED Movement complete output range 100 µm 100 100
7 PGI Position loop gain 35 rad/s 200 20
8 *ZTY Home position return type 0010 0004 0004
9 ZRF Home position return speed 500 r/min 500 500
10 CRF Creep speed 10 r/min 10 10
11 ZST Home position shift distance 0 µm 0 0
12 CRP For manufacturer setting 0 x10STMµm 0 0
13 JOG JOG Jog speed 100 r/min 100 100
14 *STC S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant 0 ms 100 0
15 *SNO Station number setting 0 station 1 2
16 *BPS Communication baudrate selection, alarm history clear 0000 0102 0102
17 MOD Analog monitor output 0100 0100 0100
18 *DMD Status display selection 0000 0000 0000
19 *BLK Parameter block 0000 000E 000E
Expansion Parameters 1
20 *OP2 Function selection 0000 0000 0000
21 For manufacturer setting 0002 0002 0002
22 *OP4 Function selection 0000 0000 0000
23 SIC Serial communications time-out selection 0 0 0
24 FFC Feed forward gain 0 % 0 0
25 VCO Override offset 0 mV 0 0
26 TLO Torque limit offset 0 mV 0 0
27 *ENR Encoder output pulses 4000 pulse/rev 4000 4000
28 TL1 Internal torque limit 100 % 100 100
29 TL2 Internal torque limit 100 % 100 100
30 *BKC Backlash compensation 0 pulse 0 0
31 MO1 Analog monitor 1 offset 0 mV 0 0
MEDIA TRANSPORT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 43 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
32 MO2 Analog monitor 2 offset 0 mV 0 0
33 MBR Electromagnetic brake sequence output 100 ms 100 100
34 GD2 Ratio of load inertia moment to Servo motor inertia moment 70 0.1 times 1.0 8.0
35 PG2 Position loop gain 35 rad/s 250 25
36 VG1 Speed loop gain 177 rad/s 1300 1100
37 VG2 Speed loop gain 817 rad/s 1300 900
38 VIC Speed integral compensation 48 ms 5 40
39 VDC Speed differential compensation 980 980 980
40 JOG operation acceleration/deceleration time constant 0 0
41Home position return operation acceleration/deceleration time constant
0 0
42 *ZPS Home position return position data 0 x10STMµm 0 0
43 DCT Moving distance after proximity dog 1000 x10STMµm 1000 1000
44 ZTM Stopper type home position return stopper time 100 ms 100 100
45 ZTT Stopper type home position return torque limit value 15 % 15 15
46*LMP Software limit + 0 x10STMµm 0 0
47
48*LMN Software limit - 0 x10STMµm 0 0
49
50*LPP Position range output address + 0 x10STMµm 0 0
51
52*LNP Position range output address - 0 x10STMµm 0 0
53
Expansion Parameters 2
54 For manufacturer setting 0000 0000 0000
55 *OP6 Function selection 6 0000 0000 0000
56 For manufacturer setting 0000 0000 0000
57 *OP8 Function selection 8 0000 0000 0000
58 *OP9 Function selection 9 0000 0000 0000
59 *OPA Function selection A 0000 0000 0000
60 For manufacturer setting 0000 0000 0000
61 NH1 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 0000 0000 0000
62 NH2 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 0000 0000 0000
63 LPF Low-pass filter, adaptive vibration suppression control 0000 0000 0000
64 GD2B Ratio of load inertia moment to Servo motor inertia moment 70 1/10 Ratio 70 80
65 PG2B Position control gain 2 changing ratio 100 % 100 100
66 VG2B Speed control gain 2 changing ratio 100 % 100 120
67 VICB Speed integral compensation changing ratio 100 % 100 100
68 *CDP Gain changing selection 0000 0000 0004
69 CDS Gain changing condition 10 (Note) 10 10
70 CDT Gain changing time constant 1 ms 1 1
71
For manufacturer setting
100 100 100
72 10000 10000 10000
73 10 10 10
74 OUT1 output time selection 10 10 10
NO. Symbol Name and functionInitial Value
Unit
Customer setting
Feed Carriage
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION MEDIA TRANSPORT
1 - 44 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
6.2. Printed Circuit Boards
The following printed circuits boards are part of the servo drivers:
! �TAKE UP PCB� on page 1-148
! �DRIVER COMMUNICATION PCB� on page 1-156
75 OUT2 output time selection 100 100 100
76 OUT3 output time selection 100 100 100
77 Selected to program input polarity selection 100 100 100
Special Parameters
78
For manufacturer setting
0000 0000 0000
79 0009 0009 0009
80 080A 080A 080A
81 0706 0706 0706
82 020B 020B 020B
83 0504 0504 0000
84 0032 0032 0032
85 0000 0000 0000
86 0005 0005 0005
87 0D04 0D04 0D04
88 0102 0102 0102
89 0 0 0
90 0 0 0
NO. Symbol Name and functionInitial Value
Unit
Customer setting
Feed Carriage
INK SUPPLY SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 45 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
7. Ink Supply System
7.1. Functional Description
7.1.1. General Information
P C
PC FOR RTL FILE(RIPPING)
HEAD LIFTPCB
UP/DOWNSENSOR
UP/LOCKSOLENOID
STEP MOTOR
MEMORY
FPGA CIRCUIT
RS 232
FPGA PCB
CONTROL CIRCUIT
INTERFACE CIRCUIT
MAIN PCB
CARRIAGE SERVO MOTOR DRIVE
FEED SERVOMOTOR DRIVE
FEED MOTORCARRIAGE
MOTOR
SUB PCB
P L C (K7M-DR60S)
PUSH ROLLER(FRONT/REAR)
UV LAMP CONTROL
TOWER LAMP CONTROL
MEDIA STOP CONTROL
UV LAMP
REFILL PCB
PRESSURE SENSOR
NEGATIVEPRESSURECONTROL
FEED BACK ON/OFF
ZERO GAIN CONTROL
ITVCONTROLLERPCB
ITV
SUB INK TANK FLOAT SENSOR
HEAD PCB
CARTRIDGE PCB
PRINT HEAD
HEATING120VDC
WASTE TANK OVER FLOW SENSOR
SUB SOLUTION TANK FLOAT SENSOR
REFILL CONTROL PCB
MAIN INK TANK INDICATOR PCB
TAKE UPMOTOR
TAKE UP PCB
I/O PCB DRIVER COMM. PCB
IF PCB
PID CONTROLLER
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION INK SUPPLY SYSTEM
1 - 46 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
7.1.2. Ink Supply Flowchart
The Ink supply flowchart below shows:
! The ink flow in the machine.
! The different parts of the ink system.
Figure 1.19: Ink supply flowchart
7.1.3. Key Parts For Ink Supply
InkBottle
ColorInk Tank+Air Filter
Sub Ink Tank (6C)
SolutionTank
Ink/SolutionValve
Print Head
Ink
Ink Pump
IN OUT IN OUT
Ink Filter
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 97
1 Ink bottle 4 Ink filter 7 Sub ink tank (6C and W)
2 Main ink tank 5 Ink hose fixing (top) 8 Ink/Solution Valve
3 Ink pump 6 Ink hose fixing (bottom) 9 Print head
INK SUPPLY SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 47 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
7.1.3.1. Main ink tank / Main solution tank
! Ink tank
! The print engine is equipped with a swinging ink supply door with 7 stainless steel ink tanks and one cleaning main solution tank.
! The successive colors are White (W), Light Magenta (Lm), Light Cyan (Lc), Yellow (y), Magenta (M), Cyan (C) and Black (K). The far right tank is the main solution tank.
! Contents: 1.6 litre per color, 4 litre for white ink tank.
! White ink tank has a continuous working stirring rod inside. Adjust the ON (1) and OFF (2) timer of the stirring rod to the desired value (hour scale division).
! Ink tank indicator
! The ink tank indicator panel controls the full/empty state of each ink tank. The capacity is measured by means of 2 floaters in the ink tank, one for minimum and one for maximum.
! Low level detection at 0.3 l (4h to print), high level detection at 1.2 l. If ink tank is empty, the yellow tower lamp starts flashing and beeping.
2
1
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION INK SUPPLY SYSTEM
1 - 48 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
! Refill system
! The system is provided with an automatic/manual ink refill system.
! Ink can be refilled in while printing.
! Ink bottle/Solution Bottle
The ink and solution is stored in bottles of 1 liter. The color is indicated on a label.
When pouring ink and solution, you have to keep in mind the followings:
WARNING: ONLY refill with the 1 liter bottle, when the low level alarm goes off. At that point, you can pour in a complete 1 l bottle.
WARNING: Always pour out ink bottles into the main ink tanks.
WARNING: When pouring ink into the ink tank, try to pour gently by holding the bottle so the ink does not gurgle.
WARNING: Carefully read the instructions on the warning label when handling the UV ink.
WARNING: UV ink contains some chemicals harmful to eyes and skin. Always wear safety gloves when handling UV ink. In case of accidental contact, rinse immediately with plenty of water and consult a doctor, if required.
CAUTION: Do not use ink other than the ones recommended by AGFA. Other ink may cause nozzle clogging or other serious problems to your printer.
INK SUPPLY SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 49 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
7.1.3.2. Ink pump
The ink pump pumps the ink from the main ink tank into the sub ink tank. The ink is transported via an ink supply tube located in the chain.
7.1.3.3. Ink filter
Bleeding the ink filter is necessary in two circumstances:
! When starting up the Anapurna L/XL for the first time after installation, bleed each ink filter after filling each ink tank with 1 liter of ink.
! If an ink tank has remained empty during too long a period and if consequently, the ink filter is dry.
Checking the ink filter.
! After filling ink into the main ink tanks, start bleeding the ink filters. Bleeding the air from an ink filter is necessary to fill the ink circuit completely with ink. If you do not extract the air from the ink filter, overflow, leaking heads, missing nozzles can occur because the sub ink tank is filled with air. Bleeding occurs manually.
! The ink filter should not be exposed to fluorescent light and sunlight.
7.1.3.4. Ink tubes
! from main tank to ink pump.
! from ink pump to ink filter.
! from ink filter to hose fixing guide, located behind the home rear door.
! from hose fixing guide, through the upper cable trunk (chain), to the sub ink tanks.
CAUTION: Respect the color sequence of the ink buffer system. Each ink tank is fitted with a colored label indicating the color type.
CAUTION: Especially, do not confuse between �Magenta and Light Magenta�, or between �Cyan and Light Cyan�.
CAUTION: Don�t bleed inks around the tanks.
CAUTION: Be aware that the main solution tank is always full with solution liquids.
NOTE: Only the white ink bottle needs to be shaken before use.
NOTE: For more information about bleeding the ink filters, refer to �Bleeding the Ink Filters� on page 4-56 (chapter Preventive Maintenance).
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION INK SUPPLY SYSTEM
1 - 50 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
7.1.3.5. Sub ink tank (6C + White)
The sub ink tanks are located at the front side of the head carriage unit. We distinguish two sub ink tanks:
! Sub ink tank (6C)
A sub ink tank for the six colors, the successive colors from left to right are: K, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm. Each sub ink tank has a content of 35 ml per color.
! Sub ink tank (White)
A white sub ink tank for the spot-white and pre-white print head.
! The level of each sub ink tank is controlled by means of a float senor connected to the Head PCB.
! The temperature of the 6C sub ink tank and the white sub ink tank is controlled by means of a temperature sensor build underneath an orange heater plate.
The upper value on the Sub Ink Tank Temp. PID panel (1) and the White Sub Ink Tank Temp. PID panel (2) indicates the actual temperature respectively measures by the temperature sensor of the 6C sub ink tank and the white sub ink tank.
21
1 6 Sub ink tank for each color 2 1 Sub ink tank for white
21
INK SUPPLY SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 51 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
! Temperature setting sub ink tank (6C + W) should be:
! To adjust the sub ink tank temperature and the white sub ink tank temperature, use the keypad underneath the display.
Adjusting the sub ink tank temperature (6C and/or white) will affect the orange heater plates (6c and/or white) build underneath the sub ink tank (6C and/or white).
! A head temperature sensor (safety thermostat 45°C) is connected on the Magenta print head (Head 3 - black cable). The sensor in the Magenta print head controls output to the heater bars to each head.
This head temperature sensor is connected to J29 on the Head PCB.
Settings Printing with white ink Printing without white ink
Sub ink tank temperature (1) 38°C 38°C
White sub ink tank temperature (2) 40°C 25°C
3
2
1
1 PV: processing value indicator (RED) 3 Keypad
2 SV: setting value indicator (GREEN
21 3 4
1 Heater Plate of white sub ink tank 3 J14 Head Lift PCB
2 Heater Plate of 6C sub ink tank 4 J25 Head Lift PCB
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION INK SUPPLY SYSTEM
1 - 52 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
To change the set value during run, proceed as follows:
1 Press the key.
The right digit of the SV indicator is flashing red.
2 Use the key, to shift one digit to the left.
As a result the second digit of the SV indicator is flashing red now.
3 Repeat pressing the key, until you reach the desired digit.
4 Press the and keys to adjust the set value of the selected digit.
5 When the setting is completed, press the MD key.
The flashing stops and the controller returns to �Run� status.
6 Press the AT key to close the procedure.
7.1.3.6. Solution tank
The solution tank is located at the rear side of the head carriage unit besides the sub air tank.
! The level of the solution tank is controlled by means of a level senor connected to the Head PCB.
! The temperature of the solution tank is not controlled.
7.1.3.7. The 2-way valves
When the print head valves (K, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm, W1 and W2) are set to the ink outlet position (I). The ink can flow to the head.
In case of clogged nozzles, or misfiring nozzles, clean the print heads to unclog the missing nozzles.
CAUTION: Be aware that the solution tank is always full with solution liquids.
1 2 3
4 5
1 K, C, M, Y, Lc and Lm valve 4 Ink outlet direction2 W valves 5 Solution outlet direction3 Solution (S) valve
NOTE: For more information about cleaning the print heads, refer to �Cleaning a Print Head� on page 4-38 (chapter Preventive Maintenance).
INK SUPPLY SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 53 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
7.1.3.8. Print head
7.1.3.9. Waste tank
The stainless steel waste tank is located underneath the conveyor belt, attached with 2 clamping brackets to the rear left side of the engine.
! Full detection sensor.
When waste liquid comes to a certain level in the waste tank (content > 3.5 litre), the blue tower lamp starts flashing and the buzzer starts. The full detection sensor connector (2-pin), is located in the cable trunk.
! Check waste ink tank.
Use the tap underneath the waste tank to empty the waste tank.
! Ink overflow
Ink overflow happens when ink runs through from the sub ink tank to the sub air tank. At that time, all tower lamp start flashing and beeping. For more information, refer to �Overflow (of Ink) in Sub Air Tank� on page 5-5 (chapter Troubleshooting).
NOTE: For more information, refer to the functional description of the �Print Head� on page 1-61.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION INK SUPPLY SYSTEM
1 - 54 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
7.2. Printed Circuit Boards
The following printed circuits boards are part of the ink supply system:
! �REFILL PCB� on page 1-117
! �TAKE UP PCB� on page 1-148
! �REFILL CONTROL PCB� on page 1-150
! �INDICATOR PCB� on page 1-153
HEAD CARRIAGE MOVEMENT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 55 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
8. Head Carriage Movement
8.1. Functional Description
8.1.1. General Information
P C
PC FOR RTL FILE(RIPPING)
HEAD LIFTPCB
UP/DOWNSENSOR
UP/LOCKSOLENOID
STEP MOTOR
MEMORY
FPGA CIRCUIT
RS 232
FPGA PCB
CONTROL CIRCUIT
INTERFACE CIRCUIT
MAIN PCB
CARRIAGE SERVO MOTOR DRIVE
FEED SERVOMOTOR DRIVE
FEED MOTORCARRIAGE
MOTOR
SUB PCB
P L C (K7M-DR60S)
PUSH ROLLER(FRONT/REAR)
UV LAMP CONTROL
TOWER LAMP CONTROL
MEDIA STOP CONTROL
UV LAMP
REFILL PCB
PRESSURE SENSOR
NEGATIVEPRESSURECONTROL
FEED BACK ON/OFF
ZERO GAIN CONTROL
ITVCONTROLLERPCB
ITV
SUB INK TANK FLOAT SENSOR
HEAD PCB
CARTRIDGE PCB
PRINT HEAD
HEATING120VDC
WASTE TANK OVER FLOW SENSOR
SUB SOLUTION TANK FLOAT SENSOR
REFILL CONTROL PCB
MAIN INK TANK INDICATOR PCB
TAKE UPMOTOR
TAKE UP PCB
I/O PCB DRIVER COMM. PCB
IF PCB
PID CONTROLLER
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION HEAD CARRIAGE MOVEMENT
1 - 56 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
8.1.2. Head Carriage Part View
The head carriage unit can move in two directions:
! Horizontal movement
from purge to home position and vice versa along 2 LM guides, also know as carriage rail.
! Vertical movement
head lifting along the along 2 LM guides (head lifting type).
Figure 1.20: Head carriage unit - parts & movement
1 2 4 5 63
7
8
9
10
1
1 UV source 6 Sub ink tank (W)
2 Print Head 7 Upper LM guide
3 Head base plate 8 Linear scale (Encoder strip)
4 Manual head height setting knob 9 Lower LM guide
5 Sub ink tank (6C) 10 S3M belt, carriage belt
HEAD CARRIAGE MOVEMENT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 57 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
8.1.3. Head Base Height Control
Two manners to control the head base height;
! Automatic head base height control.
! Manual head base height control
8.1.3.1. Automatic head base height setup
The printer is equipped with an automatic head measuring device to be able to measure the media height easily and correctly. The automatic head base height must be done every time you change the print medium.
Fill out the parameters in the Head Gap Control group of the Setup parameters window.
8.1.3.2. Manual head base height setup
This is just a quick way to check the current Head Base Height. You can use this procedure to check the head base height at different positions along the entire media width.
To execute a manual head base height, proceed as follows:
1 Select Carriage Release Test (1) in the Test Menu window.
As a result, the head carriage unit is disconnected from the motor, which allows you to move the head carriage unit manually.
2 Click Test (2).
NOTE: For more information about how to set the head gap, refer to �Head Gap Control� on page 1-84.
1
2
3
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION HEAD CARRIAGE MOVEMENT
1 - 58 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
The head carriage unit can now be moved manually from right to left.
3 Push the head carriage unit to the desired position and check the head height by using a thickness measuring device underneath the head base plate.
4 Repeat step 3.
5 When finished, push the head carriage close to the home position.
6 Select Reset Test (3) in the Test Menu window.
8.1.3.3. Manual head height setting knob
The manual height adjustment knob (1) is located at the rear side of the head carriage. Use this knob to calibrate the Reference parameter (2) in the Head Gap Control group.
12
34
56
7
2
1
NOTE: For more information about the Reference value, refer to �Factory Set� on page 1-86.
HEAD CARRIAGE MOVEMENT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 59 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
8.1.4. Linear Scale Encoder
8.1.4.1. General Information
The head carriage unit moves from the home to the purge along a metal linear scale encoder (1). The linear scale is divided as follows:
! Thick stripes every 50 mm, named MARK.
! Small stripes every 20 µm (50/2500 steps), named ENC.
The encoder (2) is used to determine the position of the head carriage unit. The encoder is mounted on the encoder bracket (3), which is attached to the carriage bottom plate. The encoder reads the linear scale (1) in order to encode the position of the head carriage unit.
Every time the encoder (2) passes a MARK and ENC stripe on the linear scale (1) during the movement of the head carriage unit from the home limit switch (4) to the purge position, the MARK LED (7) and ENC LED 6) on the Main PCB (5) lights up respectively.
The encoder parameters are Max. Platen Size, Home Pos.Offset, Max. Mark Count and Carriage Gear Ratio and are defined in the Factory Data Setting window. Refer to �Factory Set� on page 1-86.
1
5
76
432
1 Linear scale (encoder strip) 5 Main PCB
2 Encoder 6 ENC LED (Encoder)
3 Encoder bracket 7 MARK LED
4 Limit switch (home position)
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION HEAD CARRIAGE MOVEMENT
1 - 60 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
8.1.4.2. Encoder Test
Execute an encoder test in the following circumstances:
! To measure the encoder pulses.
If the encoder reads the linear scale normally, the head carriage repeatedly moves from left to right .
If the encoder cannot read correctly, the error message �encoder failed� is displayed on the window pane.
! When the head base plate temperature is too high (> 38°C), run the encoder test for 5 minutes allowing the head carriage unit to move without printing. As a result temperature of the head base plate will go down.
For more information about the head base plate temperature, refer to �Head Base Temperature Control� on page 1-63.
Note that a temperature of <40°C should be possible with a 2-ventilator system.
8.1.4.3. Encoder Check
An encoder check is required in the following circumstances:
! the head carriage unit is not moving,
! the head carriage unit is not moving smoothly,
! the position of the head carriage unit is shifting.
8.2. Printed Circuit Boards
The following printed circuits boards are part of the ink supply system:
! �HEAD LIFT PCB� on page 1-127
! �DRIVER COMMUNICATION PCB� on page 1-156
NOTE: For more information about the encoder check, refer to �Encoder Checking� on page 4-25 (chapter Preventive Maintenance)
PRINT HEAD FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 61 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
9. Print Head
9.1. Functional Description
P C
PC FOR RTL FILE(RIPPING)
HEAD LIFTPCB
UP/DOWNSENSOR
UP/LOCKSOLENOID
STEP MOTOR
MEMORY
FPGA CIRCUIT
RS 232
FPGA PCB
CONTROL CIRCUIT
INTERFACE CIRCUIT
MAIN PCB
SUB PCB
P L C (K7M-DR60S)
PUSH ROLLER(FRONT/REAR)
UV LAMP CONTROL
TOWER LAMP CONTROL
MEDIA STOP CONTROL
UV LAMP
REFILL PCB
PRESSURE SENSOR
NEGATIVEPRESSURECONTROL
FEED BACK ON/OFF
ZERO GAIN CONTROL
ITVCONTROLLERPCB
ITV
SUB INK TANK FLOAT SENSOR
HEAD PCB
CARTRIDGE PCB
PRINT HEAD
HEATING120VDC
WASTE TANK OVER FLOW SENSOR
SUB SOLUTION TANK FLOAT SENSOR
REFILL CONTROL PCB
MAIN INK TANK INDICATOR PCB
TAKE UPMOTOR
TAKE UP PCB
I/O PCB DRIVER COMM. PCB
IF PCB
PID CONTROLLER
CARRIAGE SERVO MOTOR DRIVE
FEED SERVOMOTOR DRIVE
FEED MOTORCARRIAGE
MOTOR
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINT HEAD
1 - 62 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
9.1.1. Ink Supply By Means of Negative Pressure
9.1.1.1. General Information
! By means of negative pressure, the ink is kept in the print heads. A too high setting will cause missing ink nozzles, or no ink firing at all. When the pressure is too low, the ink will leak out of the heads.
! The negative pressure should be set to -.0.32 MPa. The system will adjust the setting, when the temperature on the head base plate is too high. This is an automatic function, the customer will never see a change on the display.
! When using White ink:
It is possible that the negative pressure needs to be tuned towards approximately -0.036 MPa, to get a stable nozzle behavior for the white heads. With the white ink, a higher temperature will result in a lower viscosity (more liquid state), which can lead to ink �pooling� underneath the print head.
Tip: Let the print heads leaking and adjust 4 units higher.
9.1.1.2. How To Make Changes
To adjust the vacuum pressure (1):
1 unlock the pressure control adjustment knob (3) by pushing the switch (2) to the left.
2 turn the pressure control adjustment knob until you reach the desired pressure (range -0.032 MPa to -0.038 MPa).
3 push the switch back to secure the pressure control adjustment knob.
Settings Printing with white ink Printing without white ink
Vacuum pressure -0.034 to -0.038 MPa -0.032 to -0.035 MPa
NOTE: �Pooling�: ink build up underneath the print head, causing nozzle failure. As the head needs to fire drops, the fired drops are not getting through the pool of ink underneath the head. An increase of negative pressure, (-0.036 MPa) will bring the ink more upwards into the meniscus of the print head, thus preventing the pooling.
1
2
3
PRINT HEAD FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 63 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
9.1.2. Head Base Temperature Control
9.1.2.1. General Information
Read-out on display:
! The upper value on the display is the actual temperature, the lower value is only an indication without meaning. The actual temperature will not change if you change the lower value.
! The actual temperature needs to be 32°C when engine is not in use (cold engine).
! When printing, the temperature increase. For good printing results, the temperature indication should not exceed 38°C.
! Make sure you print with closed engine doors all the time, especially when room temperatures are 25°C and above. This will give you the best cooling inside the engine.
9.1.2.2. Temperature detection components and setting components
! The temperature of the head base plate is measured by means of a temperature sensor, which is built into the PT sensor bracket. The PT sensor bracket is fixed to the head base plate.
The temperature sensor is connected to J17 of the Head Lift PCB and leads through the Head Base Temp. PID panel. So this sensor only measures and indicates the actual temperature of the head base on the Head Base Temp PID display.
If you disconnect J17 from the Head Lift PCB, the text "Open" appears on the Head Base Temp PID display.
Settings Printing with white ink Printing without white ink
Head base temperature (cold) 32°C 32°C
NOTE: In case the head base temperature > 38°C during printing, do the following:� stop printing at the end of the current print job� switch off the UV-lamps and � run the Encoder Test for 5 minutes (refer to �Encoder Count Test� on page 1-89).
The carriage will now move continuously without printing, allowing the base plate to cool down.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINT HEAD
1 - 64 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
! A safety thermostat (80°C) is mounted on head base plate.
! The setting in the Head PCB is driving the heating elements of the different printing heads (heater bar - red cables).
To have a temperature on the head base plate, you must heat the heater bar of each print head. Each heater bar (K, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm, W) is connected to the Head PCB.
1 2
1 PT sensor bracket 2 Temperature sensor cable
M Y Lc
M Y Lc Lm W
PRINT HEAD FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 65 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
9.1.2.3. How To Make Changes
The temperature of the head base plate can only be tuned by changing the head PCB voltage.
To adjust the head base temperature:
1 Adjust the head PCB voltage of the head PCB by turning the blue VR temperature potentiometer clock wise (CW) or counter clock wise (CCW). The head PCB is positioned underneath the sub ink tank.
2 Turn CCW to lower the temperature. Note that a voltage of approximately 1.6 V can be seen as guidance and corresponds with a temperature of 32°C on most engine configurations.
The higher the voltage value, the lower the temperature value.
9.2. Printed Circuit Boards
The following printed circuits boards are part of the print head:
! �HEAD PCB� on page 1-108
! �CARTRIDGE PCB� on page 1-123
! �HEAD LIFT PCB� on page 1-127
! �SUB PCB� on page 1-136
! �IF PCB� on page 1-140
Head PCB
Cartridge PCBs
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION UV CURING
1 - 66 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
10. UV Curing
10.1. Functional Description
P C
PC FOR RTL FILE(RIPPING)
HEAD LIFTPCB
UP/DOWNSENSOR
UP/LOCKSOLENOID
STEP MOTOR
MEMORY
FPGA CIRCUIT
RS 232
FPGA PCB
CONTROL CIRCUIT
INTERFACE CIRCUIT
MAIN PCB
SUB PCB
P L C (K7M-DR60S)
PUSH ROLLER(FRONT/REAR)
UV LAMP CONTROL
TOWER LAMP CONTROL
MEDIA STOP CONTROL
UV LAMP
REFILL PCB
PRESSURE SENSOR
NEGATIVEPRESSURECONTROL
FEED BACK ON/OFF
ZERO GAIN CONTROL
ITVCONTROLLERPCB
ITV
SUB INK TANK FLOAT SENSOR
HEAD PCB
CARTRIDGE PCB
PRINT HEAD
HEATING120VDC
WASTE TANK OVER FLOW SENSOR
SUB SOLUTION TANK FLOAT SENSOR
REFILL CONTROL PCB
MAIN INK TANK INDICATOR PCB
TAKE UPMOTOR
TAKE UP PCB
I/O PCB DRIVER COMM. PCB
IF PCB
PID CONTROLLER
CARRIAGE SERVO MOTOR DRIVE
FEED SERVOMOTOR DRIVE
FEED MOTORCARRIAGE
MOTOR
UV CURING FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 67 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
10.1.1. General Information
Two UV sources take care of the on the fly curing. They are positioned symmetrically left and right of the printing heads.
! High speed on-the-fly curing.
! Curing power: 120 W/cm.
! 2 fixed settings: full and half strength.
! Air cooled lamp-house.
! Quick and easy replacement of the UV-bulbs (always change both the lamps).
! Expected lifetime 1000 hours (full strength).
! Use of an automated shutter system.
10.1.2. Curing Setup (Software Settings)
For more information, refer to the �UV Options� on page 1-83.
1 2
1 UV source (left) 2 UV source (right)
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION UV CURING
1 - 68 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
10.1.3. UV Lamp Power Setting
Depending on the heat-resistance/thickness of your media, you can set the UV lamp power to �Half� or �Full� power. By default, �Full� power should be used whenever possible.
! For Bi-directional printing, both UV lamps need to be used (curing is done on the fly in both directions).
! For Uni-directional printing, only the right UV lamp will be used (curing is only done when the head carriage unit is moving from right to left).
NOTE: Full power is only switched to the lamps when printing. Even if the switch is set to full power immediately, the lamp will remain at half power when on standby.
NOTE: Once the lamps are switched off, it is important that both cooling fans are left on long enough to complete the cool-down cycle of the lamps.
UV CURING FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 69 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
10.1.4. UV Lamp Assembly
1
4
2
3
3
6
8
5
7
9
10
1 Lamp power connector (4P) 6 Lamp shutter signal connector (2P)(LAMP SHUTTER L label)
2 UV lamp box 7 Lamp shutter ON pneumatic tube (yellow)
3 Lamp case outer air inlet AC FAN 8 Lamp shutter OFF pneumatic tube (red
4 UV lamp box housing 9 Lamp case inner air outlet DC FAN
5 Lamp signal connector (10P)(LAMP-L-SIG label)
10 UV Lamp
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION UV CURING
1 - 70 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
10.1.5. UV Lamp Power Box Description
Located behind the main box left side door.
10.1.5.1. Outer Description
Figure 1.21: UV lamp power box (outer description) - parts
1
12
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
1 AC fuse 7 (R) HIRight UV lamp status indicator - full power
2 DC fuse 8 Air inhalation hole
3 POWLamp status indicator - Power ON
9 RIGHT lamp connector (7P)
4 (L) LOWLeft UV lamp status indicator - half power
10 RIGHT lamp connector (4P)
5 (R) LOWRight UV lamp status indicator - half power
11 LEFT lamp connector (7P)
6 (L) HILeft UV lamp status indicator - full power
12 LEFT lamp connector (4P)
UV CURING FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 71 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
10.1.5.2. Inner Description
Figure 1.22: UV lamp power box (inner description) - parts
Figure 1.23: UV lamp power box (inner description) - detail low voltage and high voltage relays
7 6 5
4
3
2
1
9
8
1 Low voltage relays 6 Elcos (#6)
2 Right lamp power settings 7 High voltage relays
3 Left lamp power settings 8 UV lamp PLC, type K7M-DR40S
4 AC cooling fan 9 Relays
5 Power supply SMPS #6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Relay ACfan (L) 5 Relay MC(R) - HIGH
2 Relay ACfan (R) 6 Relay MC(R) - LOW
3 Relay SHUTTER (L) 7 Relay MC(L) - HIGH (not visible)
4 Relay SHUTTER (R) 8 Relay MC(L) - LOW (not visible)
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION UV CURING
1 - 72 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
Figure 1.24: UV lamp power box (inner description) - detail Relays and UV lamp PLC
10.1.6. UV Lamp Power Settings
The left (1) and right (2) UV lamp power settings are set according to the outer power supply (voltage/frequency).
1
2
3
4
5
1 RK2 relay 4 LK1 relay
2 RK1 relay 5 UV lamp PLC, type K7M-DR40S
3 LK2 relay
1 2
250V
220V
208V
60Hz
50Hz
250V
220V
208V
60Hz
50Hz
1 UV lamp power (left) 2 UV lamp power (right)
WARNING: Keep in mind always to plug the connector to the voltage connection equal to or larger than the effective input voltage. Possible connections are: 208/220/250V, 50/60Hz.e.g. if the input voltage is 235V (Spain), connect to the 250V connection.
UV CURING FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 73 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
10.1.7. Diagrams
! Connections in the UV lamp power box
For the electrical diagram, refer to �UV Lamp Power Box Connections� on page 7-15 (chapter Annex).
! Power supply distribution
For the electrical diagram, refer to �UV Lamp Power Circuit� on page 7-17 (chapter Annex).
! UV lamp head Part
For the diagram, refer to �UV Lamp Head Part� on page 7-19 (chapter Annex).
! UV lamp power cables
For the diagram, refer to �UV Lamp Power Cables� on page 7-21 (chapter Annex).
Briefly:
! The 4P lamp connector provides voltage feed for the UV lamp (pin A and pin C) and the AC fan (pin B).
! The 10P (7P) connector provides the control signals for the shutter and the thermistors.
If the UV lamp box is not correctly joined in the UV lamp box housing, pin J and pin K of the 10P connector are not closed.
UV Lamp Power Box
UV Lamp Assy (Left)
4P connector (L)
4P connector (L & R)7P connector (L & R)
10P connector (L)
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION UV CURING
1 - 74 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
10.2. Printed Circuit Boards
The following printed circuits boards are part of the UV curing:
! �SUB PCB� on page 1-136
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 75 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
11. Programmable Logic controller (PLC)
11.1. Functional Description
11.1.0.1. Figure
Figure 1.25: Main PLC - type K7M-DR60S
Figure 1.26: UV lamp PLC - type K7M-DR40S
11.1.0.2. Location
! The main PLC is located behind the control system cover. Accessible via the ink supply door.
! The UV lamp PLC is located in the UV lamp power box. Accessible via the main box left side door.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)
1 - 76 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
11.1.0.3. Diagrams
! Main PLC
For the diagram (A3 format), refer to �Main PLC� on page 7-25 (chapter Annex).
! UV lamp PLC
For the diagram (A3 format), refer to �UV Lamp PLC� on page 7-27 (chapter Annex).
11.1.0.4. Connectors Main PLC
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5045-4P SUB J4 1 P014
2 P00A
3 P013
4 P012
5 P011
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5027-2P REFILL J13
1 P0B
2 NOT USED
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
SELECT S/W 1 GND
2 P005
3 GND
4 P004
+ 24V+
- P005
1 N.C
2 N.C
3 P016
4 GND
+ P051
- GND
1 N.C
2 N.C
3 P017
4 GND
+ P052
- GND
1 GND
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 77 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2 P003
3 GND
4 P007
+ 24V+
- P003
1 GND
2 P006
3 GND
4 P008
+ 24V+
- P003
1 GND
2 P000
3 GND
4 P002
+ 24V+
- P000
1 N.C
2 N.C
3 P018
4 GND
+ P052
- GND
1 N.C
2 N.C
3 P019
4 GND
+ P052
- GND
N.O P0C
COM GND
+ P04B
- GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
D-SUB 15P LAMP PLC
GND 1
44 2
46 3
43 4
45 5
4D 6
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)
1 - 78 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4F 7
9 9
10 10
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
EPDB BLOWER START
E066 GND
E044 P041
E034 P042
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5557-8P SOL V/V P04E 1
P052 2
P051 3
GND 4
P040 5
GND 6
GND 7
GND 8
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
SOL VT 301 P015 VT301
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5557 - 4P *2 TOWER LAMP
P047 1
P048 2
P049 3
P04A 4
P04B 1
P04C 2
GND 3
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 79 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5557-2P WASTE TANK SENSOR
P001 1
GND 2
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ANAPURNA CONTROL PROGRAM
1 - 80 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
12. Anapurna Control Program
12.1. Control Program
The Anapurna Control program on the engine's PC.
NOTE: The Anapurna Control Program is discussed in detail in the Operator Manual.
NOTE: Here only the buttons used for maintenance actions are discussed.
1 3 4 5
6
7
8
9
10
1112141516
22
13
1 IMAGE SIZE display window 9 To indicate the printing progress
2 To open an image file(.rtl) 10 STATUS Message display window
3 To access the Setup Parameters window 11 To move head carriage unit to Home position
4 Select pass mode 12 To move head carriage unit to Purge position
5 To access the Test Menu window 13 To jog the loaded media Forwards/Backwards
6 To set Top (forward) and Left Margin 14 To move the loaded media Forwards/Backwards
7 To select Uni-Directional printing 15 To lift the head to highest position (>50mm)
8 To start printing 16 IMAGE display window
ANAPURNA CONTROL PROGRAM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 81 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
12.2. Buttons used for Maintenance Purposes
The table below lists the buttons that are used for maintenance purposes.
12.3. Setup Parameters
In the Control Program, click Setup to get access to the Setup Parameters window.
Button Explanation
Head Lift - Up To lift the head carriage in emergency situations, e.g. head colli-sion with the print media.
Carriage Position - Purge To move the head carriage to the purge position.
Carriage Position - Home To move the head carriage to the home position.
Media Feed - Jog To jog the loaded media forwards (+ value) or backwards (- value)Value range: -300 mm to + 300 mm
Media Feed - Back To move the loaded media backwards.
Media Feed - Forward To move the loaded media forwards.
Setup To open the Setup Parameters window.See �Setup Parameters� on page 1-81.
Test To open the Test Menu window.See �Test Menu� on page 1-88.
Window Fields
� Bi-Dir Alignment,� Step Size (Media Feed)� Carriage Speed� Feed Speed� UV Options� Head Gap Control� Factory Set
(password protected)� Data File Name� Head Offset
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ANAPURNA CONTROL PROGRAM
1 - 82 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
12.3.1. Bi-Dir Alignment
You can change the value when you see that the drops are deviated from their correct position. When printing Bi-di, the dots must be aligned and need to be jetted to the same position, printing from right-to-left, and when printing from left-to-right. A deviated Bi-Dir alignment will show as un-sharp text and blurry images.
For more information on how to check the Bi-Dir Alignment, refer to the Operator Manual.
12.3.2. Step Size (Media Feed)
The Step Size is also known as Media Feed. You can visually see on a printed image if you need to adjust the Step Size.
! To adjust the Step size, proceed as follows:
1 Visually check the printed image (see example below).
2 Change the Step Size value according to what you see.
3 Click Save As and overwrite the existing .dat-file in the Data File Name text box.
4 In the Control Program, click Test.
The Test Menu window appears.
5 In the Test Menu window, select Parameter Download and click Test.
Now, the new value is active.
NOTE: This only applies to Bi-directional printing!
Dark lines in the print, as a result of overlapping passes.
White lines in the print, as a result of a gap between the passes.
Solution: Increase the Step Size value from: e.g.: 51660 to 51680
Solution: Decrease the Step Size value from: e.g.: 51660 to 51640.
NOTE: For more information about the Test Menu window, refer to �Test Menu� on page 1-88.
ANAPURNA CONTROL PROGRAM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 83 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
12.3.3. Carriage Speed
The carriage speed is the printing speed of the head carriage unit. The engine has 5 pre-defined carriage speeds: 640, 900, 1060, 1230 and 1380.
! We consider 1230 as the default speed.
! When printing Uni-directional with 1230, the printing speed is 1230, and the returning speed (to home) is, by default set to 2000. As a result, you do not loose half your Bi-dir speed when printing Uni.
! To choose a random carriage speed, fill in a value besides *Carriage Speed.
12.3.4. Feed Speed
This is the forward speed of the conveyor belt between the print passes. A Feed Speed of "500" is considered the default.
No changes have to be made, unless you print at a high speed/low pass, and the conveyor belt is STILL feeding forward when the carriage already started to print the next pass.
12.3.5. UV Options
The table below lists the parameters of the UV Options group.
NOTE: Changes on the carriage speed, requires a �Parameter Download� in the Test menu.
Group Parameter Explanation
Cont. ON lamps continuous ON� Selected: the lamp stays on between 2 jobs, this is preferred (longest
lifetime)� Cleared: the lamp goes out between 2 jobs, you need to respect
cooling down- and warm-up time
WarmUp Time Time needed to warm-up the UV-lamps after switching on. (= the time before the green tower lamp lights up).
Cooling Time Time needed to cool-down the UV-Lamps after switching off (= the time the fans on the head carriage unit stays on after switching off the lamps).
Lamp Type � Cure (Default),� Set� Both
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ANAPURNA CONTROL PROGRAM
1 - 84 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
12.3.6. Head Gap Control
12.3.6.1. Head gap control parameters
The table below lists the parameters of the Head Gap Control group.
12.3.6.2. Executing a head gap control
! To set the head base height, execute a head gap control as follows:
1 Move the head carriage to the home position (front right side).
2 Load the media.
If no media is present, position the desired blank A4 paper on the print table between the 2 red marking bullets positioned on the axle underneath the white transport belt and within the reach of the 2 marking bullets positioned on the side of the head carriage.
Group Parameter Explanation
Gap Distance between media and head base.� recommended values: 1.5 mm for Rigid media, and 2 mm for Roll
media� range: min 1.5 mm to max. 6 mm.
Check Distance Check Distance = measured distance from the right side of the print-ing table to the first red bullet + 400 mm.
The head carriage unit will move from the home position to the check check distance to execute the "Set Gap".
Reference Distance where the sensing bracket recognize the position of the out-put material. This is also the point where the "Head Base" will wait for an on-screen confirmation, before going down to set the desired gap.
Note: � The reference value can only be changed in the Factory Data Set-
tings window. (See �Factory Set� on page 1-86).� To calibrate the reference value, use the manual head height setting
knob.
WARNING: Always make sure the head carriage is positioned in the HOME position, when you perform the "Set Gap" procedure.
ANAPURNA CONTROL PROGRAM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 85 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3 In the Control Program, click Setup.
The Setup Parameters window appears. Refer to �Setup Parameters� on page 1-81
4 Fill out the Gap value and the Check Distance value in the UV Options group.
Refer to �Head gap control parameters� on page 1-84.
5 Click Set Gap.
12.3.6.3. Example head gap control
1 Fill out a Gap value of 1.5 mm and a Check Distance value of 800 mm and click Set Gap.
The Head Base will stay in the home position and go up to the highest limit position (> 50mm).
2 After this movement, the following message appears.
3 Click Yes to confirm that the carriage is clear to move to the "Check Distance" position.
As a result, the head carriage unit will move 800mm to the left and come down to set the gap.
A sensor plate will become visible underneath the Head Base, to make contact with the media surface.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ANAPURNA CONTROL PROGRAM
1 - 86 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4 The Head Base will lower to his "Reference" point, and the following message appears.
5 Click OK to confirm the lowering from the reference point to the desired head base height (1.5 mm).
When this is done, the following message appears.
Verify the correct gap setting with a measuring device.
6 Click OK.
The head gap setup is completed.
12.3.7. Factory Set
This are the parameters behind the (password protected) button "Factory Set" in the Setup Parame-ters window. The Factory.set files (C:\anapurna\ )contain the settings from the engine.
12
34
56
7
ANAPURNA CONTROL PROGRAM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 87 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
15
1 No. of Colors: select color numbers to be output (default 6)
10 Uni-Speed: The return speed of the head carriage unit when printing in uni-directional mode.
2 Max. Platen Size:The maximum width from home position to purge position, expressed in motor encoder counts.
Max plate size = max mark count x carriage gear ratio (e.g. 379000 = 49 X 7742)
11 Top Margin Feed: The feed before a new print start
3 Left Margin Offset: The distance between the home position and the zero position (black nozzle row) from the image.
12 Carriage Gear Ratio: The gear pulley ratio from the carriage motor (the factor between head carriage unit encoder counts and linear encoder markers)Always 7742.
4 Mark Center Offset: The distance extra travelled after the image
13 Feed Gear Ratio: Reduction ratio at feed motor
5 Home Pos Offset: Distance between detecting Home position and real home position.
14 Head Gap Reference:Distance where the sensing bracket recognize the position of the output material. This is also the point where the "Head Base" will wait for an on-screen confirmation, before going down to set the desired gap.
6 Max. Mark Count:The markers counted (read by the encoder) from the home position to the purge position.
15 Head Offset: Head delay to map other colors onto black (= Software alignment of the inline heads).e.g. K CY:CY has to move to the right -CY has to move to the left +
7 Weep Time (Sec): The time between 2 weep actions.
16 White Color: White Selection mode for forward/backward optional white color
8 Weep Amount: While weeping once, set Weep amount.
17 Head Type: Spectra NOVA/GALAXY selection mode
9 Firing Pulse (mS): Weep Pulse time signal
18 Units: Metric (mm), English (Inch), decision �Unit�
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ANAPURNA CONTROL PROGRAM
1 - 88 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
12.3.8. Head Offset
These are the Head alignment settings for each head, in reference to the Black head. This alignment is done in advance by an engineer, do not change these values! If changes are required, go to the Factory Data Settings window to change the head offset values. (See �Factory Set� on page 1-86)
12.4. Test Menu
In the Control Program, click Test to get access to the Test Menu window.
12.4.1. Jet Test
This test is used to check the condition of the nozzle.
Window Fields
� Jet Test,� H-Orientation Test� Parameter Download� Carriage Release Test� Reset Test� Encoder Count Test
NOTE: The Jet Test is executed between the 2 white marking bullets positioned on the axle underneath the white transport belt and within the reach of the 2 marking bullets positioned on the side of the head carriage.
ANAPURNA CONTROL PROGRAM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 89 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
12.4.2. H-Orientation Test
This test is used to align all the heads, in reference to the black head, both horizontal and perpendicular.
When the engine is installed, or a print head has been exchanged, this test must be carried out by a technician.
12.4.3. Parameter Download
When you change one of the parameters marked with an "*" in the Setup Parameters window (�Setup Parameters� on page 1-81), select the option button Parameters Download to validate the new values.
12.4.4. Carriage Release Test
This feature is mainly intended for a service engineer, it allows the release of the carriage motor, which is normally anchored on both side's.
After executing, it is possible to move the head carriage unit by hand from right to left. To end this test, select Reset Test again, the head carriage unit will move slowly back to the Home position.
12.4.5. Reset Test
To reset the printer.
12.4.6. Encoder Count Test
To measure the encoder pulse.
WARNING: Do not push or pull on the UV-lamps. Only push on the back of the head carriage unit.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION WORKING WITH WHITE INK - GUIDELINES
1 - 90 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
13. Working with White Ink - Guidelines
13.1. Printing Jobs without White Ink
If not printing white ink jobs, proceed as follows:
1 During the printing process:
1.1 Close the white ink valves (S).Set the W1, W2 ink valve to the solution outlet position (S).
1.2 Lower the white sub ink tank temperature.See �Sub ink tank (6C + White)� on page 1-50.
2 During idle time or overnight:
2.1 Open white ink valves (I).Set the W1, W2 ink valve to the ink outlet position (I) for the automatic weeping functionality.
2.2 Keep the white sub ink tank temperature still low.
3 At restart, set the white ink valves back to the solution outlet position (S).
13.2. Application requires no White Ink at All
If no white ink is required at all for your range of application, execute the following adjustments:
1 Disconnect the stirrer drive connector (1) of the main white ink tank.
2 Disconnect the level sensor (2) of the main white ink tank.
12
1 Stirrer drive connector of main white ink tank
2 Level sensor connector of main white ink tank
WORKING WITH WHITE INK - GUIDELINES FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 91 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3 Disconnect the flat ribbon cable between the Spot White Cartridge PCB (J5) and the Head PCB and between the Pre White Cartridge PCB (J5) and the Head PCB, to avoid weeping of the white print heads.
4 Disconnect the white ink pump from the refill PCB.
13.3. Putting White Ink into the Circuit
If at a certain point in time, you decide to fill your engine with white ink, execute the following actions one after the other:
! Filling White Ink,
! Connecting the Spot White and Pre White Cartridge PCB,
! Setting the Temperature and Vacuum Control Settings,
! Aligning the White Heads.
Each action is discussed briefly in this section.
CARTRIDGE PCBs
M
Y
LcLm
C
K
Wspot Wpre
HEAD PCB
NOTE: If at a certain point in time, you decide to fill your engine with white ink, refer to �Putting White Ink into the Circuit� on page 1-91.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION WORKING WITH WHITE INK - GUIDELINES
1 - 92 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
13.3.1. Filling White Ink
1 Get access to the Refill PCB and check whether the following connectors are disconnected.
1.1 Connector J17 (power supply to the sub ink tank),
1.2 White ink pump connector.
2 Fill the white ink main with white ink.
3 Connect the following connectors.
3.1 Connect the white ink pump connector to the Refill PCB.
3.2 Connect the stirrer drive connector of the main white ink tank.
3.3 Connect the level sensor of the main white ink tank.
4 Bleed the white ink filter.
Connector J17 should remain disconnected.
4.1 Open the two caps of the white ink filter (top and bottom).
4.2 Place a receiving bin underneath the ink filter hole.
4.3 Press and hold the white priming switch. Use a 5/3 seconds on/off sequence (leave 5 seconds on, then 3 seconds off), until the white ink comes steadily out of the bottom hole of the filter for some seconds.
4.4 Screw, without tightening, the cap at the bottom of the white ink filter. Make sure that you put the cap straight onto the screw thread of the filter.
4.5 Press and hold the white priming switch again. Use a 5/3 seconds on/off sequence (leave 5 seconds on, then 3 seconds off), until the white ink flows upwards and is spilled.
4.6 Wait 5 seconds and repeat pressing and holding the white priming switch using 1/2 seconds on/off sequence (leave 1 seconds on, then 2 seconds off), and verify if ink still comes out of the filter. Then screw the cap on top of the ink filter and clean the ink filter with a cleaning tissue.
5 It is possible that you need to repeat the bleeding of the white ink filter via the top cap the following day.
When the other main ink tanks have also been filled and the filters bled.
1 Set all print head valves (K, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm, W1 and W2) to the solution outlet position (S) and the solution valve is set to the ink outlet position (I).
2 Make sure that the vacuum is off (negative pressure is at zero).
3 Open the drain cock of the sub air tank.
The sub air tank is located behind the purge rear door.
4 Get access to the Refill PCB and verify whether all pump connectors are connected. If so, connect connector J17 to the Refill PCB.
As a result, ink is pumped from the main ink tanks to the sub ink tanks.
When the pumps have finished pumping ink:
1 Close the drain cock of the sub air tank.
WORKING WITH WHITE INK - GUIDELINES FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 93 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2 Make sure that print head valves (K, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm, W1 and W2) are still in the solution outlet position (S) and the solution valve in the ink outlet position (I).
3 Shear the tubes of each ink drain valve.
Take care to make no kinks into the tubes.
4 Place a receiving bin underneath the valves and repeat for every valve, one after the other the following:
4.1 Set the valve to the ink outlet position (I) for some seconds until you drained the content of the sub ink tank.
4.2 Then close the valve (set to S position) and wait 10 seconds until the sub-ink tank is refilled.
4.3 Repeat this a second time.
5 Wipe off the ink drop from the valve using a fiber free cloth and reconnect the tube (hand fasten).
The easiest way to reconnect the tube onto the valve is to use a piece of paper or cloth around the tube. By doing so, you have more grip onto the tube without making a bend.
Now you can put the vacuum pressure to the initial value (range -0.032 MPa to -0.038 MPa) and continue with flushing the heads with cleaning solution.
13.3.2. Connecting the Spot White and Pre White Cartridge PCB
1 Power off the engine using the emergency stop button.
2 Connect the flat ribbon cable between the Spot White Cartridge PCB (J5) and the Head PCB and between the Pre White Cartridge PCB (J5) and the Head PCB.
3 Restart the engine.
13.3.3. Setting the Temperature and Vacuum Control Settings
Set the vacuum pressure, sub ink tank temperature, white sub ink tank temperature and head base temperature to the following values:
Setting Printing with white ink
Printing without white ink
Vacuum pressure -0.034 to -0.038 Mpa -0.032 to -0.035 MPa
Sub ink tank temperature 38°C 38°C
White sub ink tank temperature 40°C 25°C
Head base temperature (cold) 32°C** 32°C**
NOTE: Be aware that a new head requires the first hour a slightly lower vacuum pressure to wet the head nozzles and to get nozzles open. One�s all nozzles are sufficient wetted, put the vacuum to a higher final value to get reliable printing (see table above).
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION WORKING WITH WHITE INK - GUIDELINES
1 - 94 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
13.3.4. Aligning the White Heads
1 Print the alignment targets for front/back and head slant alignment of the spot white head (head no 7), and correct the alignment.
2 Print the media feed target to adjust the step-size parameter of your media feed, and correct until step size is OK.
3 Print the alignment targets for front/back and head slant alignment of the pre-white head (head no 8), and correct the alignment.
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 95 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14. Printed Circuit Boards
14.1. MAIN PCB
14.1.1. Main PCB Layout
14.1.1.1. Figure
14.1.1.2. Location
The main PCB is located in the control box of the Home unit.
13
1
912 810 711
3
4
2
6
5
1 Connection to home limit switch 8 Connection to I/O PCB
2 Connection to Driver Comm. PCB 9 Connection to PC COM1 (D-SUB 9P)
3 Connection to door interlock module 10 Connection to I/O PCB
4 Connection to Driver Comm. PCB 11 Connection to Refill PCB
5 To ENCODER 12 Connection to Head PCB
6 To SMPS #3 13 Connection to FPGA board
7 Connection to Driver Comm. PCB
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 96 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.1.1.3. Function
1 (J7) Connected to PC, execute User�s command.
2 (J16) Connected to FPGA Board, collect output data (= image data).
3 (J15) Connected to Head PCB, control output data and collect signals from sub ink tank.
4 (J5, J12) Control feed and carriage motor driver.
5 (J14) Collect information from linear scale encoder.
6 (J11) Connected to Refill PCB, control Refill.
7 (J17, J18) Connected to I/O PCB, collect and control lamp-on, lamp shutter, media set, feed limit signal.
8 (J8) Connected to limit, and control initial position.
MAIN PCB
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 97 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.1.2. Main PCB Description
14.1.2.1. Connectors
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
PCN10-50P J16 1 DC3.3V+ PCI BOARD J10
2 DC3.3V+
3 GND
4 GND
5 MCSELA
6 MCSELB
7 MCCLK
8 VIA3
9 VIA4
10 PCSELA
11 PCSELB
12 MCD0
13 MCD1
14 MCD2
15 MCD3
16 MCD4
17 MCD5
18 MCD6
19 MCD7
20 MCD8
21 MCD9
22 MCD10
23 MCD11
24 MCD12
25 MCD13
26 MCD14
27 MCD15
28 OEA
29 OEB
30 VIA5
31 VIA6
32 GND
33 GND
34 GND
35 GND
36 GND
37 GND
38 GND
39 GND
40 GND
41 GND
42 GND
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 98 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
43 GND
44 GND
45 GND
46 GND
47 GND
48 GND
49 DC3.3V+
50 DC3.3V+
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
D-SUB26P J15 1 DATA AB1 HEAD PCB J9 1
2 DATA CD1 2
3 DATA AB2 3
4 DATA CD2 4
5 DATE AB3 5
6 DATA CD3 6
7 DATA AB4 7
8 DATA CD4 8
9 DATA AB5 9
10 DATA CD5 10
11 DATA AB6 11
12 DATA CD6 12
13 DATA AB7 13
14 DATA CD7 14
15 DATA AB8 15
16 DATA CD8 16
17 MEDIA 17
18 SHIFT_CK 18
19 RX1_TTL 19
20 TX1_TTL 20
21 HV_CK 21
22 ERROR_OUT 22
23 HT_CNTRL 23
24 S.GND 24
25 S.GND 25
26 S.GND 26
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-5P J10 1 GND INTERLOCK MOD-ULE2 DC5V+
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 99 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-6P J11 1 GND REFILL PCB J17 3
2 N.C
3 N.C 2
4 TXD 1
5 N.C
6 N.C
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-3P J7 1 GND PC - COM1 D-SUB 9P 5
2 TX 2
3 RX 3
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-6P J5 1 GND DRIVER COMM. PCB
J5 (FEED) 1
2 TX 3
3 N.C.
4 RX 4
5 N.C.
6 N.C.
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
2P J4 1 GND
2 DC24V+
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-8P J12 1 GND DRIVER COMM. PCB
J6 (CARRIAGE) 1
2 MOTOR_RX_IN 2
3 3
4 GND 4
5 MOTOR_STOP 5
6 DC24V+ 7
7 N.C N.C
8 8
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 100 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-4P J9 1 GND DRIVER COMM. PCB
2 N.C
3 N.C
4 DC5V+
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-3P J8 1 GND HOME LIMIT S/W
2 HOME SENSOR
3 DC5V+
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-3P J17 1 DC5V+ I/O PCB J1 8
2 MEDIA SET 1 7
3 MEDIA SET 2 6
4 MEDIA SET 3 5
5 FEED LIMIT 4
6 LEFT SHTTER 3
7 RIGHT SHTTER 2
8 GND 1
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-5P J18 1 GND I/O PCB J4 5
2 EXT8 4
3 EXT7 3
4 DC24V+ 2
5 DC5V+ 1
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J14 1 CHASSIS GND
2 GND
3 ENCA+
4 ENCA-
5 ENCB+
6 GND
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 101 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.1.2.2. Led�s
14.1.2.3. Switches
14.1.2.4. Measurements
7 ENCRI+
8 ENCRI-
9 GND
10 DC5V+
11 ENCB-
12 DC5V+
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
RESET 1 24V+
2 GND
LED Color Indication
D1 Green 5V
D2 Green MOVE-L
D3 Green MOVE-R
D4 Green MEDIA
D5 Green WEEP
D6 Green SERV-R/S
D7 Green HV
D8 Green ERROR
D9 Green ENC
D10 Green MARK
D11 Green TEST
D12 Green TRAVEL
Switch Setting Description
RUN
FEED
STOP
J10 - To interlock module
Pin 1 (white) +0Vdc Ground
Pin 2 (black) +5Vdc when door open, alarm on
0V when door closed, alarm off
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 102 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.2. FPGA PCB
14.2.1. FPGA PCB Layout
14.2.1.1. Figure
1
2
3
1 (J10) Connection to MAIN PCB 3 (J7) Connection to PCI I/O card CN2
2 (J8) Connection to PCI I/O card CN1
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 103 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.2.1.2. Location
The FPGA PCB is located in the control box of the Home unit.
14.2.1.3. Function
The main functions of the FPGA PCB are:
1 Dividing the image data stream in different colors.
2 Collecting output data from the PCI I/O card.
The PCI I/O card is fixed on the PC Main board.
3 Transferring output data to the Main PCB.
FGPA PCB
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 104 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.2.2. FPGA PCB Description
14.2.2.1. Connectors
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
PCN10-50P J10 1 DC3.3V+ MAIN BOARD J16
2 DC3.3V+
3 GND
4 GND
5 MCSELA
6 MCSELB
7 MCCLK
8 VIA3
9 VIA4
10 PCSELA
11 PCSELB
12 MCD0
13 MCD1
14 MCD2
15 MCD3
16 MCD4
17 MCD5
18 MCD6
19 MCD7
20 MCD8
21 MCD9
22 MCD10
23 MCD11
24 MCD12
25 MCD13
26 MCD14
27 MCD15
28 OEA
29 OEB
30 VIA5
31 VIA6
32 GND
33 GND
34 GND
35 GND
36 GND
37 GND
38 GND
39 GND
40 GND
41 GND
42 GND
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 105 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
43 GND
44 GND
45 GND
46 GND
47 GND
48 GND
49 DC3.3V+
50 DC3.3V+
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
PC1 J7 1 N.C PCI CARD CN2 IDC-40P
2 N.C
3 N.C
4 N.C
5 N.C
6 N.C
7 GND
8 N.C
9 PCD15
10 N.C
11 PCD14
12 N.C
13 PCD13
14 N.C
15 PCD12
16 N.C
17 PCD11
18 N.C
19 PCD10
20 N.C
21 PCD9
22 N.C
23 PCD8
24 N.C
25 PCD7
26 N.C
27 PCD6
28 N.C
29 PCD5
30 N.C
31 PCD4
32 N.C
33 PCD3
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 106 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
34 N.C
35 PCD2
36 N.C
37 PCD1
38 N.C
39 PCD0
40 N.C
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
PCN2 J8 1 N.C PCI CARD CN1 IDC-40P
2 PCSELA
3 N.C
4 PCSELB
5 N.C
6 N.C
7 N.C
8 N.C
9 N.C
10 N.C
11 N.C
12 N.C
13 N.C
14 N.C
15 N.C
16 N.C
17 N.C
18 N.C
19 N.C
20 N.C
21 N.C
22 N.C
23 N.C
24 N.C
25 N.C
26 N.C
27 N.C
28 N.C
29 N.C
30 N.C
31 N.C
32 N.C
33 N.C
34 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 107 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
35 N.C
36 N.C
37 O_REQ
38 N.C
39 N.C
40 N.C
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 108 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.3. HEAD PCB
14.3.1. Head PCB Layout
14.3.1.1. Figure
24
1
5 3
6
6
7
1 Connection to MAIN PCB 5 Connection to head temperature sensor(2 black wires to the Magenta print head)
2 Level sensor connectors (K, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm, S, W)
6 Connection to each head heating device
3 Connection to cartridge PCBs (incoming data)
7 220V connector
4 Head temperature potentiometer
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 109 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.3.1.2. Location
The HEAD PCB is located at the back side of the head carriage unit, underneath the HEAD LIFT PCB.
14.3.1.3. Function
The main functions of the HEAD PCB are:
1 Connected to MAIN PCB, collect output data and ink supplying signals from sub ink tank.
2 Connected to each CARTRIDGE PCBs, and transfer output data.
3 Collect floating signals from each ink tank.
4 Connect each head heating device.
This is the connection to the heater bar of each print head (K, C, M, Y, Lc, lm, W, W)
5 Connect the head temperature sensor.
Is this the black thermostat cable connected to the thermistor of the Magenta Print head (see �Temperature detection components and setting components� on page 1-63).
HEAD PCB
M
Y
LcLm
C
K
Wspot Wpre
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 110 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.3.2. Head PCB Description
14.3.2.1. Connectors
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-2P INK1 1 INK1 LEVEL SENSOR K K
2 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-2P INK2 1 INK2 LEVEL SENSOR C C
2 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5264-2P INK3 1 INK3 LEVEL SENSOR M M
2 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-2P INK4 1 INK4 LEVEL SENSOR Y Y
2 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-2P INK5 1 INK5 LEVEL SENSOR LC LC
2 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-2P INK6 1 INK6 LEVEL SENSOR LM LM
2 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-2P INK7 1 INK7 SOLUTION SEN-SOR
S
2 GND
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 111 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-2P INK8 1 INK8 LEVEL SENSOR WHITE
W
2 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-2P 1 1 HV2 HEAD HEATER #1
2 HEATER #1
2 1 HV2 HEAD HEATER #2
2 HEATER #2
3 1 HV2 HEAD HEATER #3
2 HEATER #3
4 1 HV2 HEAD HEATER #4
2 HEATER #4
5 1 HV2 HEAD HEATER #5
2 HEATER #5
6 1 HV2 HEAD HEATER #6
2 HEATER #6
7 1 HV2 HEAD HEATER #7
2 HEATER #7
8 1 HV2 HEAD HEATER #8
2 HEATER #8
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J1 1 GND_SIGNAL HEAD CARTRIDGE PCB J5 (black)
2 GND_SIGNAL
3 HV_ERR
4 HV_CK1
5 SHIFT_CK1
6 DATA_CDH1
7 DATA_ABH1
8 N.C
9 12V
10 12V
11 GND_POWER
12 GND_POWER
13 N.C
14 N.C
15 HV1
16 HV1
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 112 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J2 1 GND_SIGNAL HEAD CARTRIDGE PCB J5 (Cyan)
2 GND_SIGNAL
3 HV_ERR
4 HV_CK2
5 SHIFT_CK2
6 DATA_CDH2
7 DATA_ABH2
8 N.C
9 12V
10 12V
11 GND_POWER
12 GND_POWER
13 N.C
14 N.C
15 HV1
16 HV1
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J3 1 GND_SIGNAL HEAD CARTRIDGE PCB J5 (Magenta)
2 GND_SIGNAL
3 HV_ERR
4 HV_CK3
5 SHIFT_CK3
6 DATA_CDH3
7 DATA_ABH3
8 N.C
9 12V
10 12V
11 GND_POWER
12 GND_POWER
13 N.C
14 N.C
15 HV1
16 HV1
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 113 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J4 1 GND_SIGNAL HEAD CARTRIDGE PCB J5 (Yellow)
2 GND_SIGNAL
3 HV_ERR
4 HV_CK4
5 SHIFT_CK4
6 DATA_CDH4
7 DATA_ABH4
8 N.C
9 12V
10 12V
11 GND_POWER
12 GND_POWER
13 N.C
14 N.C
15 HV1
16 HV1
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J5 1 GND_SIGNAL HEAD CARTRIDGE PCB J5 (Light Cyan)
2 GND_SIGNAL
3 HV_ERR
4 HV_CK5
5 SHIFT_CK5
6 DATA_CDH5
7 DATA_ABH5
8 N.C
9 12V
10 12V
11 GND_POWER
12 GND_POWER
13 N.C
14 N.C
15 HV1
16 HV1
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 114 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J6 1 GND_SIGNAL HEAD CARTRIDGE PCB J5 (Light Magenta)
2 GND_SIGNAL
3 HV_ERR
4 HV_CK6
5 SHIFT_CK6
6 DATA_CDH6
7 DATA_ABH6
8 N.C
9 12V
10 12V
11 GND_POWER
12 GND_POWER
13 N.C
14 N.C
15 HV1
16 HV1
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J7 1 GND_SIGNAL HEAD CARTRIDGE PCB J5 (Spot White)
2 GND_SIGNAL
3 HV_ERR
4 HV_CK7
5 SHIFT_CK7
6 DATA_CDH7
7 DATA_ABH7
8 N.C
9 12V
10 12V
11 GND_POWER
12 GND_POWER
13 N.C
14 N.C
15 HV1
16 HV1
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 115 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J8 1 GND_SIGNAL HEAD CARTRIDGE PCB J5 (Pre White)
2 GND_SIGNAL
3 HV_ERR
4 HV_CK8
5 SHIFT_CK8
6 DATA_CDH8
7 DATA_ABH8
8 N.C
9 12V
10 12V
11 GND_POWER
12 GND_POWER
13 N.C
14 N.C
15 HV1
16 HV1
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J9 1 DATA AB1 MAIN PCB J15
2 DATA CD1
3 DATA AB2
4 DATA CD2
5 DATA AB3
6 DATA CD3
7 DATA AB4
8 DATA CD4
9 DATA AB5
10 DATA CD5
11 DATA AB6
12 DATA CD6
13 DATA AB7
14 DATA CD7
15 DATA AB8
16 DATA CD8
17 MEDIA
18 SHIFT_CK
19 RX1_TTL
20 TX1_TTL
21 HV_CK
22 ERROR_OUT
23 HT_CNTRL
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 116 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.3.2.2. Led�s
14.3.2.3. Adjustments
Refer to �Head Base Temperature Control� on page 1-63.
24 S.GND
25 S.GND
26 S.GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-2P J29 1 SIGNAL
2 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
STL950 J13 1 HV2
2 GND
3 HV1
4 GND
5 5V+
6 GND
7 24V+
8 GND
LED Color Indication
D1 the first 8 INK LEDs are related to the status of the sub ink tank (LED ON means sub ink tank empty and as a result a signal is sent to the pumps)
D2 HV_ERR (High Voltage)
D4 HT_ERR (Heather Error)
D6 INK_OVF (Ink Overflow)
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 117 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.4. REFILL PCB
14.4.1. Refill PCB Layout
14.4.1.1. Figure
14.4.1.2. Location
The REFILL PCB is located behind the swinging ink supply door.
1
1312
2
3
4
56910 78
11
1 Connection to Indicator PCB 8 Connection to Refill Control PCB
2 Connection to Main PCB 9 Connection to Rear media detection sensor
3 Connection to air tank 10 Connection to Rear gear motor
4 Connection to SMPS #3 11 Connection to Indicator PCB
5 Connection to Front media detection sensor 12 Connection to Take Up PCB
6 Connection to Front gear motor 13 Connection to Ink pumps (C, M, Y, K, Lm, Lc, W and S)
7 Connection to sub tank flow sensor
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 118 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.4.1.3. Function
The main functions of the REFILL PCB are:
1 The main PCB controls the Refill PCB (serial cable between MAIN and REFILL)
2 Controlling each ink pump (C, M, Y, K, Lm, Lc, W and S).
3 Transferring the state signals of each ink supply to the CONTROL PCB.
4 Collecting ink empty signal coming from the INDICATOR PCB.
5 Connected to the TAKE UP PCB.
6 Collecting media detection sensor signals (See �Auto Feeding System� on page 1-34).
7 Collecting signals coming from the air tank.
14.4.2. Refill PCB Description
14.4.2.1. Connectors
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
IDC-16 J18 1 GND TAKE UP PCB J11
2 DC5V+
3 GND
4 DC5V+
5 N.C
6 N.C
7 N.C
8 N.C
9 DIR_CW_SW
10 CW_LED
11 DIR_CCW_SW
12 CCW_LED
13 AUTO_SW
14 AUTO_LED
15 ERROR_SW
16 ERROR_LED
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-2P J4 1 DCS5V+ INDICATOR PCB J10
2 INK-C
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 119 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-2P J11 1 MOTOR REAR+ REAR TAKE UP MOTOR
2 MOTOR REAR-
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3191-3P J16 1 DC24V+ TAKE UP REAR MEDIA DETEC-TION SENSOR
2 REAR-SENSE
3 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5557-2P J10 1 MOTOR FRONT+ FRONT TAKE UP MOTOR
2 MOTOR FRONT-
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
Apr-57 J15 1 F_SEN TAKE UP FRONT MEDIA DETEC-TION SENSOR
2 GND
3 N.C
4 DC24V+
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
Mar-45 J17-1 1 DC5V+ INDICATOR PCB J11 3
2 N.C 2
3 GND 1
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-3P J17 1 RX MAIN PCB J11
2 N.C (TX)
3 GND
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 120 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-4P BZ1 1 GND
2 N.C
3 N.C
4 BUZZER+
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J20 1 PUMP_S KNF MOTOR SOLUTION
2 DC24V+
J27 1 PUMP_W KNF MOTOR WHITE
2 DC24V+
J24 1 PUMP_LM KNF MOTOR LM
2 DC24V+
J1 1 PUMP_LC KNF MOTOR LC
2 DC24V+
J25 1 PUMP_Y KNF MOTOR Y
2 DC24V+
J3 1 PUMP_M KNF MOTOR M
2 DC24V+
J26 1 PUMP_C KNF MOTOR C
2 DC24V+
J5 1 PUMP_K KNF MOTOR K
2 DC24V+
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
IDC-30P J 31 1 SW_Y REFILL CONTROL PCB
J 18 1
2 SW_M 2
3 SW_C 3
4 SW_K 4
5 SW_LM 5
6 SW_LC 6
7 SW_WHITE 7
8 SW_S 8
9 +5V 9
10 GND 10
11 S_LED_Y 11
12 S_LED_M 12
13 S_LED_C 13
14 S_LED_K 14
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 121 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
15 S_LED_LM 15
16 S_LED_LC 16
17 S_LED_WHITE 17
18 S_LED_S 18
19 +5V 19
20 GND 20
21 P_LED_Y 21
22 P_LED_M 22
23 P_LED_C 23
24 P_LED_K 24
25 P_LED_LM 25
26 P_LED_LC 26
27 P_LED_WHITE 27
28 P_LED_S 28
29 +24V 29
30 GND 30
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-2P J13 1 LAMP ON Main PLC POB
2 24V+
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-3P J34 1 LAMP ON
2 N.C
3 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-6P J32 1 5V Air tank
2 N.C
3 PRESSURE_LOW
4 N.C
5 N.C
6 N.C
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 122 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.4.2.2. Led�s
14.4.2.3. Switches
14.4.2.4. Measurements
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-2P J14 1 GND SMPS #3
2 24V
LED Color Indication
D12 Status ink pumps + 1 communication LED with Indicator PCB
Switch Setting Description
SW1 RESET
J32 - Connection to air pressure sensor main air tank
Pin 6 (black) +5Vdc Permanent
Pin 4 (white) +5Vdc above 3 bar, alarm off
0V below 3 bar, alarm on
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 123 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.5. CARTRIDGE PCB
14.5.1. Cartridge PCB Layout
14.5.1.1. Figure
2
1
3
1 (J1 - J4) connection with the 4 data cables of one print head
3 DC Head voltage (factory set)To be adjusted when mounting a new head
2 (J5) connection to HEAD PCB
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 124 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.5.1.2. Location
The eight CARTRIDGE PCBs are located at the back side of the head carriage unit, underneath the HEAD PCB. The CARTRIDGE PCB for white is positioned a little to the back.
14.5.1.3. Function
The CARTRIDGE PCB controls the head and the connected head ink jet function (ink drop).
CARTRIDGE PCBs
M
Y
LcLm
C
K
Wspot Wpre
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 125 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.5.2. Cartridge PCB Description
14.5.2.1. Connectors
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
SIP-9P J1 to J4 1 HVPULSE HEAD #1 FLAT CABLE #1 to #4
1
2 N.C 2
3 N.C 3
4 GND 4
5 CLK 5
6 DATA OUT1 6
7 DATA IN 7
8 DC12V+ 8
9 GND 9
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
IDC-12P J5 1 GND_SIGNAL Head PCB 1
2 GND_SIGNAL 2
3 HV_ERROR 3
4 HV_CK 4
5 SHIFT_CK_HI 5
6 DATA_CD_HI 6
7 DATA_AD_HI 7
8 N.C 8
9 12V+ 9
10 12V+ 10
11 GND_POWER 11
12 GND_POWER 12
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
SIP-9P J7 1 HVPULSE HEAD #1 FLAT CABLE #7
1
2 N.C 2
3 N.C 3
4 GND 4
5 CLK 5
6 DATA OUT1 6
7 DATA IN 7
8 DC12V+ 8
9 GND 9
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 126 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.5.2.2. Led�s
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
SIP-9P J8 1 HVPULSE HEAD #1 FLAT CABLE #8
1
2 N.C 2
3 N.C 3
4 GND 4
5 CLK 5
6 DATA OUT1 6
7 DATA IN 7
8 DC12V+ 8
9 GND 9
LED Type Color Indication
D4 LEDG-SM 12V
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 127 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.6. HEAD LIFT PCB
14.6.1. Head Lift PCB Layout
14.6.1.1. Figure
1
2
3
4
5 6
1 Connection to IF PCB 4 Connection to IF PCB
2 Connection to Purge switch 5 Connection to heater plate of white sub ink tank
3 Connection to SMPS #6 6 Connection to heater plate of 6C sub ink tank
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 128 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.6.1.2. Location
The HEAD LIFT PCB is located at the back side of the head carriage unit.
14.6.1.3. Function
The main functions of the HEAD LIFT PCB are:
1 Controlling the head carriage lift step motor.
2 Connected to ITV PCB (J13), control �ITV�.
3 Connected to IF PCB,
4 Control head base (J17) and sub ink tank temp (J10).
The temperature sensor which is connected to J17 of the Head Lift PCB leads through the Head Base Temp. PID panel. So this sensor only measures and indicates the actual temperature of the head base on the Head Base Temp PID display. If you disconnect J17 from the Head Lift PCB, the text "Open" appears on the Head Base Temp PID display (See �Temperature detection compo-nents and setting components� on page 1-63).
5 Connect heating device to white sub ink tank (J25) and 6C sub ink tank (J14).
6 Controlling the head gap sensor.
7 Controlling the purge solenoid of the purge switch (J12).
HEAD LIFT PCB
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 129 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.6.2. Head Lift PCB Description
14.6.2.1. Connectors
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5045-5P J1 1 GND
2 DC5V+
3 UP_SEN
4 DN_SEN
5 N.C
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
GIL-G4P J4 1 GND PC-COM2 D-SUB 9P 5
2 RX 2
3 TX 3
4 N.C
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-5P J6 1 GND
2 SOL (1)
3 N.C
4 GND
5 SOL (2)
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5045-6P J7 4 SUB_A I/F PCB J2 8
5 SUB_B 7
6 SUB_B� 6
7 BASE_A 5
8 BASE_B 4
9 BASE_B� 3
1 N.C. 2
2 N.C. 1
3 N.C.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 130 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-6P J8 1 DC24V+ I/F PCB J1 6
2 DC24V+ 5
3 GND 4
4 GND 3
5 BASE_HEATER 2
6 SUB_HEATER 1
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-3P J10 1 SUB_B� PT SENSOR SUB INK TANK
2 SUB_B�
3 SUB_A
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5045-3P J11 1 IN+ SUB AIR TANK PRESSURE SEN-SOR
2 DC24V+
3 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-2P J12 1 DC24V+ PURGING S/W (PUSH BUTTON)
2 SOL(1), SOL(2)
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5045-4P J13 1 OUT+ ITV2010
2 N.C
3 DC24V+
4 GND
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 131 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-3P J14 1 GND WHITE SUB INK HEATER
2 GND
3 SUB_HEATER
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J25 1 GND 6C SUB INK HEATER
2 SUB_HEATER
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5045-7P J15 1 A HEAD BASE LIFT STEPPING MOTOR
2 GND
3 A~
4 B
5 GND
6 B~
7 N.C
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5045-10P J16 1 OUT+ ITV CONTROLLER CN1 4
2 OUT+ 4
3 IN+ 3
4 IN+ 3
5 GND 2
6 GND 2
7 GND 2
8 DC24V+ 1
9 DC24V+ 1
10 DC24V+ 1
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 132 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.6.2.2. Led�s
14.6.2.3. Switches
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-4P J17 1 BASE_B� PT SENSOR HEAD BASE2 BASE_B
3 N.C
4 BASE_A
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-4P J18 1 GND SMPS #6 CH1 DC5V+
2 DC5V+ GND
3 GND CH2 DC24V+
4 DC24V+ GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-7P J23 1 DC24V+ PLATEN SENSING B/K UP SOLENOID
2 N.C
3 SOLA
4 N.C
5 DC24V+ PLATEN SENSING B/K LOCK SOLE-NOID
6 N.C
7 SOLB
LED Color Indication
LED 1
LED 2
Switch Setting Description
SW1 RESET
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 133 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.7. ITV CONTROLLER PCB
14.7.1. ITV Controller PCB Layout
14.7.1.1. Figure
14.7.1.2. Location
The ITV CONTROLLER PCB is located behind the control system cover underneath the PID panel. To get access to the ITV CONTROL PCB, open the ink supply door.
14.7.1.3. Function
The main functions of the ITV CONTROL PCB are:
1 Collecting the control signals from PSE200.
2 Connected to Head Lift PCB and control ITV.
3 Minus (-) pressure setting control.
1
1 (J4) collecting/controlling pressure signals
ITV Controller BCB
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 134 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.7.2. ITV Controller PCB Description
14.7.2.1. Connectors
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
CN1 1 DC24V PSE200 J1 1
2 0V 2
3 IN+ 3
4 IN- 4
5 A(1) 5
6 B(2) 6
7 C(3) 7
8 OUT+ 8
9 OUT-
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
ITV GORE CABLE
1 DC24V+ HEAD LIFT PCB J16 1
2
3
2 GND 4
5
6
3 IN+ 7
8
4 OUT+ 9
10
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J1 1 BROWN PSE200 REAR 1
2 BLUE 2
3 BLACK 3
4 WHITE 4
5 GRAY 5
6 RED 6
7 GREEN 7
8 YELLOW 8
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 135 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.7.2.2. Switches
14.7.2.3. Adjustments
It is not necessary to tune the variable resistors �GAIN� and �ZERO�. Both resistors are factory set.
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
CH-1 J2 1 BROWN IVT CONTROL 1
2 2
3 BLUE 4
9
4 BLACK 3
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J3 1 BROWN IVT CONTROL 1
2 2
3 BLUE 4
9
4 BLACK 3
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J4 1 BROWN IVT CONTROL 1
2 2
3 BLUE 4
9
4 BLACK 3
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
J5 1 BROWN IVT CONTROL 1
2 2
3 BLUE 4
9
4 BLACK 3
Switch Setting Description
SW2 ON Factory setting
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 136 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.8. SUB PCB
14.8.1. Sub PCB Layout
14.8.1.1. Figure
1
3 2
1 (J4) Connection to PLC 3 (J43) Connection to SMPS (DC 5V/24V)
2 (J13) Connection to I/O PCB
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 137 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.8.1.2. Location
The SUB PCB is located in the control box of the Home unit.
14.8.1.3. Function
The main functions of the SUB PCB are:
1 Collecting the tower lamp signals �air Low�, �ink low�, �lamp on�, �media set on�, �blower on� coming from the PLC.
2 Transferring the signals �air Low�, �lamp shutter L/R� and �UV lamp on� to the I/O PCB.
3 Distributing the 5V and 24 V DC voltages coming from the SMPS (DC5V/24).
SMPS is an acronym for Switch Mode Power Supply.
SUB PCB
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 138 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.8.2. Sub PCB Description
14.8.2.1. Connectors
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-2P J45 1 SSR OUT1 not used
2 SSR OUT2
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-4P J43 1 DC24V+ SMPS (DC 5V/24V)2 DC24V-
3 DC5V+
4 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5045-14P J13 1 N.C
2 N.C
3 N.C
4 N.C
5 N.C
6 N.C
7 N.C
8 N.C
9 N.C
10 AIR LOW air tank pressure gauge signal
11 N.C
12 SHUTTER RIGHT I/O PCB
13 SHUTTER LEFT I/O PCB
14 UV LAMP ON I/O PCB
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-4P J47 1 GND not used
2 LIFT-UP
3 LIFT-DN
4 DC5V+
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 139 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-6P J4 1 AIR-LOW PLC
2 INK LOW
3 LAMP ON
4 MEDIA SET
5 BLOWER ON
6 N.C
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-2P J48 1 SUC-LEVEL not used
2 DC5V+
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5557-2P J44 1 MOTOR+
2 MOTOR-
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 140 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.9. IF PCB
14.9.1. IF PCB Layout
14.9.1.1. Figure
14.9.1.2. Location
The IF PCB is located behind the control system cover underneath the PID panel. To get access to the IF PCB, open the ink supply door.
14.9.1.3. Function
The main functions of the IF PCB are:
1 Distributing the 24 V DC voltages.
2 Connected to �IF PCB�, head base and sub ink tank temp.
3 Connected to the head base temperature, sub ink tank temperature and white sub ink tank temperature PID controller.
IF BCB
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 141 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.9.2. IF PCB Description
14.9.2.1. Connectors
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
power Jun-51 J1 1 Sub-Heater J8 1
2 Base-Heater 2
3 GND 3
4 GND 4
5 DC24V 5
6 DC24V 6
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
TEMP SENSOR Aug-51
J2 1 PSE HEAD LIFT PCB J7
2 ITV
3 BASE-B� 9
4 BASE-B 8
5 BASE-A 7
6 SUB-B� 6
7 SUB-B 5
8 SUB-A 4
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5045-4P J3 1 ITV
2 N.C
3 GND
4 DC24V
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
Mar-51 J4 1 PSE
2 GND
3 DC24V
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-2P J5 1 DC24V
2 GND
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 142 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-2P J6 1 DC24V
2 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-2P J7 1 DC24V
2 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-3P J8 1 SUB-A
2 SUB-B
3 SUB-B�
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-3P J9 1 SUB-HEATER
2 N.C
3 GND
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-4P J10 1 BASE-B�
2 BASE-B
3 N.C
4 BASE-A
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-2P J11 1 BASE HEATER
2 GND
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 143 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5045-9P J12 1 GND
2 N.C
3 N.C
4 N.C
5 N.C
6 N.C
7 N.C
8 N.C
9 DC24V
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5045-5P J13 1 PSE
2 N.C
3 N.C
4 GND
5 DC24V
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
PID 1 SV2 IN
2 SV2-COM
3 CA SENSOR
4
5 EV2-OUT2
6 EV2-OUT1
7 N.C
8 EV1-OUT2
9 EV1-OUT1
10 ACIN
11 ACIN
12 N.C
13 COM
14 N.O
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 144 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.10. I/O PCB
14.10.1. I/O PCB Layout
14.10.1.1. Figure
2
34
5
1
1 (J2) Connection to feed limit and media sensor
4 (J4) Connection to Main PCB
2 (J3) Connection to SUB PCB 5 (J1) Connection to Main PCB
3 (J6) Connection to SUB PCB
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 145 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.10.1.2. Location
The I/O PCB is located in the control box of the Home unit.
14.10.1.3. Function
The main functions of the I/O PCB are:
1 (J3, J6) Indicating the signals of the �lamp shutter L/R� and the �UV lamp on� coming from the SUB PCB.
2 (J2) Collecting and transferring the signals of feed limit and media sensors.
3 (J1, J4) Indicating and transferring the signals �UV lamp on�, �lamp shutter L/R�, �media sensors� and �feed limit� to the MAIN PCB.
I/O PCB
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 146 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.10.2. I/O PCB Description
14.10.2.1. Connectors
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-8P J1 1 DC5V+ MAIN PCB J17 1
2 MEDIA SET 1 2
3 MEDIA SET 2 3
4 MEDIA SET 3 4
5 FEED LIMIT 5
6 LEFT SHTTER 6
7 RIGHT SHTTER 7
8 GND 8
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-5P J4 1 DC5V+ MAIN PCB J18 5
2 DC24V+ 4
3 UV LAMP ON 3
4 EXT I/O 8 2
5 GND 1
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5045-5P J2 1 DC5V+
2 MEDIA SENSOR 1
3 MEDIA SENSOR 2
4 MEDIA SENSOR 3
5 FEED LIMIT
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5045-3P J3 1 LEFT SHUTTER MAIN PCB J13
2 RIGHT SHUTTER
3 GND
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 147 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.10.2.2. Led�s
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5045-4P J6 1 N.C MAIN PCB J14
2 UV LAMP ON
3 N.C
4 N.C
LED Type Color Indication
LED1 ON/OFF signals green Media sensor 1
LED2 green Media sensor 2
LED3 green Media sensor 3
LED4 green Feed Limit
LED5 green Left shutter
LED6 green Right shutter
LED7 green UV lamp on
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 148 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.11. TAKE UP PCB
14.11.1. Take Up PCB Layout
14.11.1.1. Figure
14.11.1.2. Location
The TAKE UP PCB is located behind the control system cover at the bottom of the PID panel. To get access to the TAKE UP PCB, open the ink supply door.
14.11.1.3. Function
The TAKE UP PCB is connected with the REFILL PCB and control the motor rotation of the take-up motor and displays the state signals.
TAKE UP BCB
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 149 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.11.2. Take Up PCB Description
14.11.2.1. Connectors
14.11.2.2. Led�s
14.11.2.3. Switches
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
IDC-16 J11 1 GND REFILL PCB J18
2 DC5V+
3 GND
4 DC5V+
5 N.C
6 N.C
7 N.C
8 N.C
9 DIR_CW_SW
10 CW_LED
11 DIR_CCW_SW
12 CCW_LED
13 AUTO_SW
14 AUTO_LED
15 ERROR_SW
16 ERROR_LED
LED Type Color Indication
D1 red auto/manual indicator
D2 green CW led
D3 green CCW led
D4 red Auto led
D5 green Error led
Switch Setting Description
SW1CW switch
inout
rotate motor CW
SW2C switch
inout
rotate motor CCW
SW3 inout
FRONTREAR
SW4 inout
AUTO modeMANUAL mode
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 150 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.12. REFILL CONTROL PCB
14.12.1. Refill Control PCB Layout
14.12.1.1. Figure
14.12.1.2. Location
The REFILL CONTROL PCB is located behind the refill system panel. To get access to the REFILL CONTROL PCB, unscrew the 4 screws of the refill system panel.
14.12.1.3. Function
The REFILL CONTROL PCB is connected to REFILL PCB. The REFILL CONTROL PCB indicates each ink refill status (empty, feeding) and the status of the manual feeding switches.
1
2
3
4
1 (D1-D8) Empty Ink refill status LED indica-tions
3 Manual feeding switches
2 (D9-D16) Feeding Ink refill status LED indi-cations
4 (J18) Connection to the REFILL PCB
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 151 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.12.2. Refill Control PCB Description
14.12.2.1. Connectors
14.12.2.2. Led�s
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
IDC-30P J 18 1 SW_Y J 31 1
2 SW_M 2
3 SW_C 3
4 SW_K 4
5 SW_LM 5
6 SW_LC 6
7 SW_WHITE 7
8 SW_S 8
9 +5V 9
10 GND 10
11 S_LED_Y 11
12 S_LED_M 12
13 S_LED_C 13
14 S_LED_K 14
15 S_LED_LM 15
16 S_LED_LC 16
17 S_LED_WHITE 17
18 S_LED_S 18
19 +5V 19
20 GND 20
21 P_LED_Y 21
22 P_LED_M 22
23 P_LED_C 23
24 P_LED_K 24
25 P_LED_LM 25
26 P_LED_LC 26
27 P_LED_WHITE 27
28 P_LED_S 28
29 +24V 29
30 GND 30
LED Color Indication
D1 red
D2 red
D3 red
D4 red
D5 red
D6 red
D7 red
D8 red
D9 green
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 152 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.12.2.3. Switches
D10 green
D11 green
D12 green
D13 green
D14 green
D15 green
D16 green
Switch Setting Description
SW1 Manual feeding of white ink
SW2 Manual feeding of Lm ink
SW3 Manual feeding of Lc ink
SW4 Manual feeding of Y ink
SW5 Manual feeding of M ink
SW6 Manual feeding of C ink
SW7 Manual feeding of K ink
SW8 Manual feeding of solution
LED Color Indication
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 153 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.13. INDICATOR PCB
14.13.1. Indicator PCB Layout
14.13.1.1. Figure
14.13.1.2. Location
The INDICATOR PCB is located behind the ink tank indicator panel. To get access to the INDICATOR PCB, unscrew the 4 screws of the ink tank indicator system panel.
14.13.1.3. Function
The main functions of the INDICATOR PCB are:
1 Connecting the flow sensor to each main ink tank.
2 Indicating the ink �full� or �empty� status.
3 Transferring the �ink empty� signal to the REFILL PCB.
2
1
3
4
1 (J13) Transferring Ink empty signal to REFILL PCB
3 (J1-J8) Connection to ink tank flow sensor
2 (J11) +5VDC coming from REFILL PCB 4 (D1-D16) Ink Full/Empty LED indications
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 154 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.13.2. Indicator PCB Description
14.13.2.1. Connectors
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-3P J1 1 DC5V+
2 INK_EMPTY_WT
3 INK_FULL_WT
5267-3P J2 1 DC5V+
2 INK_EMPTY_LM
3 INK_FULL_LM
5267-3P J3 1 DC5V+
2 INK_EMPTY_Lc
3 INK_FULL_Lc
5267-3P J4 1 DC5V+
2 INK_EMPTY_Y
3 INK_FULL_Y
5267-3P J5 1 DC5V+
2 INK_EMPTY_M
3 INK_FULL_M
5267-3P J6 1 DC5V+
2 INK_EMPTY_C
3 INK_FULL_C
5267-3P J7 1 DC5V+
2 INK_EMPTY_K
3 INK_FULL_K
5267-3P J8 1 DC5V+
2 INK_EMPTY_S
3 INK_FULL_S
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
3951-3P J11 1 GND
2 N.C
3 DC5V+
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-2P J12 1 DC5V+
2 INK_FULL_SIG
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 155 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.13.2.2. Led�s
14.13.2.3. Measurements
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-2P J13 1 INK_EMPTY_SIG
2 DC5V+
LED Color Indication
D1 green white ink tank full
D2 red white ink tank empty
D3 green Lm ink tank full
D4 red Lm ink tank empty
D5 green Lc ink tank full
D6 red Lc ink tank empty
D7 green Y ink tank full
D8 red Y ink tank empty
D9 green C ink tank full
D10 red White ink tank empty
D11 green M ink tank full
D12 red M ink tank empty
D13 green K ink tank full
D14 red K ink tank empty
D15 green Solution tank full
D16 red Solution tank empty
J13 - Connection to REFILL PCB J4
Pin 1 (green) +5Vdc empty alarm on
0V empty alarm off
Pin 2 (red) +5Vdc Permanent
J1 / J8 - Connection to level sensor ink tank
Pin 1 (black) +5Vdc Permanent
Pin 2 (red) +5Vdc empty detection on
0V empty detection off
Pin 3 (yellow) +5Vdc full detection on
0V full detection off
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 156 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.14. DRIVER COMMUNICATION PCB
14.14.1. Driver Communication PCB Layout
14.14.1.1. Figure
2
1
34
5
1 (J7) +5VDC coming from MAIN PCB 4 (J6-CARRIAGE) Connection to MAIN PCB
2 (J4) Connection to feed servo motor driver 5 (J5-FEED) Connection to MAIN PCB
3 (J3) Connection to carriage servo motor driver
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 1 - 157 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
14.14.1.2. Location
The DRIVER COMM PCB is located in the control box of the Home unit.
14.14.1.3. Function
The main functions of the DRIVER COMMUNICATION PCB are:
1 Connected to the carriage and feed servo motor driver.
2 Receiving the carriage and feed motor driver signals from the MAIN PCB.
DRIVER COMMUNICATION PCB
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
1 - 158 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
14.14.2. Driver Communication PCB Description
14.14.2.1. Connectors
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-8P J5 1 GND MAIN PCB J5
FEED 2 CAR_POS_IN
3 TX2_SERVO
4 GND
5 FEED STOP
6 N.C
7 N.C
8 +24V
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-8P J6 1 GND MAIN PCB J12 1
CARRIAGE 2 CAR_POS_IN 2
3 TX2_SERVO 3
4 GND 4
5 MOTOR STOP 5
6 N.C N.C.
7 6
8 +24V 8
Connectors Pin Connected to
Name and Function
Nr. Nr. Name PCB or Part Conn. Pin
5267-8P J4 1 TX+ CN3 5
FEED SERVO 2 TX- 15
3 RX+ 9
4 RX- 19
5 GND 1
6 FEED_PS_IN CN1B 6
7 GND 10
8
CHAPTER
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 2 - 1:Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2 Technical Features and Specifications
This chapter briefly describes the features and technical specifications of the Anapurna L/XL.
1. Overview .................................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 21.1. Anapurna's Print Quality ........................................................................................................................ 2 - 21.2. Outstanding Printing Potential ........................................................................................................... 2 - 21.3. Inspired Design ......................................................................................................................................... 2 - 31.4. User Profile ................................................................................................................................................. 2 - 3
2. Features ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 42.1. Borderless Printing .................................................................................................................................. 2 - 42.2. Roll to Roll and Rigid Printing ............................................................................................................ 2 - 42.3. Dual Board Printing ................................................................................................................................. 2 - 42.4. White Color Printing ............................................................................................................................... 2 - 42.5. Status Signal Lamp .................................................................................................................................. 2 - 42.6. Automatic Ink Filling System .............................................................................................................. 2 - 52.7. UV Curing .................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 52.8. Changeable UV Lamps ........................................................................................................................... 2 - 52.9. Exhausting System ................................................................................................................................... 2 - 52.10. Automatic Print Head Height ............................................................................................................ 2 - 52.11. Easy and Quick Installation ............................................................................................................... 2 - 52.12. Simple Maintenance ............................................................................................................................ 2 - 5
3. Specifications ........................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 63.1. Print Technology ....................................................................................................................................... 2 - 63.2. Head Technology ...................................................................................................................................... 2 - 63.3. Media ............................................................................................................................................................ 2 - 73.4. Inks ................................................................................................................................................................ 2 - 83.5. Working Conditions ................................................................................................................................. 2 - 93.6. Electricity ..................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 93.7. RIP PC ........................................................................................................................................................ 2 - 103.8. Service PC ................................................................................................................................................ 2 - 103.9. Anapurna L ............................................................................................................................................... 2 - 113.10. Anapurna XL ......................................................................................................................................... 2 - 11
TECHNICAL FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS OVERVIEW
2 - 2 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
1. Overview
The Anapurna L/XL are wide format industrial inkjet printers for indoor and outdoor sign and displays. Theses UV-curable engines stand for quality printing on uncoated rigids as well as on roll media.
1.1. Anapurna's Print Quality
However you measure it, the Anapurna L/XL delivers exceptional results.
! Print resolution: 363 x 725 dpi.
! Prints up to 250 cm wide.
! Choice of media.
1.2. Outstanding Printing Potential
The sky is the limit with both Anapurna engines. You can produce top quality inkjet prints for both outdoor and indoor applications.
Material Examples
Roll materials � film� a paper� front- and backlit film� self adhesive vinyl and paper� canvas� banner� vinyl� blue back� coated and uncoated media
Rigid media � alu boards� corrugated cardboards� screenprinting boards� exhibition panels� stage graphics� ad panels� and much more.
OVERVIEW TECHNICAL FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 2 - 3 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
1.3. Inspired Design
Innovation has been incorporated at every stage and the Anapurna will demonstrate clear desire and investment to your customers.
1.4. User Profile
Anapurna L/XL is a robustly engineered wide format industrial inkjet printer, designed to cope with heavy workloads in applications such as:
! posters
! billboards
! fleet displays
! POS & POP displays
! exhibition panels
! stage graphics
! construction announcements
! ad panels etc.
TECHNICAL FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS FEATURES
2 - 4 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2. Features
2.1. Borderless Printing
Borderless printing means:
! No loss of time cutting.
! Less manpower.
! No wasted material.
! Print exactly what your customers order.
2.2. Roll to Roll and Rigid Printing
Both Anapurna L/XL can handle roll and rigid materials. In fact, changing from roll to rigid printing happens in a matter of seconds enabling fast interchange of short run jobs.
The Anapurna L/XL is provided with an easy and stable automatic feeding system.
2.3. Dual Board Printing
With the Anapurna engines you are able to feed through multiple boards in one and the same print run, maximizing the productivity of this state-of-the-art piece of machinery. Two different images can be queued and printed simultaneously making this a highly flexible machine.
Working faster will also:
! Reduce your costs.
! Make your business more profitable.
! Make it easier for you to offer your customers more attractive price quotations.
2.4. White Color Printing
The Anapurna L/XL also produce pre- or post-white printing for transparent surfaces and cardboard, handling a broad range of applications your customers are demanding.
2.5. Status Signal Lamp
You can see the status of the Anapurna printer from a distance so you won't have to run back and forth anymore but simply have a look from your workspace.
Print readiness as well as security signals are clearly indicated. This system is simple and efficient.
FEATURES TECHNICAL FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 2 - 5 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.6. Automatic Ink Filling System
Ink levels are automatically detected in the main ink tanks. Both visible and audible warnings notify the user of low levels. Both warnings notify the operator of low ink level ensuring the production is maintained.
The ink quantity is controlled by manipulating the head ejecting voltage
2.7. UV Curing
According to your requirements you can set the strength of the UV-lamps to "full" or "half", thus saving on life cycle of the lamps.
2.8. Changeable UV Lamps
The UV lamps are also easy to change that no service intervention is needed at all and this helps to keep the total costs to a minimum.
2.9. Exhausting System
! Anapurna L and Anapurna XL: 2 extraction units, consisting of an exhaust tube and the blower.
2.10. Automatic Print Head Height
Print head height is automatically set to the thickness of the substrate up to 5 cm thick. User defin-able head gap is possible from 1.5 to 6 mm.
2.11. Easy and Quick Installation
The Anapurna is packed as 1 engine and can therefore be installed fast so that you can start working the next day.
2.12. Simple Maintenance
The users can perform many of the maintenance functions themselves thus preventing that service interventions are needed, saving time and costs.
TECHNICAL FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
2 - 6 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3. Specifications
3.1. Print Technology
! Piezo drop-on demand inkjet
A piezoelectric inkjet head uses mechanical force to transfer the ink onto the substrate. Pixel information is transformed into an electric signal applied to the ceramic piezo material of the inkjet nozzle. This generates pressure on the ink in the nozzle, pushing the ink out.
The drop on demand technology only jets ink droplets when they are needed. There is no unnec-essary ink flow or ink waste during printing or standstill.
! Roll to roll and rigid printing
3.2. Head Technology
! Spectra Nova 256/80 AAA JA (Jetting Assembly)
! Calibrated drop size: 75 pl.
! 256 addressable jetting nozzles with spacing of 279 microns (0.011�)
! intrinsic resolution of 91 dpi.
NOTE: For detailed information about the Anapurna L/XL Specifications, refer to the User Manual.
SPECIFICATIONS TECHNICAL FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 2 - 7 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
! 8 JA mounted in head base plate
! 7 heads in line (1).
! 1 head mounted in front of the other heads, used for �Pre-White� (2).
3.3. Media
3.3.1. Thickness
3.3.2. Type
! Foamboard
! Acryl
! Steel
! Glass
! Wood
! Flex
! Sheet
Material Thickness Weight
Rigids 1 to 50 mm max 28 kg/m2
Roll material min. 0.1 mm (max. roll diameter 36 cm) up to 50 kg
1
2
2
1
TECHNICAL FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
2 - 8 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3.4. Inks
3.4.1. General Information UV Curable Ink
! UV-curable inks, 8 ink tanks:
! Ink colors: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, Light cyan, Light magenta, White.
! Ink package: 1 liter bottle, packed per 2.
! One ink tank is used for cleaning solution
! The Anapurna UV curable ink is specially developed for best performance on the Anapurna engine.
! Sharp printing, vibrant colors on a wide range of media.
! Ensures dry and instant ready prints with excellent outdoor durability.
Curing system:
! 2 Mercury lamps
! 2 settings (full- and half power).
! Use of light inks:
! Enhances apparent output resolution by using Light Cyan and Light Magenta.
! Results in smooth highlights.
! Ink usage: 10 ml/m², all colors together.
SPECIFICATIONS TECHNICAL FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 2 - 9 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3.4.2. Color Gamut
! Agfa inks tuned towards the ISO Standard 12647 (2004).
! Calculated number of colors (Volume calculated within Monaco CMS).
! ISO Standard 12647: 770000 colors.
! Anapurna ink on Anapurna printing in:
4 pass:
6 pass: 830000 colors.
8 pass: 850000 colors.
12 pass: 1080000 colors.
16 pass:
3.5. Working Conditions
3.6. Electricity
Temperature Humidity
permissible range: 18-26 °Coptimal: 22°C
permissible range: 35-75 % RHoptimal: 40%
Voltage (V) Frequency (Hz)Maximum
Current rating (A)Fuse protection
Europe 3 phase with neutralwith ground star380 V-10% - 415 V+6%
50 Hz 40 A 50 A
US 3 phaseno neutralwith ground208 V-10% - 240 V+6%
60 Hz 36 A 50 A
TECHNICAL FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
2 - 10 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3.7. RIP PC
The Wasatch SoftRIP is provided for ripping images. Install the Wasatch SoftRIP on a separate PC that fulfils the following platform specifications.
! Minimum system requirements:
! Pentium 1 GHz CPU.
! 512 MB RAM.
! 8 GB Hard Drive.
! Windows 2000, XP or Vista.
! Recommended:
! Pentium IV 3.06 GHz CPU or faster.
! 1 GB RAM.
! 80 GB or larger Hard Drive.
! Windows 2000, XP or Vista.
3.8. Service PC
If you want to connect a service PC to the Anapurna L/XL provide the following:
! 2 power sockets within 2 m of the Anapurna L/XL
200-240 VAC, 50 Hz, 16 A
! 2 ethernet RJ45 network sockets within 4 m of the Anapurna L/XL.
NOTE: Do not install the Wasatch SoftRIP on the Anapurna PC.
NOTE: The faster the CPU, the faster the software will process your images. It is therefore advisable to buy the fastest available computer you can. While more RAM will also help speed up the processing, it is the speed of the CPU that directly affects how fast SoftRIP runs. If you are processing large files over 100 MB in size, it is also advisable to upgrade to at least 1 GB of memory.
NOTE: Wasatch SoftRIP can process more than one image at a time and takes advantage of multiple CPUs for this purpose. For every additional processor in your computer, it is recommended you double the amount of RAM, up to a maximum of 512 MB per processor. It is important to use multi-gigabyte disk drives on computers that are intended for use in high resolution printing, especially if you plan to keep the RIPped images available in the Wasatch Print Queue.
SPECIFICATIONS TECHNICAL FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 2 - 11 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3.9. Anapurna L
! Dimensions
* height without tower light (tower light = 670 mm)
** adjustable to the height of the printing table
*** depth with mounted roll bar brackets (without brackets = 2075 mm)
**** length without coupling
! Printing speed up to 22 boards/hr (70 x 100 cm) (= poster quality)
! Floor space 700 x 700 cm (276" x 276")
! Maximum media width 160 cm (62,9")
3.10. Anapurna XL
! Dimensions
* height without tower light (tower light = 670 mm)
** adjustable to the height of the printing table
*** depth with mounted roll bar brackets (without brackets = 2075 mm)
**** length without coupling
! Printing speed up to 30 boards/hr (70 x 100 cm) (= poster quality)
! Floor space 700 x 800 cm (276" x 316")
! Maximum media width 250 cm (98,4")
Unit Width Height Depth Weight
Anapurna L 3700 mm146 inch
1660 mm*65 inch
2360 mm***93 inch
1700 kg3748 lbs
Rigid table L 1750 mm68.9 inch
± 970 mm **38.2 inch
1000 mm****43 inch
-
Unit Width Height Depth Weight
Anapurna XL 4750 mm187 inch
1660 mm*65 inch
2360 mm***93 inch
2300 kg5071 lbs
Rigid table XL 2650 mm104 inch
± 970 mm **38.2 inch
1000 mm****43 inch
-
TECHNICAL FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
2 - 12 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
CHAPTER
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 1:Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3 Repair and Service
This chapter describes repair and service procedures for the Anapurna L/XL.
1. Safety Notes ............................................................................................................................................................. 3 - 21.1. Warning/Caution/Note ......................................................................................................................... 3 - 21.2. Emergency Stop ........................................................................................................................................ 3 - 21.3. Handling UV Curable Ink ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 31.4. UV Radiation .............................................................................................................................................. 3 - 31.5. Electricity ..................................................................................................................................................... 3 - 41.6. Maintenance Safety Instructions ........................................................................................................ 3 - 41.7. MSDS Contents ......................................................................................................................................... 3 - 5
2. Overview Safety Labels ........................................................................................................................................ 3 - 63. Preparing for Service ............................................................................................................................................. 3 - 8
3.1. Moving Head Carriage to Home or Purge Position ...................................................................... 3 - 83.2. Putting the print Engine in Service Mode ....................................................................................... 3 - 8
4. Disassembly/Assembly of Major Components ........................................................................................... 3 - 94.1. Disassembly/Assembly of the Air Pressure Panel Components ............................................ 3 - 94.2. Disassembly/Assembly of the Media Transport System Components ............................. 3 - 134.3. Disassembly/Assembly of the Ink Supply System Components at Refill Unit .............. 3 - 244.4. Disassembly/Assembly of the Ink Supply System Components at Head Carriage Unit ... 3 -
464.5. Disassembly/assembly of the Head Carriage Movement Components ........................... 3 - 534.6. Disassembly/Assembly of the Print Head Components ......................................................... 3 - 604.7. Disassembly/Assembly of the UV Curing System Components ......................................... 3 - 72
5. Installing the PCI I/O Card .............................................................................................................................. 3 - 835.1. Location .................................................................................................................................................... 3 - 835.2. Replacement of the PCI I/O Card ................................................................................................... 3 - 84
6. Adjustment and Alignment Procedures ...................................................................................................... 3 - 896.1. Vacuum Blower Adjustments ............................................................................................................ 3 - 896.2. Print Head Adjustments ...................................................................................................................... 3 - 916.3. Conveyer Belt Alignment ................................................................................................................... 3 - 976.4. Head Base Alignment .......................................................................................................................... 3 - 996.5. Lamp house Alignment ..................................................................................................................... 3 - 103
REPAIR AND SERVICE SAFETY NOTES
3 - 2 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
1. Safety Notes
The purpose of this paragraph is to provide you with guidelines on the use and safety of the Anapurna L/XL during repair and service to avoid personal injury or damage to the printer.
1.1. Warning/Caution/Note
Three types of safety terms are used to attract your attention to specific information. The meaning of each safety term is described below:
! Warning
! Caution
! Note
1.2. Emergency Stop
In case of emergency, push the emergency stop button immediately to stop the Anapurna L/XL. The emergency button cuts off the power, but certain parts remain powered.
The system is provided with 4 emergency stops, two at the front side and two at the back side.
WARNING: Warnings are directions which, if not followed, can cause fatal or serious injuries to the operator or engineer.
CAUTION: A caution is used when there is a possible danger due to incorrect manipulation. As a result, you could damage the equipment, lose data or obtain an unexpected result.
NOTE: A note contains additional information which may be useful to you but which is not vitally important to work safely.
SAFETY NOTES REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 3 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
1.3. Handling UV Curable Ink
1.4. UV Radiation
Ultraviolet radiation (UV) has a high photon energy range and is particularly hazardous because there are usually no immediate symptoms of excessive exposure.
Always wear UV protective (tinted) glasses while working with an open front cover or while working on the head carriage.
WARNING: Consult the appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) before handling UV curable ink.
WARNING: UV ink contains some chemicals harmful to eyes and skin. Always wear safety gloves when handling UV ink. In case of accidental contact, rinse immediately with plenty of water and consult a doctor, if required.
WARNING: UV ink contains chemicals harmful to eyes and skin. 1. Always wear splash-resistant nitril safety gloves when handling UV ink. (Only safety gloves for single use are allowed). 2. Always wear protective glasses when refilling or changing the ink. 3. Avoid inhalation of the ink.
WARNING: Be aware of the waste disposal and regulations that bear on UV curable ink. Always follow the instructions on the label of the ink cartridge.
WARNING: Never mix non UV and UV curable ink waste.
WARNING: The Anapurna L/XL has an airing system to carry away harmful gases (ozone gas which is built up by the curing process). Before performing any operations involving ink, consult the MSDS.
CAUTION: Do not use ink other than the ones recommended by AGFA. Other ink may cause nozzle clogging or other serious problems to your printer.
CAUTION: Respect the color sequence of the ink buffer system. Each ink tank is fitted with a colored label indicating the color type. From left to right: (W), Lm, Lc, Y, M, C, K and Solution.
CAUTION: Do not remove the air filter without permission.
WARNING: UV light can cause harmful damage to eyes and skin. Therefore never look into UV light without wearing protective glasses. Never exposure your skin to UV light.
REPAIR AND SERVICE SAFETY NOTES
3 - 4 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
1.5. Electricity
1.6. Maintenance Safety Instructions
WARNING: Do not touch the Anapurna L/XL or any electrical components when your hands are wet.
CAUTION: Avoid other electrical equipment near the printer. Electronic waves can cause wrong operation or can shorten the life span of the printer.
CAUTION: Always make sure the power cable is properly connected.
WARNING: Avoid heater temperature above 50°C. Always turn off the heater power when the Anapurna L/XL is shut down for a long period. Overheat can cause engine damage or fire.
WARNING: Do not touch the print head during printing or maintenance actions. Do not place any obstacle on the print table which can hinder the head carriage during movement.
CAUTION: Regular inspecting and cleaning of the Anapurna L/XL is required to help to prevent machine damage and printing difficulties.
CAUTION: Do not move the Anapurna L/XL while printing.
CAUTION: The print table is not to be used as a worktable. Never lean on the printer and do not place anything on the printer.
CAUTION: Always replace a damaged print head.
CAUTION: Always clean the print head using cleaning fluid after printing and before turning off the system.
CAUTION: Avoid direct light on inner parts such as sensors. Direct light can cause malfunctions that lead to a reduced image quality.
CAUTION: Never shutdown the PC of the engine. A shut down of the PC also stops the stirring of the white ink which can lead to white ink supply problems.
SAFETY NOTES REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 5 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
1.7. MSDS Contents
The Material Safety Data Sheets are available on request. What will you find in the MSDS:
! Identification of the product,
! Composition/data on components,
! Hazard identification,
! First aid measures,
! Fire fighting measures,
! Accidental release measures,
! Handling and storage,
! Exposure controls and personal protection,
! Physical and chemical properties,
! Information on stability and reactivity,
! Toxicological information,
! Ecological information,
! Disposal considerations,
! Transport information,
! Regulatory information.
CAUTION: Never turn off the compressed air during idle periods. If it is needed to do this, execute the following actions before shutting down the engine:
! put all ink valves in the solution (S) outlet position,
! mount the capping plate underneath the head base plate,
! disconnect the 2 cables of the carriage servo motor to avoid that after power-up the engine again, the carriage accidentally moves after reset while the capping plate is still mounted.
REPAIR AND SERVICE OVERVIEW SAFETY LABELS
3 - 6 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2. Overview Safety Labels
Always take into account the safety labels provided on the inside and outside of the printer. They may appear throughout the different chapters of this manual. A brief overview of these labels and their meaning is given below.
Label Meaning
Before attempting to work with the Anapurna L/XL, the operator must read and understand the Anapurna L/XL Operator manual.
This label is located on panels that enclose gears and rollers that could potentially harm fingers and hands.
Hot surface! Allow sufficient cooling before handling.
Shock hazard.Make sure the power is switched off before opening areas marked with the flashing arrow.
Make sure the Anapurna L/XL is not in printing mode before opening doors provided with this label.
WARNING
Read and understand operator's
manual before using this machine.
Failure to follow operating
instructions could result in personal
injury or damage to equipment
WARNING
Moving parts cancrush and cut.Do not operate withguard removed.Lockout/tagoutbefore servicing
WARNING
BURN HAZARD
Do Not Touch.
TURN OFF POWER and
allow to cool before
servicing.
WARNING
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGEContact may causeElectric shock or burnTurn off and lock outSystem before servicing
WARNING
Avoid injury.
Do NOT operate withdoors open.Close all doors beforeoperating machine.
OVERVIEW SAFETY LABELS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 7 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
Wear ear protectors.
Never look into UV light without wearing protective glasses.
Anapurna L/XL complies with CE standards.
Label Meaning
CAUTION
Loud noise
hazard.
Ear protection
must be worn
WARNING
UV LIGHT.
Do not look
directly at light.
Made in Korea
DILLI PRECISION IND.CO.LTD.
50 Hz
380VAC/3Phase, 50A
1325604058601
:ANAPURNA XL V1.0
2006-05Manufacturer's Serial No.
Type
Rated Voltage / Current
Rated Frequency
Manufactured By
This device complies with FCC PART 15 SUB PART 15 CLASS A
5909/900
REPAIR AND SERVICE PREPARING FOR SERVICE
3 - 8 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3. Preparing for Service
Before executing any service or maintenance action, the service engineer should go to service mode. In service Mode, the service engineer is allowed to open all doors and covers without any risk.
3.1. Moving Head Carriage to Home or Purge Position
! To move the head carriage to purge position (front left side),
click the Purge button in the Anapurna Control Program.
! To move the head carriage to home position (front right side),
click the Purge button in the Anapurna Control Program.
3.2. Putting the print Engine in Service Mode
To put the print engine in service mode, proceed as follows:
1 Move the head carriage to the purge or home position
2 Switch off the UV lamps.
3 Switch off the main power or press one of the emergency stop buttons.
4 Open the desired doors using the door key if necessary.
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 9 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4. Disassembly/Assembly of Major Components
4.1. Disassembly/Assembly of the Air Pressure Panel Components
This section describes the following replacement procedures:
! Replacement of the Regulators,
! Replacement of the Air Filter,
! Replacement of the Solenoid.
4.1.1. Safety Instructions
CAUTION: Never turn off the compressed air during idle periods. If it is needed to do this, execute the following actions before shutting down the engine:
! put all ink valves in the solution (S) outlet position,
! mount the capping plate underneath the head base plate,
! disconnect the 2 cables of the carriage servo motor to avoid that after power-up the engine again, the carriage accidentally moves after reset while the capping plate is still mounted.
1
2
21
5544
4
33
3
3
1 Regulator (AW20-02BCG) 4 Air filter (AF20-01BG)
2 Regulator (IR-1020-01BG) 5 Solenoid V/V
3 Regulator (IR-1000-01BG)
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 10 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.1.2. Replacement of the Regulators
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Set all print head valves (K, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm, W1 and W2) to the solution outlet position (S).
2 Set the solution valve to the ink outlet position (I).
3 Switch off the engine.
4 Turn off the compressed air supply.
5 Locate the regulator (AW20-02BCG) (6), (IR-1020-01BG (7) and (IR-1000-01BG (8).
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Remove air pressure panel and cable trunk covers. Chapter 4 §9.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service engineer 1
Description Code
Description Code
REGULATOR (AW20-02BCG) D2+2509101
REGULATOR (IR-1020-01BG D2+2509016
REGULATOR (IR-1000-01BG)
1 2 3
4 5
1 K, C, M, Y, Lc and Lm valve 4 Ink outlet direction2 W valves 5 Solution outlet direction3 Solution (S) valve
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 11 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
6 Replace the regulator(s).
6.1 Unscrew the 2 cross-slotted screws.
6.2 Disconnect the air hoses.
6.3 Mount a new regulator, tighten the 2 cross-slotted screws and reconnect the air hoses.
7 Restore the compressed air supply.
8 Check the positive pressure.
6 8 7 8
Regulator AW20-02BCG Regulator IR-1020-01BG Regulator IR-1000-01BG
1
2 3 4 5
0.15 MPa0.10 - 0.15 MPa
0.40 - 0.80 MPa 0.30 MPa
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 12 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
8.1 Check the incoming compressed air pressure with a pressure gauge (1).
8.2 The main regulator (2) should indicate 0.6 MPa.
8.3 Check the pressure of the other regulators with a pressure gauge.
The UV lamp regulator (3) should indicate 0.1-0.15 MPa.
The first carriage regulator should indicate 0.3 MPa (4), the second 0.15 MPa (5).
9 Restart the engine.
10 Set all print head valves and the solution valve to the proper outlet position.
11 Verify the printing conditions and if necessary clean the print heads.
Refer to �Cleaning a Print Head� on page 4-38.
4.1.3. Replacement of the Air Filter
Refer to �Replacing the Air Filter� on page 4-72 (chapter Preventive Maintenance).
4.1.4. Replacement of the Solenoid
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 13 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.2. Disassembly/Assembly of the Media Transport System Components
This section describes the following replacement procedures:
! Replacement of the Conveyer Belt,
! Replacement of the Feed Servo Motor,
! Replacement of the Winder/Unwinder Drive Motor,
! Replacement of a Media Register Pin,
! Replacement of the Limit Switch and Shock Absorber,
! Replacement of a Vacuum Pump.
4.2.1. Safety Instructions
4.2.2. Replacement of the Conveyer Belt
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
WARNING: Do not touch the print head during printing or maintenance actions. Do not place any obstacle on the print table which can hinder the head carriage during movement.
CAUTION: The print table is not to be used as a worktable. Never lean on the printer and do not Avoid direct light on inner parts such as sensors. Direct light can cause malfunctions that lead to a reduced image quality.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service engineer 1
Operator 1
Description Code
Allen key no.12
Conveyer belt wire D2+2509266
Description Code
Conveyer belt L D2+250314
Conveyer belt XL D2+250315
Protective gloves
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 14 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
E. PROCEDURE
1 Move the conveyer belt until the belt�s joint is positioned in the middle (1) on top of the printing table.
To move the conveyer belt, use Media Feed buttons in the Anapurna Control Program.
2 Loosen the tension on the belt:
2.1 Remove the metal black cover on the left and right rear side.
2.2 Unscrew the left and right tension bolt (rotate CCW) to loosen the tension.
3 Remove the pin out of the conveyer belt and put the old conveyer belt aside.
4 Place a new conveyer belt on the table.
5 Snap both ends in each other.
1
NOTE: There is no difference between the bottom and top side of the conveyer belt
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 15 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
5.1 Start the concatenation link by link.
5.2 if you notice a bulb (2), adjust the concatenation (3)(e.g. relation 2 hook against 1 hook) so the bulb disappears.
6 Secure the concatenation by means of two paperclips (or two pieces from the old needle) and slightly tighten the conveyer belt to remove the bulb.
7 Drive the conveyer belt a complete turn, to verify if the belt remains flat during movement.
7.1 If the belt remains flat during movement, use the conveyer belt tool to re-insert the needle and proceed with step 8.
7.2 If the belt is not flat during movement, repeat steps 5 to 7.
8 Finally, establish the conveyer belt alignment.
Refer to �Adjustment and Alignment Procedures� on page 3-89.
2
2
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 16 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.2.3. Replacement of the Feed Servo Motor
The conveyor belt is driven by a servo motor (400W).
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Description Code
Description Code
1 12 3
1 Feed servo motor (400W)) 3 Reduction gear motor
2 Polyester woven conveyer belt
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 17 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.2.4. Replacement of the Winder/Unwinder Drive Motor
The Anapurna L/XL is equipped with an automated winder/unwinder system to wind/unwind the print medium rollers. The two drive motors, one at the paper input side and one at the paper output side, are mounted on the right-hand roll bar bracket.
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
For both front right side and rear right side:
1 Remove the cover (1) of the motor by unscrewing the 2 cross-slotted screws.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
1
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 18 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2 Cut the tie wrap (2) around the motor and the 2 connectors and disconnect the 2-pin connector and the 4-pin connector (3).
3 Remove the drive motor and replace by a new one.
4 Connect the 2-pin connector and the 4-pin connector.
5 Strap the 2 connectors around the motor using a wide tie wrap.
6 Mount the cover of the motor using the 2 cross-slotted screws.
2 3
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 19 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.2.5. Replacement of a Media Register Pin
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Description Code
Description Code
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 20 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.2.6. Replacement of the Limit Switch and Shock Absorber
4.2.6.1. General information
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Description Code
Description Code
limit switch D2+2509143
Shock absorber D2+2509058
1 2
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 21 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.2.7. Replacement of a Vacuum Pump
Two adjustable vacuum air pumps hold the media on the print table during printing and transport.
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
! Disassemble
1 Disconnect the electrical connections and the compressed air connections.
1.1 Disconnect the electrical connection (1)
1.2 Open the clamping bracket at the air cylinder input (2).
1.3 Remove the grey flexible hose of the air cylinder input (2).
NOTE: Each vacuum pump together with the silencer and air controller is marked with a color dot.
NOTE: If you need to replace both vacuum pumps, respect the yellow and blue color dots when mounting the silencer and the air controller to the vacuum pump.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Teflon tape
Description Code
1
2
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 22 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2 Remove the air controller (3) and the silencer (4).
! Assemble
1 Take the following items:
! vacuum pump, marked with a color dot.
! silencers and air controller, marked with the same color dot.
2 Mount the silencer and the air controller as illustrated:
3 4
1 2 3
1 Vacuum blower 3 Silencer2 Air controller with air relief valve
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 23 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.1 Mount the silencer to the �OUT� side.
2.2 Mount the air controller to the �IN� side.
3 Establish the electrical connection.
4 Establish the compressed air connection.
4.1 Connect the grey flexible hose to the air cylinder input.
4.2 Take a clamping bracket and put it over the hose.
4.3 Tie up the clamping bracket and tighten the crosshead screw.
5 Establish or check the following adjustments for the new vacuum blower.
5.1 Adjust the vacuum blower settings according to the engine configuration, star connection (Europe) or delta connection (USA).
5.2 Adjust the air relief valve according to the engine configuration (50 Hz or 60 Hz).
Refer to �Vacuum Blower Adjustments� on page 3-89.
6 Finally, position the vacuum pump underneath the print table with the silencers directed to the side (roll bar bracket) of the print engine. Be aware that the vacuum pump is not positioned in the beam of the media detection signal sensor.
NOTE: To avoid leakage, wind isolation tape around the cylinder input before attaching the hose.
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 24 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.3. Disassembly/Assembly of the Ink Supply System Components at Refill Unit
This section describes the following replacement procedures:
! Replacement of the Printed Circuit Boards (PCB),
! Replacement of the Main Ink Tank (Color and White) Components,
! Replacement of the Ink Pump,
! Replacement of the Ink Filter,
! Replacement of the Ink Tubes Located in the Ink Supply Door,
! Replacement of the Ink Tubes in the Chain.
4.3.1. Safety Instructions
InkBottle
ColorInk Tank+Air Filter
Sub Ink Tank (6C)
SolutionTank
Ink/SolutionValve
Print Head
Ink
Ink Pump
IN OUT IN OUT
Ink Filter
Components Refill Unit
WARNING: Avoid heater temperature above 50°C. Always turn off the heater power when the Anapurna L/XL is shut down for a long period. Overheat can cause engine damage or fire.
CAUTION: Regular inspecting and cleaning of the Anapurna L/XL is required to help to prevent machine damage and printing difficulties.
CAUTION: Avoid direct light on inner parts such as sensors. Direct light can cause malfunctions that lead to a reduced image quality.
CAUTION: The ink filter should not be exposed to fluorescent light and sunlight.
CAUTION: Never shutdown the PC of the engine. A shut down of the PC also stops the stirring
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 25 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.3.2. Replacement of the Printed Circuit Boards (PCB)
There are three PCBs at the refill unit side:
! Indicator PCB
! Refill Control PCB
! Refill PCB
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
Briefly:
1 Locate the PCB that needs to be replaced.
1.1 Indicator PCB, refer to �INDICATOR PCB� on page 1-153.
1.2 Refill control PCB, refer to �REFILL CONTROL PCB� on page 1-150.
1.3 Refill PCB, refer to �REFILL PCB� on page 1-117.
2 Disconnect all connectors.
3 Remove the PCB and replace by a new one.
4 Reconnect all connectors.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Indicator PCB D2+2359109
Refill Control PCB D2+2359048
Refill PCB D2+2359049
NOTE: When you replace a PCB board, replace all fixing screws to assure a correct working of the PCB/engine. Some fixing screws fulfill the function of earth connection
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 26 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.3.3. Replacement of the Main Ink Tank (Color and White) Components
The following ink tank components are discussed:
! Air filter (6C and W),
! Refill float sensor (6C and W),
! Circling motor (White),
! Twin Timer,
! Main Ink tank.
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
! Air filter (6C and W)
Refer to �Inspecting and Replacing the Air Filter� on page 4-55 (Chapter Preventive Maintenance).
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Air filter (Color and White) D2+2509046
Refill float sensor (Color and white) D2+2357004
Circling motor (white) D2+2509165
Twin Timer D2+2509253
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 27 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
! Refill float sensor (6C and W)
1 Open the ink supply door and remove the cover (1) above the main ink tanks.
2 Disconnect the level sensor (2) of the appropriate main ink tank (color or white).
One side of the 3-pin connector is connected with the refill float sensor of the main ink tank. The other side of the 3-pin connector is connected to the Indicator PCB, located behind the ink tank indicator panel.
3 Unscrew the nut (3) on top of the refill float sensor to remove the refill float sensor from the main ink tank (4).
4 Remove the old refill float sensor.
1
2
3
4
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 28 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
5 Insert the new refill float sensor and tighten the nut.
Note that the new refill float sensor (5) contains a refill float sensor cover (6) and a nut (7).
6 Guide the 3-pin connector through the nearest hole (8) in the ink supply door and reconnect the level sensor (step 2).
! Circling motor (White)
1 Open the ink supply door and remove the cover (1) above the main ink tanks.
2 Disconnect the stirrer drive connector (2) of the main white ink tank.
The 2-pin connector with the red/blue wire is connected with the circling motor of the white main ink tank. The 2-pin connector with the black/white wire leads through the stirrer timer, also know as Twin Timer (3).
5 6
8
7
5
1
2
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 29 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3 Unscrew the circling motor (4) from the main ink tank..
4 Insert the new circling motor (5) and guide the 2-pin connector through the nearest hole (6) in the ink supply door and reconnect the stirrer drive connector (7).
3
4
5 56
7
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 30 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
! Twin Timer
1 Open the ink supply door to get access to the twin timer.
2 Remove the old twin timer (1).
Press the two blue buttons (2) to unlock the twin timer from the bracket.
3 Clamp the new twin timer on the bracket.
4 Adjust the ON (4) and OFF (3) timer of the stirring rod to the desired value (hour scale division).
! Main Ink tank
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
3
2
2
3
4
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 31 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.3.4. Replacement of the Ink Pump
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
! Disassemble:
1 Open the ink supply door and lift out the refill case cover (1) on the right-hand side.
2 Disconnect the appropriate ink pump connector (2) from the Refill PCB.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Ink pump (KNF) D2+2509047
1
2
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 32 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3 Remove the cable protection wrapped around the ink pump cables (3).
4 Detach the cable from the fixing bracket (4).
5 Cut the tie wrap around the ink pump cables (5).
Use a wire-cutter, but be aware not to cut any cables.
6 Remove the ink pump.
6.1 Disconnect the tube from the ink pump IN connection (7) and close the tube to avoid leakage.
The ink pump IN connection tube is connected with the corresponding main ink tank.
6.2 Disconnect the tube from ink pump OUT connection(6) and close the tube to avoid leakage.
The ink pump OUT connection tube is connected with the bottom of the corresponding ink filter.
6.3 Unscrew the 2 cross-slotted screws (8) and remove the old ink pump.
3
4
5
7
6
8
IN
OUT
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 33 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
! Assemble:
1 Take out the new ink pump.
2 Mount the new ink pump
2.1 Mount the new ink tube to the pump fixing bracket (1).
2.2 Slide a clamping ring (2) over the two ink pump connections (IN and OUT).
2.3 Position the cable behind the tubes (3).
2.4 Attach the cable to the other cables using a tie wrap (4).
2.5 Wrap cable protection around the ink pump cables (5).
3 Reconnect the appropriate pump connector (6) to the Refill PCB.
541
2IN
OUT 2
3
6
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 34 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4 Reconnect the following ink pump tubes:
4.1 Connect the tube coming from the bottom of the appropriate ink filter (IN) to the ink pump OUT connection (6).
4.2 Slide the clamping ring over the tube and clamp using a pincer.
4.3 Connect the tube coming from the appropriate main ink tank to the ink pump IN connection (7)
4.4 Slide the clamping ring over the tube and clamp using a pincer.
5 Close the refill case cover (8) and close the ink supply door.
7
8
IN
OUT
8
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 35 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.3.5. Replacement of the Ink Filter
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
! Disassemble:
1 Unscrew the four screws to remove the refill system panel.
Place the panel against the right cover.
2 Put a receiving bin and some absorbent lint free cleaning tissues underneath the appropriate ink filters to catch possible spilled ink.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Ink filter D2+2509004
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 36 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3 Get access to the refill PCB and disconnect the following connectors.
3.1 Connector J17 (power supply to the sub ink tank).
3.2 The appropriate ink pump connector.
4 Open the two caps of the appropriate ink filter.
Venting cap at the top (1) and drain cap at the bottom (2).
5 Wait until the ink content of the ink filter is dripped out.
1
2
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 37 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
6 Remove the following tubes from the ink filter:
6.1 Unscrew the tube on top (OUT) of the ink filter (3) and close the tube.
The tube on top of the ink filter (OUT) leads to the hose fixing guide.
To close the tube, use a closing cap from the new ink filter (the black flexible cap that fits over the tube connector) and put it on the open tube connector of the installed filter.
6.2 Unscrew the tube on the bottom (IN) of the ink filter (4) and close the tube.
The tube at the bottom of the ink filter (IN) is coming from the corresponding ink pump OUT connection.
To close the tube, use the second closing cap of the new ink filter.
7 Loosen the filter fixing bracket (5) and remove the old ink filter.
! Assemble
1 Take out the new ink filter.
2 Connect the tube coming from the ink pump OUT connection to the bottom of the new ink filter (IN).
3 Attach the new ink filter using the filter fixing bracket.
4 Connect the tube coming from the hose fixing guide to the top of the new ink filter (OUT).
5 Bleed the new ink filter.
Refer to �Bleeding the Ink Filters� on page 4-56 (chapter Preventive Maintenance).
3
4
5
IN
OUT
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 38 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.3.6. Replacement of the Ink Tubes Located in the Ink Supply Door
! from main tank to ink pump.
! from ink pump to ink filter.
! from ink filter to hose fixing guide, located behind the home rear door.
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1..
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service engineer.
Description Code
open-end wrench
cross head screwdriver
wire-cutter
pincer
Description Code
Tie wrap
O-ring
Ink filter D2+2509004
Ink pump (KNF) D2+2609047
NOTE: When replacing the ink tubes of a certain color located in the ink supply door, it is recommended to install a new ink filter and a new ink pump for that color.
NOTE: The replacement procedure only discuss the replacement of the ink tubes. For the replacement of the ink pump and the ink filter, refer to �Replacement of the Ink Pump� on page 3-31 and �Replacement of the Ink Filter� on page 3-35.
NOTE: The replacement procedure is written for one ink tube (e.g. of the white main ink tank). Repeat the procedure for the other ink tubes.
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 39 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
! Disassemble:
Remove the ink tube between the main tank and the ink pump IN connection:
1 Open the ink supply door and remove the cover (1) above the main ink tanks.
2 Disconnect the ink outlet tube (2).
To disconnect the ink outlet tube from the ink outlet pipe of the main ink tank, unscrew the brass M6 pipe bolt.
3 Close the ink outlet tube (3), with a cap, to avoid any leakage.
4 Pull the ink outlet tube out at the rear side of the ink supply door.
5 Disconnect the ink tube from the ink pump IN connection.
6 Put away the ink tube.
Remove the ink tube between the ink filter OUT connection and the hose fixing guide:
7 Disconnect the ink tube from the hose fixing guide:
7.1 Remove the hose fixing bracket (5).
7.2 Disconnect the ink tube (6) and close the tube to avoid ink leakage.
1
32
4
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 40 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
7.3 Close the ink tube coming from the hose fixing guide (7).
8 Remove the tube protection (8).
9 Pull the tube out of the refill case cover (9).
10 Take the ink tube out of the pump hose fixing bracket (10).
5
6
7
8
9
10
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 41 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
11 Disconnect the ink tube from the ink filter OUT connection (top of the ink filter) (11).
Close the filter cap to avoid leakage.
12 Put away the ink tube.
Remove the ink tube between the ink pump OUT connection and the ink filter IN connection:
13 Disconnect the ink tube from the ink pump OUT connection.
14 Disconnect the ink tube from the ink filter IN connection (bottom ink filter) and close it (1).
Close the filter connection cap to avoid leakage (2).
15 Put away the ink tube.
16 Remove the ink filter.
Refer to the disassemble procedure of �Replacement of the Ink Filter� on page 3-35.
17 Remove the ink pump.
Refer to the disassemble procedure of �Replacement of the Ink Pump� on page 3-31.
! Assemble:
1 Mount a new ink filter. But use new ink tubes.
Refer to the assemble procedure of the �Replacement of the Ink Filter� on page 3-35.
1.1 Connect a new ink tube from the top of the ink filter (OUT) to the corresponding ink hose (1).
1.2 Mount the hose fixing bracket (2).
11
IN
OUT
1 2
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 42 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
1.3 Wrap a cable protection around the ink tubes (3).
2 Mount the new ink pump. But use new ink tubes.
Refer to the assemble procedure of �Replacement of the Ink Pump� on page 3-31.
2.1 Put a new ink tube through the ink supply door from top to bottom (4).
2.2 Connect the top end of ink tube with the main ink tank (5).
2.3 Guide the bottom end of the ink tube through the pump hose fixing bracket (6).
2.4 Connect the bottom end of the tube to the ink pump IN connection (7).
2.5 Connect a new ink tube from the ink pump OUT connection to the bottom of the appropriate ink filter (IN connection).
3 Replace the main ink tank cover (8).
21 3
4
67
5
8
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 43 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.3.7. Replacement of the Ink Tubes in the Chain
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Get access to the hose fixing guide (1).
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1..
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Open the home rear door to get access to the hose fixing guide.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
open-end wrench
wire-cutter
Description Code
Tie wrap
ink tube
sticky tape
NOTE: The replacement procedure is written for one ink tube. Repeat the procedure for the other ink tubes.
1
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 44 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2 Remove the nut (2) of the ink tube with an open-end wrench.
3 Take the nut (3) and the ink tube (4) out.
4 Remove the nut from the ink tube.
5 Tape the new tube over a certain length to the old tube.
Be aware that both tubes are tightly connected.
2
34 4
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 45 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
6 Go to the purge side and open all purge doors to get access to the sub ink tank.
6.1 Disconnect the corresponding ink tube from the sub ink tank.
6.2 Cut the tie wrap that keep all ink tubes together at sub ink tank side.
6.3 Pull the old tube gently out of the chain until the new tube become visible.
6.4 Remove the old ink tube from the new ink tube.
7 Connect both sides of the new ink tube.
One side to the sub ink tank, the other side to the hose fixing guide.
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 46 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.4. Disassembly/Assembly of the Ink Supply System Components at Head Carriage Unit
This section describes the following replacement procedures:
! Replacement of the Sub Ink Tank (Color and White) Components,
! Replacement of the Solution Tank,
! Replacement of the Sub Air Tank Components,
! Replacement of a 2-Way Valve,
! Replacement of the Carriage Assembly Components,
! Replacement of the Waste Tank.
4.4.1. Replacement of the Sub Ink Tank (Color and White) Components
The following sub ink tank components are discussed:
! Float sensor (6C and W),
! Temperature sensor (6C and W).
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
InkBottle
ColorInk Tank+Air Filter
Sub Ink Tank (6C)
SolutionTank
Ink/SolutionValve
Print Head
Ink
Ink Pump
IN OUT IN OUT
Ink Filter
Components Head Carriage Unit
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 47 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
! Float sensor (6C and W)
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
! Temperature sensor (6C and W)
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
4.4.2. Replacement of the Solution Tank
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
4.4.3. Replacement of the Sub Air Tank Components
The following sub air tank components are discussed:
! Float sensor,
! Pressure sensor (PSE531-M5-L),
! Air filter,
! Speed V/V (AS1001F-06).
Description Code
Float sensor (Color and White) D2+2509129
Refill float sensor (Color and white) D2+2509184
1
2
3
1 Air filter 3 Pressure sensor (PSE531-M5-L)2 Speed V/V (AS1001F-06)
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 48 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
! Float sensor
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
! Pressure sensor
The pressure sensor PSE531-M5 on the top of sub air tank measures the negative pressure. The read-out is feedback to ITV controller.
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
! Air filter
1 Inspect the air filter for any moisture.
2 If saturated, remove and replace the air filter.
! Speed V/V (AS1001F-06)
To replace the speed V/V:
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
To adjust the speed V/V:
The underpressure setting (-0.032MPa) are influenced by the air relief valve, called Speed V/V (AS1001F-06) mounted on the sub air tank.
In case of problems with the vacuum, you can regulate the strength of the negative pressure inside the sub air tank by tuning the air relief valve, speed V/V (AS1001F-06). This is an extra regulating
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Float sensor D2+2509129
Pressure sensor (PSE531-M5-L) D2+2357005
Air filter D2+2509046
Speed V/V (AS1001F-06)
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 49 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
mechanism in relation to the atmosphere air pressure (leakage air). If you open the air relief valve, the system is aggressive.
1 Unscrew the locker nut.
2 Turn the tuning screw (1) clockwise till it is closed completely.
3 Turn the screw 1 complete turn counterclockwise.
4 Lock this screw again with the locker nut.
4.4.4. Replacement of a 2-Way Valve
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
1
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 50 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.4.5. Replacement of the Carriage Assembly Components
The following carriage assembly components are discussed:
! Electro-pneumatic regulator ITV2010,
! Air purge valve VT301V-025GB and VT301-025GB,
! Vacuum ejector (INO-4336-4) INO-4336-4,
! Encoder
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
! Electro-pneumatic regulator ITV2010
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Description Code
Electro-pneumatic regulator ITV2010 D2+2509028
Air purge valve VT301V-025GB D2+2509027
Air purge valve VT301-025GB
Vacuum ejector (INO-4336-4) D2+2509170
Encoder D2+2162037
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 51 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
! Air purge valve VT301V-025GB and VT301-025GB
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
! Vacuum ejector (INO-4336-4)
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
! Encoder
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 52 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.4.6. Replacement of the Waste Tank
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Disconnect the full detection sensor connector (2-pin), located in the cable trunk.
2 Unscrew the nut on top of the waste tank to remove the refill float sensor.
3 Remove the old refill float sensor.
4 Insert the new refill float sensor and tighten the nut.
Note that the new refill float sensor contains a refill float sensor cover and a nut.
5 Connect the full detection sensor connector (2-pin) and close the cable trunk.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Refill float sensor D2+2357004
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 53 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.5. Disassembly/assembly of the Head Carriage Movement Components
This section describes the following replacement procedures:
! Replacement of the Ball Screw Assy,
! Replacement of the Head Base Components,
! Replacement of the Head Base Lifting Assembly,
! Replacement of the Printed Circuit Boards (PCB).
4.5.1. Replacement of the Ball Screw Assy
1
2
3
1
1 Ball screw upper unit 1 Ball screw lower unit
2 Ball screw
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 54 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
A head crash can lead to bending of the lifting bar and as a result the bearings of the ball screw will be damaged after some time. The procedure below explains how to remove the ball screw.
! Disassemble
1 Lower the head carriage unit using the manual head height setting knob until the bolts (1) are in front of the service hole. The service hole is situated in the back plate of the liftable part of the head carriage unit.
2 Support the head carriage unit so the ball screw does not carry the head carriage unit.
Use the head transport protection plate to support the head carriage unit on top off the ink tray.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Step motor D2+2501123
Ball screw upper unit
Ball screw
Ball screw lower unit
1
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 55 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3 Remove the step motor (2).
3.1 Loosen the screws of the coupling (3).
3.2 Remove the four bolts that fix the support bracket (4).
4 Remove the ball screw upper unit (5).
4.1 Remove the 4 screws.
4.2 Lift the ball screw unit over the shaft.
2
34
23
4
5
5
5
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 56 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
5 Remove the aluminium motor fixing plate (support bracket) (6) by unscrewing the 4 screws.
6 Release the moving plate fixing block (7).
This plate is attached with 4 screws to the moving plate.
7 Release the ball screw lower unit (8) by unscrewing the 2 bolts (9).
Those 2 bolts are in front of the service hole (refer to step 1).
6
6
6
7
9
8
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 57 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
8 Remove the ball screw (10).
8.1 Tilt the complete ball screw pen, with all surrounding components, out off the engine.
8.2 Disassemble this part and replace the broken part by new ones.
8.3 To remove the moving plate fixing block (11), unlock and unscrew the lock nut () at the bottom.
! Assemble
To assemble, proceed in the opposite way.
4.5.2. Replacement of the Head Base Components
The replacement of the head base components is discussed in the section �Disassembly/Assembly of the Print Head Components� on page 3-60.
10
11
NOTE: Be aware of the ball screw spring, it is still loaded. To unload, move the ball screw completely up.
CAUTION: Do not remove the bearing from the shaft. The ball is not fixed.
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 58 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.5.3. Replacement of the Head Base Lifting Assembly
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1..
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Description Code
Solenoid (small) D2+2359104
solenoid (large) D2+2359103
shading sensor (Omron) D2+2509104
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 59 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.5.4. Replacement of the Printed Circuit Boards (PCB)
There are three PCBs at the refill unit side:
! Head Lift PCB
! Head PCB
! Cartridge PCB
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
Briefly:
1 Locate the PCB that needs to be replaced.
1.1 Head Lift PCB, refer to �HEAD LIFT PCB� on page 1-127.
1.2 Head PCB, refer to �HEAD PCB� on page 1-108.
1.3 Cartridge PCB, refer to �CARTRIDGE PCB� on page 1-123.
2 Disconnect all connectors.
3 Remove the PCB and replace by a new one.
4 Reconnect all connectors.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Head Lift PCB D2+2359275
Head PCB D2+2359045
Cartridge PCB D2+2359044
NOTE: When you replace a PCB board, replace all fixing screws to assure a correct working of the PCB/engine. Some fixing screws fulfill the function of earth connection
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 60 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.6. Disassembly/Assembly of the Print Head Components
This section describes the following replacement procedures:
! Replacement of a Print Head,
! Replacement of the Heater Bar and the Thermistor,
! Replacement of the Temperature Sensor.
4.6.1. Safety Instructions
WARNING: Do not touch the print head during printing or maintenance actions. Do not place any obstacle on the print table which can hinder the head carriage during movement.
CAUTION: Always replace a damaged print head.
CAUTION: Always clean the print head using cleaning fluid after printing and before turning off the system.
CAUTION: Avoid direct light on inner parts such as sensors. Direct light can cause malfunctions that lead to a reduced image quality.
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 61 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.6.2. Replacement of a Print Head
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
NOTE: The replacement procedure is written for one print head (the Magenta print head). Repeat the procedure if more than one print head has to be replaced.
1
2
M
Y
Lc
Lm
C
K
W spotW pre
M
1 Detail Magenta Print Head 2 Head Base Plate
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Put the print head valve of the heads that need to be replaced, to the solution outlet position (S).
Put the solution valve on the ink outlet position (I).
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 62 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
Open all purge doors (front, rear, left and top), to get full access to the head carriage unit.
Remove the head cover of the head carriage unit by unscrewing the two crosshead screws on each side and the three crosshead screws on the front side.
Place some towels in front of the purge grid to keep the working area clean.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Allen Key no.1.5 and no.2.5
Crosshead screwdriver
Long Philips screwdriver
Spanner no.10
Long nose plier
Description Code
Print Head (Spectra Nova 80pico) D2+2409007
Teflon washer D2+2509185
Head adjusting spring D2+2501133
Spring fixing pipe D2+2102156
Eccentric bushing shaft D2+2102154
Wave washer D2+2509186
Protective gloves
Operation Reference
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 63 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
E. PROCEDURE
! Disassemble:
1 Detach the following cables:
1.1 Detach the 4 data cables of the print head (1) from the CARTRIDGE PCB (2) using a plier.
1.2 Detach the black thermostat cable (3) which is connected to J29 of the HEAD PCB.
1.3 Detach the red heater cable (4) which is connected to the HEAD PCB.
NOTE: The replacement procedure is written for the replacement of one print head (complete disassembly/assembly of the Magenta print head). Repeat the procedure if more than one print head has to be replaced.
B C M Y Lc
1
2
NOTE: Only applicable for the Magenta head.
M Y Lc
M Y Lc Lm W
33, 4
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 64 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2 Detach the metal head PCB frame from the head base plate by unscrewing the 5 bolts on top of the head carriage unit. Use a long Philips screwdriver.
3 Raise the complete assembly (5) (head PCB frame) on 2 foam blocks (6).
4 Loosen the head fixing (13) from the head base plate (12).
4.1 Unlock the Eccentric nut (11) using an Allen key no. 1.5.
4.2 Remove the nut (11) using spanner no.10.
4.3 Remove the teflon washer (8), eccentric bushing (7), wave washer (9) and the 2 black washers (10).
5 66
7 8
9
101113 12
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 65 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
5 Remove head adjusting springs (14) in front and side using an Allen key no. 2.5.
6 Loosen the head adjusting bolt at the rear side of the print head until you are able to pull out the print head easily. Use a screwdriver.
7 Loosen the ink tube (18) on of the print head valve.
7.1 Unscrew the locknut (17) underneath the print head valve.
7.2 Shear the tube (18) of each valve.
8 Remove the print head.
14
15
1614, 15, 16
NOTE: The head adjusting bolts are the bolts which allows you to do the front/back alignment of the print head.
17
18
NOTE: Place the head always on the black side on the table. Not on the Aluminum side.
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 66 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
9 Remove the print head (19) from the head fixing (Aluminum block) (20).
Unscrew the 2 screws underneath the head.
! Assemble:
10 Take the new print head.
11 Change (renew) �O� rings (21) if head is removed from aluminum block.
New O-rings are delivered with the new print head.
12 Mount the print head on the head fixing.
19
20
21
21
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 67 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
13 Reconnect the tube of the print head valve and manually tighten the locknut.
14 Place the print head into the head base plate.
15 Mount the head adjusting springs in front and side as illustrated. Use an Allen key no. 2.5.
16 Attach the head fixing (25) to the head base plate (26).
16.1 Mind the order: eccentric nut (27), teflon washer (28), eccentric bushing (29), wave washer (30) and the 2 black washers (31) with the smooth sides to each other.
16.2 Tighten the nut (27) finger tight.
NOTE: Mind the order: socket screw, spring fixing pipe (22), teflon washer (23), head adjusting spring (24) and teflon washer (23).
24
23
22
25 26
27 28 29 30 31 31
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 68 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
17 Remove the 2 foam blocks and lower the complete metal head PCB frame.
18 Attach the metal head PCB frame from the head base plate by screwing the 5 bolts on top of the head carriage unit.
19 Reconnect the following cables:
19.1 Connect the red heater cable to the Head PCB.
19.2 Connect the black thermostat cable to J29 of the Head PCB.
19.3 Connect the 4 data cables of the print head to the corresponding Cartridge PCB.
20 Finally, establish the following adjustments and alignment procedures for the new print head:
20.1 �Adjusting the Head Base Temperature� on page 3-91,
20.2 �Adjusting the Head Voltage� on page 3-92,
20.3 �Hardware Alignment of the Print Head� on page 3-94,
20.4 �Software Alignment of the Print Head� on page 3-95
NOTE: Only applicable for the Magenta head.
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 69 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.6.3. Replacement of the Heater Bar and the Thermistor
! Each print head has a heater bar (2), which is connected to the Head PCB.
! Only the Magenta print head has a thermistor (1), also called head temperature sensor, which is connected to the Head PCB.
For more information about the heater bar and the thermistor of the Magenta print head, refer to �Temperature detection components and setting components� on page 1-63 (chapter Functional Description).
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
21
12 2
1 Thermistor (only for Magenta) 2 Heater bar
Operation Reference
Disassemble the print head. 3 §4.6.2., step 1 to 9.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician
Description Code
Description Code
Heater bar (Spectra) D2+2401001
Thermistor (Spectra) (also called head temperature sensor) D2+2409006
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 70 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
E. PROCEDURE
1 Put the head fixing on his side and remove the head heather fixing plate (1).
2 Remove the heater bar (2) and the thermistor (3).
3 Replace the thermistor and the heater bar by a new one.
3.1 Make sure that the head heater fixing plate (4) fits with the head fixing (5) without crushing the thermistor and heater bar cable.
3.2 When mounting the print head on the head fixing, make sure the thermistor and heater bar are correctly positioned into the print head.
4 Assemble the print head back into the head base plate.
For more information, refer to �Replacement of a Print Head� on page 3-61, step 11 to 20.
1
2
3
NOTE: Thermistor, only applicable for the Magenta head.
2 11 2
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 71 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.6.4. Replacement of the Temperature Sensor
The temperature of the head base plate is measured by means of a temperature sensor, which is built into the PT sensor bracket. The temperature sensor is connected to J17 of the Head Lift PCB and leads through the Head Base Temp. PID display (home unit).
For more information about the temperature sensor, refer to �Temperature detection components and setting components� on page 1-63 (chapter Functional Description).
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Disconnect the 4-pins connector J17 on the Head Lift PCB.
2 Remove the PT sensor bracket (1) by unscrewing the two cross-slotted screws.
3 Pull out the temperature senor cable (2).
4 Replace the temperature sensor by a new one.
5 Assemble the temperature sensor back.
6 Establish the head base plate temperature adjustment.
Refer to �Print Head Adjustments� on page 3-91.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Open the top purge door to get full access to the head base plate
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
cross-slotted screwdriver
Description Code
Temperature sensor stick (rear) D2+2509184
1 2
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 72 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.7. Disassembly/Assembly of the UV Curing System Components
This section describes the following replacement procedures:
! Replacement of the UV Lamp Box,
! Replacement of the UV Lamp Box Housing,
! Replacement of the Air Inlet AC Fan,
! Replacement of the Air Oulet DC Fan,
! Replacement of the Ignitor,
! Replacement of the UV Lamp,
! Replacement of the UV Lamp Shutter,
! Replacement of the Thermistor.
4.7.1. Safety Instructions
2
1
6
8
6
4
3
5
7
1 UV lamp box (left) 5 Lamp shutter
2 UV lamp box (right) 6 UV lamp box housing
3 Lamp case outer air inlet AC fan 7 Lamp case inner air outlet DC fan
4 UV Lamp fixing 8 Lamp (190 mm)
WARNING: UV light can cause harmful damage to eyes and skin. Therefore never look into UV light without wearing protective glasses. Never exposure your skin to UV light.
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 73 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.7.2. Replacement of the UV Lamp Box
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Detach the UV lamp box from the UV lamp box housing by unscrewing the two head screws (1).
2 Disconnect the lamp power connector (4-pin) (2).
Operation Reference
Left UV lamp box: Move the head carriage to the purge position.Right UV lamp Box: Move the head carriage to the home position.
Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Left UV lamp box: Open the front and left purge door to get full access to the left UV lamp box.Right UV lamp Box:Open the home right side door to get full access to the right UV lamp box.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Allen Key no.
Crosshead screwdriver
Description Code
NOTE: The replacement procedure is written for the left UV lamp box. If you want to remove the right UV lamp box, move the head carriage to the home position (front right side) and execute the same procedure as for the left UV lamp box.
1 1
2
View: Purge side
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 74 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3 Tilt the UV lamp box out of the UV lamp box housing.
4 Put the UV lamp box aside.
5 To replace, proceed in the opposite way.
4.7.3. Replacement of the UV Lamp Box Housing
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
Operation Reference
Left UV lamp box: Move the head carriage to the purge position.Right UV lamp Box: Move the head carriage to the home position.
Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Left UV lamp box: Open the front and left purge door to get full access to the left UV lamp box.Right UV lamp Box:Open the home right side door to get full access to the right UV lamp box.
Remove the head cover of the head carriage unit by unscrewing the two crosshead screws on each side and the three crosshead screws on the front side.
Remove the UV lamp box. Chapter3 §4.7.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 75 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Disconnect the following electrical connections:
1.1 Disconnect the yellow lamp shutter on pneumatic connector (1).
1.2 Disconnect the red lamp shutter off pneumatic connector (3).
1.3 Disconnect the lamp signal connector (label = LAMP-L-SIG) (2).
1.4 Disconnect the lamp shutter signal connector (label = LAMP SHUTTER L) (4).
2 Dismount the UV lamp box housing by unscrewing the four head screws.
Description Code
Allen Key no.
Crosshead screwdriver
Description Code
NOTE: The replacement procedure is written for the left UV lamp box. If you want to remove the right UV lamp box, move the head carriage to the home position (front right side) and execute the same procedure as for the left UV lamp box.
4
3
1 2
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 76 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3 Put the UV lamp box housing aside.
4 Establish the UV lamp Adjustment
Refer to �Lamp house Alignment� on page 3-103.
4.7.4. Replacement of the Air Inlet AC Fan
The UV lamp box is provided with two air inlet AC fans.
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Unscrew the following screws:
1.1 2 x 4 screws of the fan grid (1).
1.2 4 screws of the 4 pin lamp power connector (2).
Operation Reference
Remove the UV lamp box Chapter3 §4.7.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Allen Key no.
Crosshead screwdriver
Description Code
1 2
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 77 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
1.3 Screws at the front (3) and rear (4) side of the UV lamp box cover.
2 Remove the reflector bracket from the cover as illustrated in the four steps below.
3 Replace the AC fan(s) by a new one.
Be careful with the electrical connections.
3 4
step 1 step 2
step 3 step 4
WARNING: Do not touch the reflector surface.
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 78 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4 Mount the reflector bracket back into the cover as illustrated in the five steps below.
4.1 First, slide the reflector bracket partly into the cover.
4.2 Mount the 4 pin power connector and tighten the screws.
4.3 Then pull the reflector bracket completely into the cover.
This to be sure not to touch the reflector surface.
step 1 step 2
step 3 step 4
step 5
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 79 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
5 Reassemble the AC fans and the grids as illustrated in the three steps below.
6 Mount the UV lamp box back into the UV lamp box housing.
Refer to �Replacement of the UV Lamp Box� on page 3-73.
4.7.5. Replacement of the Air Oulet DC Fan
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
4.7.6. Replacement of the Ignitor
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
Operation Reference
Remove the UV lamp box. Chapter3 §4.7.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Allen Key no.
Crosshead screwdriver
Description Code
Ignitor D2+
step 1 step 2
step 3
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 80 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
E. PROCEDURE
1 Remove the reflector bracket from the UV lamp box cover.
Refer to �Replacement of the Air Inlet AC Fan� on page 3-76, step 1 to 2.
2 Remove the old ignitor and replace by a new one as illustrated in the three steps below.
3 Mount the new ignitor to the reflector bracket.
4 Mount the reflector bracket back into the UV lamp box cover.
Refer to �Replacement of the Air Inlet AC Fan� on page 3-76, step 4 to 6.
4.7.7. Replacement of the UV Lamp
Refer to the chapter Preventive Maintenance, �Replacing the UV Lamps� on page 4-49 (chapter Preventive Maintenance).
NOTE: There are two ignitor types available. The way how to connect the electrical wires depends on the ignitor type. (See step 3 in the illustration below).
step 1 step 2
step 3
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 81 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.7.8. Replacement of the UV Lamp Shutter
Refer to the chapter Preventive Maintenance, �Replacing the Lamp Shutter� on page 4-52 (chapter Preventive Maintenance).
4.7.9. Replacement of the Thermistor
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
! Replacement of the thermistor mounted in the UV lamp box housing
1 Unscrew the cover (1).
2 Disconnect the electrical connections (2).
3 Unscrew the thermistor from the bracket (3).
4 Mount the new thermistor on the bracket.
5 Reconnect the electrical connectors.
6 Close the cover.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Open the front and left purge door to get full access to the UV lamp box.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Description Code
cross-slotted screwdriver
Description Code
110'C THERMISTOR D2+2509134
1 2 23
REPAIR AND SERVICE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
3 - 82 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
! Replacement of the thermistor mounted on the reflection cap of the UV lamp box
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
INSTALLING THE PCI I/O CARD REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 83 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
5. Installing the PCI I/O Card
5.1. Location
The PCI I/O card is located in the control box of the Home unit. The PCI I/O card is plugged into the PCI slot of the PC Main Board. The PCI I/O card is connected to the FPGA PCB
PCI I/O Card
PC Main Board
PC Main Board
PCI slot
FPGA PCB
REPAIR AND SERVICE INSTALLING THE PCI I/O CARD
3 - 84 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
5.2. Replacement of the PCI I/O Card
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
! Mechanical
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
! Driver Installation
1 Put the PCI card driver into CD ROM drive.
2 Select �Driver Installation�.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Open the ink supply door to get access to the main box right.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
PCI I/O card D2+2359062
INSTALLING THE PCI I/O CARD REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 85 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3 Select NuDAQ PCI.
4 Select PCI-7200.
5 Select WIN98/NT/2000/XP DLL DRIVER(PCIS-DASK) to start the installation.
REPAIR AND SERVICE INSTALLING THE PCI I/O CARD
3 - 86 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
6 After a short while, the Welcome screen is displayed:
7 Click Next.
The User Information screen is displayed:
Fill in the fields Name and Company.
8 Click next.
The Program directory selection screen is displayed:
Click the Browse button, if you want to modify the default program destination.
INSTALLING THE PCI I/O CARD REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 87 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
9 Click Next.
The next window show the setup type, where you are asked to set the type of setup you prefer.
10 Click Next.
A Summary screen is displayed:
This screen summarizes the settings you have entered. If you are not satisfied with them, click the Back button and repeat the previous steps.
11 Click Next.
After a while the installation is completed.
REPAIR AND SERVICE INSTALLING THE PCI I/O CARD
3 - 88 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
12 Select
The following screen appears:
Select �PCI 7200� card, and then select DI:1, DO:17000.
13 Click Apply (input completed).
14 Reboot the PC. (Driver installation completed)
15 Turn off the PC power and put the PCI card into the PCI slot of the PC Main Board.
16 Turn on the PC power, select auto driver setting click (it requires one minute).
17 Installation completed.
ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 89 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
6. Adjustment and Alignment Procedures
6.1. Vacuum Blower Adjustments
6.1.1. General Information
When mounting a new vacuum blower or when problems with the vacuum blower, check the following:
! vacuum blower setting,
! air relief valve setting.
6.1.2. Procedure
1 Adjust the vacuum blower settings according to the engine configuration, star connection (Europe) or delta connection (USA).
1.1 Remove the top cover of the box on top of the vacuum blower.
1.2 Check the contact bridges (star or delta) and adjust if necessary as illustrated below.
2 Adjust the air relief valve according to the engine configuration (50 Hz or 60 Hz).
2.1 Refer to the identification plate on top of the vacuum blower.
2.2 Check the rated current 3.8A (50Hz engine) or 6.7A (60Hz engine) on the identification plate.
REPAIR AND SERVICE ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
3 - 90 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2.3 Close the air inlet by holding a piece of foam in front of the inlet tube of a running blower.
2.4 Remove the cover of the air controller.
2.5 Check if the rotation direction of the vacuum pump corresponds with the arrow indication on the vacuum pump. If not, switch two phases (e.g. L1 and L2).
2.6 Measure the current around the vacuum blower�s power cable.
2.7 Adjust the spring tension, by turning the head screw, until you measure the rated current indicated on the identification plate.
If the spring is at its end position and you can still measure a current lower then the nominal current, screw the spring back approximately 5 turns until the current lowers, in order to have a little bit of spurious air for cooling.
NOTE: Turn the head screw clock wise to increase the current.
1 2
1 Vacuum blower 1 2 Vacuum blower 2
NOTE: Secure the fixing bolt into the nut.
ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 91 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
6.2. Print Head Adjustments
6.2.1. Adjusting the Head Base Temperature
6.2.1.1. General Information
The temperature of the head base plate can only be tuned by changing the head PCB voltage.
6.2.1.2. Procedure
To adjust the head base temperature:
1 Adjust the head PCB voltage of the head PCB by turning the blue VR temperature potentiometer clock wise (CW) or counter clock wise (CCW). The head PCB is positioned underneath the sub ink tank.
2 Turn CCW to lower the temperature. Note that a voltage of approximately 1.6 V can be seen as guidance and corresponds with a temperature of 32°C on most engine configurations.
The higher the voltage value, the lower the temperature value.
NOTE: Refer to �Head Base Temperature Control� on page 1-63 of the chapter Functional Description.
Head PCB
Cartridge PCBs
REPAIR AND SERVICE ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
3 - 92 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
6.2.2. Adjusting the Head Voltage
6.2.2.1. General Information
Each new print head is delivered with a sheet containing the spectra recommended voltage value of the manufacturer. If you have replaced a print head by a new one, you need to adjust the head voltage of the new print head.
6.2.2.2. Procedure
To adjust the head voltage of each print head:
1 Take out the sheet with the spectra recommended voltage value of the manufacturer delivered together with the new print head.
2 Adjust the head voltage of the head that has been replaced (e.g. Cyan) and calculate the corre-sponding Agfa voltage using the correction table below.
2.1 Fill in the recommended value (1), which you can find on the paper of the manufacturer (e.g. Magenta 92)
2.2 Multiply the value with the correction factor (2) for that color (e.g. Cyan 0.911702) to become the correct voltage (3) for the Anapurna head (e.g. 83.9).
Drive voltage Anapurna headsBlack Cyan Magenta Yellow Li. Cyan Li Mag. white 1 white 2
Spectra recommended voltage for Nova head : 92 92 93 92 90 91 94 92
Correction factor for Anapurna G1 at 35°C: 1 0,911702 0,9537634 0,98495 0,98418 1,034483Corrected voltages for Anapurna G1Inks: 92,0 83,9 88,7 90,6 88,6 94,1 0,0 0,0
1 2 3
ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 93 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3 Adjust the head voltage on the Cartridge PCB of that color (e.g. Cyan).
3.1 Measure the current voltage (4).
3.2 Adjust the head voltage (5) by turning CW or CCW.
! To decrease, turn clockwise.
! To increase, turn counterclockwise.
Cartridge PCB
5
6
6
REPAIR AND SERVICE ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
3 - 94 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
6.2.3. Hardware Alignment of the Print Head
6.2.3.1. General Information
For the hardware alignments of the print heads use:
! micro porous paper,
! print without UV-curing,
! use the rtl test file �Headslant_all_spotwhite� printed in 8-pass unidirectional.
Location rtl testfiles: C:\Anapurna\Reference\
6.2.3.2. Procedure
Execute the following two hardware corrections:
! Slant correction
! Front/back correction
! Slant correction
The print head is skewed in the hole. Adjust by means of the eccentric nut (1) at the front side of the print head.
NOTE: Except for pre-white
1
ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 95 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
! Front/back correction
The print head is positioned too far to the front or the back. Adjust by means of the screw at the back side of the print head.
6.2.4. Software Alignment of the Print Head
6.2.4.1. General Information
When you notice a timing delay in jetting the colors (=head delay to map other heads onto black) you need to adjust the head alignment settings for each head, in reference to the black head.
For the software alignments of the print heads it is recommended to use:
! micro porous paper,
! print without UV-curing,
! use the rtl test file �Headslant_all_spotwhite� printed in 8-pass unidirectional.
Location rtl testfiles: C:\Anapurna\Reference\
6.2.4.2. Procedure
To execute an electronic calibration for every color, proceed as follows:
1 In the Control Program, click Setup.
The Setup Parameters window appears.
2 In the Setup Parameters window, click Factory Set (3).
3 Enter the password (4) and click OK.
The Factory Data Setting window appears.
3
4
REPAIR AND SERVICE ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
3 - 96 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4 Change the Head Offset values (e.g. K CY)
4.1 If CY has to move to the right: decrease the current value.
4.2 If CY has to move to the left: increase the current value.
5 After changing the values, Click Save.
The Setup Parameters window appears.
6 Click Save As and create a new .dat file, or overwrite the old one.
6.2.5. Media Feed Correction
For a brief description, refer to �Step Size (Media Feed)� on page 1-82 (chapter Functional Descrip-tion). For a detailed description, refer to the Operator Manual.
6.2.6. Bidir Adjustments
For a brief description, refer to �Bi-Dir Alignment� on page 1-82 (chapter Functional Description). For a detailed description, refer to the Operator Manual.
6.2.7. Alignment of the Pre-White Head
The alignment of the pre-white head occurs almost identical as for the other print heads. The main differences are:
! use the rtl test file �Headslant_all_prewhite� printed in 8-pass unidirectional.
! the front/back alignment can only be done after the media feed correction.
f
ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 97 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
6.3. Conveyer Belt Alignment
It is very important to have a perfect aligned conveyer belt. The belt should have a linear movement and there should be no side deviations.
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
None
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
1 Loosen the tension on the belt:
1.1 Remove the metal black cover on the left and right rear side.
1.2 Completely unscrew the left and right tension bolt (rotate CCW) to loosen the tension.
2 Position the conveyer belt
2.1 Move the conveyer belt until the belt�s joint is positioned in the middle at the underside of the printing table.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
NOTE: In case you have mounted a new conveyer belt, skip step 1.
REPAIR AND SERVICE ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
3 - 98 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2.2 Go to the rear side of the print engine and measure the distance from the left/right side of the printing table to the conveyer belt. Do the same at the front side of the print engine. This measured distance should be equal, on front side as well as on rear side of the engine.
3 Tighten the conveyer belt.
Alternately tighten the left and right tension bold. Only tighten maximal one complete turn a time.
4 Execute a transport test.
4.1 Mark the position of the belt regard to the printing table.
4.2 Move the conveyer belt for at least 10 minutes.
4.3 Mark the position of the belt regard to the printing table and measure the difference regard to the measurement before moving the conveyer belt.
5 Eliminate the measured difference by adjusting the belt tension.
5.1 Loosen the conveyer belt completely.
5.2 Reposition the conveyer belt and use the same marking technique as in step 2 and 4.
5.3 Tighten the conveyer belt taking the measured difference into consideration.t
6 Execute a transport test:
6.1 Move the conveyer belt for at least 10 minutes.
6.2 Check the markings on the conveyer belt and printing table.
Measured distance < 0,5 cm Measured distance > 0,5 cm
increase the tension with the same amount on the side where the belt was moving to.
increase the tension with half of the measured differ-ence on the side where the belt was moving to.
reduce the tension with half of the measured differ-ence on the side where the belt was moving from.
ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 99 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
6.3 If necessary, adjust the position of the belt.
Rotate the left and/or right tension bolt CW or CCW to control the tension while the conveyer belt is moving.
6.4. Head Base Alignment
6.4.1. Aligning the Head Base Plate
To achieve a good printing quality, you need to adjust the head base plate parallelism within the specifications. The maximum tolerances between left/right, front/back is < 0.5 mm.
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
None
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
! Preceding measurements
1 Measure the distance between the head carriage unit and the print table with Messkeil kon 1:10 ruler.
2 Measure the gap between the head base plate and print table using a rigid (2mm Dibond plate) as reference on top of the vacuum table.
3 Execute the head gap control.
The distance between the dibond plate and base plate is around 5 mm.
Refer to �Executing a head gap control� on page 1-84 (chapter Functional Description).
4 Push one of the emergency buttons to cut off the power.
5 Disconnect the connector between the carriage servo motor and carriage servo driver.
NOTE: The position of the belt should not move more than 2 mm.
NOTE: The position of the conveyer belt can still move slightly during daily production. Those small shifts can be removed by rotating the left and/or right tension bolt CW or CCW. For more information, refer to �Inspecting and Adjusting the Conveyer Belt Tension� on page 4-7of the Preventive Maintenance chapter.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician
Description Code
REPAIR AND SERVICE ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
3 - 100 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
As a result, the head carriage unit can be moved easily by hand.
6 Lower the head carriage unit using the manual head height setting knob until the gap between dibond plate and base plate is around 2mm.
Refer to �Manual head height setting knob� on page 1-58 (chapter Functional Description).
6.1 Measure the gap left right, front back.
6.2 Check if the max deviation of the four measurements is within tolerance. (maximum devia-tion is <0.5mm).
6.3 If the parallelism of the base plate is out of tolerance an adjustment of the base plate is advisable.
7 Reconnect the connector between the carriage servo motor and servo carriage driver.
! Head base Front/Back alignment control.
The front back deviation can be adjusted by the reference screw as showed in the picture below.
Figure 3.1: Side view of the head carriage unit + top view head base plate
1 Locate the right-hand mounting hook (3).
2 Loosen the 2 fixing screws (2) of mounting hook (3).
3 Adjust the parallelism within tolerance by using the top screw (1).
4 Fasten the fixing screws again (2).
5 Repeat step 2 to 4 for the left-hand mounting hook (4).
6 Check if the tolerances are within the tolerances. Repeat if necessary.
1
122
Base plate
Print table
Base plate
3
4
ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 101 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
! Head base Left-right alignment control.
The evenness of the head carriage unit left right can adjusted by moving the position of the guiding blocks (LM block).
Figure 3.2: Head Base alignment Left-Right
1 Execute the head gap control partly.
Click OK and the head carriage unit will move above the print table
Refer to �Executing a head gap control� on page 1-84 (chapter Functional Description).
2 Push one of the emergency buttons to cut off the power.
3 On top of the fixed back panel of the head carriage unit you will find 2 reference blocks (1),this are the zero points.This is the reference to adjust the head carriage unit and is set in the factory.
Reference Blocks
Jig
Head base back panel
22
3
11
NOTE: Never loose the bolts of the reference blocks.
REPAIR AND SERVICE ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
3 - 102 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4 To check the evenness of the head carriage unit use the 2 jigs (2) which are delivered with the engine as showed in the Figure 3.2.
5 Place the jigs on top of the back panel and the reference blocks using the manual head height setting knob.
6 If there is a difference release the adjustment screws (3) marked green as showed in the Figure 3.2.
7 Once an adjustment is done, put the jigs back in to see whether the position of the back plate is the same left to right.
8 Tighten the adjustment bolts if the back plate is leveled against the zero points.
9 Double check the level of the base plate by measuring the gap between base plate and print table.
1
ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES REPAIR AND SERVICE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 3 - 103 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
6.5. Lamp house Alignment
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
! Lamp house Left-Right alignment control.
For Left-Right alignment, adjust 2 screws.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician
Description Code
1 2Left alignment Right alignment
REPAIR AND SERVICE ADJUSTMENT AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
3 - 104 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
! Lamp house Top-Left tilt alignment control.
For Top-Down alignment, there is a fixed bolt and one screw that can be adjusted.
3
4
CHAPTER
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 1:Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4 Preventive Maintenance
This chapter describes the preventive maintenance procedures for the Anapurna L/XL.
1. Maintenance Schedule ........................................................................................................................................ 4 - 22. Print Media Unit Maintenance .......................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
2.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction ..................................................................................... 4 - 52.2. Conveyer Belt ............................................................................................................................................ 4 - 62.3. Vacuum Holes ............................................................................................................................................ 4 - 92.4. LM Guide .................................................................................................................................................. 4 - 102.5. LM Blocks ................................................................................................................................................. 4 - 112.6. Carriage Belt (S5M Belt) ..................................................................................................................... 4 - 132.7. S3M Belt ................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 162.8. Linear Scale Encoder ............................................................................................................................ 4 - 242.9. Bearings Print Media Unit .................................................................................................................. 4 - 332.10. Waste Tank ............................................................................................................................................ 4 - 35
3. Head Carriage Unit Maintenance .................................................................................................................. 4 - 363.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction .................................................................................. 4 - 363.2. Print Head ................................................................................................................................................. 4 - 383.3. UV Lamp Box / UV Lamp Box Housing ......................................................................................... 4 - 463.4. Head Carriage ......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 53
4. Refill Unit Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 4 - 544.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction .................................................................................. 4 - 544.2. Air filter 6 Color and White ............................................................................................................... 4 - 554.3. Ink Filter .................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 56
5. Purge Unit Maintenance ................................................................................................................................... 4 - 635.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction .................................................................................. 4 - 635.2. Purge box .................................................................................................................................................. 4 - 63
6. Home Unit Maintenance .................................................................................................................................. 4 - 656.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction .................................................................................. 4 - 656.2. Home box ................................................................................................................................................. 4 - 65
7. Safety Circuit ......................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 677.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction .................................................................................. 4 - 677.2. Emergency Stop Circuit ....................................................................................................................... 4 - 67
8. Air Tank Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 4 - 698.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction .................................................................................. 4 - 698.2. Air Tank ..................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 69
9. Air Pressure Panel Maintenance .................................................................................................................... 4 - 709.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction .................................................................................. 4 - 709.2. Air Pressure Panel ................................................................................................................................. 4 - 70
10. Engine ................................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 7510.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction ............................................................................... 4 - 7510.2. Engine Level ......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 75
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
4 - 2 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
1. Maintenance Schedule
Unit Component Frequency Activity Required ToolsSpare Part Name
Spare Part Order Code
Operator/Service Engineer
See ...
Head Carriage unit
Print head Daily Clean lint-free cloth Operator 4 §3.2.1.
Print head Daily Nozzle Check and purge or clean the failed heads if necessary
Operator 4 §3.2.1.
Print head Weekly Clean Cleaning solution 4 §3.2.1.
Crystal Glass plate
(UV lamp box housing left and right)
1 Month Inspect and clean if necessary
lint-free cloth with isopropyl alcohol (IPA)
Crystal Plate (190)(8C)
D2+2509166 Operator 4 §3.3.1.
Print Head / UV lamp box
1 Month Check for printing and curing quality
print outs 4 §3.3.2.
Print Head / UV lamp box
3 Month Check for printing and curing quality and replace both UV lamp if neces-sary
lamp 190 mm D2+2509221 4 §3.3.2.4 §3.3.3.
UV lamp
(UV lamp box; left and right)
6 Month Replace Lamp 190 mm D2+2509221 Operator 4 §3.3.3.
Lamp Shutter 1 Year Inspect shutter functionality and replace if mal-functioning
SHUTTER (190 LAMP)(8C)
D2+2359234 4 §3.3.4.
4 §3.3.5.
LM guide
(Head Carriage)
1 Month Inspect and clean if necessary
Acetone Operator 4 §2.4.1.
LM blocks
(Head Carriage)
6 Month Grease AFB lubricating grease
4 §2.5.1.
Head PCB
(Head Carriage)
1 Year Inspect the head voltage
4 §3.4.2.(3 §6.2.2.)
Head base plate
(Head Carriage)
1 Year Inspect the head base plate paral-lelism
4 §3.4.3.(3 §6.4.1.)
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 3 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
Print Media unit
LM guide
(Frame Assembly - Box Beam)
1 Month Inspect and clean if necessary
Acetone Operator 4 §2.4.1.
LM blocks
(Frame Assembly - Box Beam)
6 Month Grease AFB lubricating grease
4 §2.5.1.
Linear scale encoder
(Frame Assembly - Box Beam)
1 Month Inspect and clean if necessary
Acetone or iso-propyl alcohol (IPA)
Operator 4 §2.8.1.
S5M belt(15 mm)
(= carriage belt)
Inspect the ten-sion and re ten-sion if necessary
4 §2.6.1.
6 Month Replace S5M BELT (15mm), grey
D2+2959029 4 §2.6.2.
S3M belt(564 mm)
6 Month Inspect the posi-tion and re posi-tion if necessary
4 §2.7.1.
1 Year Replace S3M BELT (564mm), black
D2+2959024 4 §2.7.2.
Bearing UFL004
(Double Pulley Assembly)
6 Month Inspect and grease
Bearing UFL004
D2+2509194 4 §2.9.1.
Idle pulley bearing
(Idle Pulley Assem-bly)
6 Month Inspect and grease
4 §2.9.1.
Tension Roll Bearings 6 Month Grease 4 §2.9.1.
Bearings Rigid Table 6 Month Grease 4 §2.9.1.
Bearing UFL diame-ter 40
(Frame Assembly)
6 Month Inspect and grease
4 §2.9.1.
Conveyer belt Weekly Clean, inspect and re tension if necessary
Operator 4 §2.2.1.
1 Month Inspect the posi-tion and adjust if necessary
Operator 4 §2.2.2.
6 Month Replace Conveyer belt XLConveyer belt L
D2+2503014
D2+2503015
4 §2.2.3. (3 §4.2.2.)
4 §2.2.4.(3 §6.3.)
Vacuum holes 6 Month Inspect vacuum holes and clean if necessary
4 §2.3.1.
Waste tank Weekly Inspect and empty if neces-sary
4 §2.10.1.
Unit Component Frequency Activity Required ToolsSpare Part Name
Spare Part Order Code
Operator/Service Engineer
See ...
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
4 - 4 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
Print Media unit
Media thickness sen-sor
6 Month Inspect the func-tionality
6 Month Grease assy
Refill unit
Air filter (6C)Air filter (W)
Daily Inspect for any moisture and replace if neces-sary
4 §4.2.1.
Ink Filter 6 Month Bleed ink filters 4 §4.3.1.
1 Year Replace if neces-sary
Ink filter D2+2509004 4 §4.3.3.
Purge unit
Grid
(Ink fixing upholder #1 and #2)
Weekly Inspect and clean if necessary
Filling knife or screw driver.Solution.
Operator 4 §5.2.1.
Ink receiving bin
(Purge fixing upholder #3)
1 Year Inspect waste barrel and pierce hole. Clean if nec-essary
Filling knife or screw driver
Operator 4 §5.2.2.
Home unit
Grid
(Ink fixing upholder #1 and #2)
Weekly Inspect and clean if necessary
Filling knife or screw driver.Solution.
Operator 4 §6.2.1.
Air tank Air tank 6 Month Drain 4 §8.2.1.
Air pressure panel
Air filter 6 Month Drain Air filter AF20-01BG
4 §9.2.1.
1 Year Replace Air filter AF20-01BG
D2+2509015 4 §9.2.2.
Safety circuit
Emergency Stops 1 Year Inspect all four emergency stops
4 §7.2.1.
Door Open Sensor Inspect the func-tionality
Door sensor (Front/Rear)
D2+2509239
Door sensor controller (PA10-U)
D2+2509238
Engine Spirit level 1 Year Inspect and level again if necessary
Nut wrench no. 36
4 §10.2.1.
Covers and lockers
Unit Component Frequency Activity Required ToolsSpare Part Name
Spare Part Order Code
Operator/Service Engineer
See ...
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 5 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2. Print Media Unit Maintenance
2.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction
! Handling UV Curable ink
! UV radiation
Ultraviolet radiation (UV) has a high photon energy range and is particularly hazardous because there are usually no immediate symptoms of excessive exposure.
Always wear UV protective (tinted) glasses while working with an open front cover or while working on the head carriage.
! Maintenance safety instructions
WARNING: Be aware of the waste disposal and regulations that bear on UV curable ink. Always follow the instructions on the label of the ink cartridge.
WARNING: UV light can cause harmful damage to eyes and skin. Therefore never look into UV light without wearing protective glasses. Never exposure your skin to UV light.
WARNING: Do not touch the print head during printing or maintenance actions. Do not place any obstacle on the print table which can hinder the head carriage during movement.
CAUTION: Regular inspecting and cleaning of the Anapurna L/XL is required to help to prevent machine damage and printing difficulties.
CAUTION: Do not move the Anapurna L/XL while printing.
CAUTION: The print table is not to be used as a worktable. Never lean on the printer and do not place anything on the printer.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 6 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2.2. Conveyer Belt
2.2.1. Cleaning the Conveyer Belt
When you have printed onto the Conveyor belt, remove the ink as soon as possible.
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
None
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Remove the ink using a cloth moistened with cleaning solution.
2 Check the proper functioning of the two vacuum zones.
Test the two vacuum zones by using the vacuum switch/button located at the home unit (respec-tively front/rear) and in the meantime verify the correct functioning of the white tower lamp and measure the PLC outputs P041, P042 and P048. For more information refer to �Vacuum Plate Usage� on page 1-31 (chapter Functional Description).
3 If cleaning does not result in a proper vacuum functioning you need either to:
! clean the vacuum holes.For more information about cleaning the vacuum holes, refer to �Inspecting and Cleaning the Vacuum Holes� on page 4-9.
or
! replace the conveyer belt.For more information about replacing the conveyer belt, refer to �Replacement of the Conveyer Belt� on page 3-13 of the chapter Repair and Service.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Operator 1
Description Code
Cleaning solution
Cleaning cloth
NOTE: When the belt is completely printed, vacuum can become insufficient.
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 7 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.2.2. Inspecting and Adjusting the Conveyer Belt Tension
The belt should have a linear movement and there should be no side deviations.
The position of the conveyer belt can move slightly during daily production. Those small shifts can be removed by controlling the conveyer belt tension.
For huge shifts it is recommended to execute a conveyer belt alignment. For more information, refer to �Conveyer Belt Alignment� on page 3-97 of the Repair and Service chapter.
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
1 Do the following two checks:
1 Manually check the tension of the belt.
2 Check if the belt is touching the left and right guide narrowly.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Operator 1
Description Code
Allen Key no. 12
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 8 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2 If the belt tension is sufficiently and the belt is touching the left and right side narrowly, adjust-ments are not necessary.
3 In case of a too low belt tension or a belt bending near the left and/or right guide, adjust the belt tensioning. Proceed with step 4.
4 Remove the metal black cover on the left and right rear side.
5 Rotate the left and/or right tension bolt CW or CCW to adjust the tension (that implies adjusting the position).
6 Proceed with step 1.
7 Replace the black metal cover.
2.2.3. Replacing the Conveyer Belt
Refer to �Replacement of the Conveyer Belt� on page 3-13 (chapter Repair and Service).
2.2.4. Aligning the Conveyer Belt
Refer to �Conveyer Belt Alignment� on page 3-97 (chapter Repair and Service).
NOTE: These small adjustments can be done while the conveyer belt is moving.
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 9 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.3. Vacuum Holes
2.3.1. Inspecting and Cleaning the Vacuum Holes
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
None
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
1 Remove the conveyer belt.
Refer to �Replacement of the Conveyer Belt� on page 3-13, step 1 to 3 (chapter Repair and Service).
2 Puncture all holes of the vacuum table using a syringe needle.
This to open the points where the vacuum holes interfere with the honeycomb structure inside the table.
3 Fit the old conveyer belt.
Refer to �Replacement of the Conveyer Belt� on page 3-13, step 3 to 8 (chapter Repair and Service).
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1 20� 20�
Description Code
Syringe needle
CAUTION: Do not use a drill to puncture the holes.
NOTE: Refitting the old belt is not always possible.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 10 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2.4. LM Guide
The head carriage unit can move in two directions:
! Horizontal movement
from purge to home position and vice versa along 2 LM guides, also know as carriage rail.
! Vertical movement
head lifting along the along 2 LM guides (head lifting type).
2.4.1. Inspecting and Cleaning the LM Guide
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Visually check the condition of the LM guide.
2 Move the head carriage several times from the purge side to the home side and verify whether the movement occurs smoothly (Mind the sound).
3 If necessary clean the LM guides and grease the LM blocks.
Cleaning means removing dust and removing accumulated grease with acetone.
1
2
3
4
1 Upper LM guide 3 Lower LM guide2 Linear scale (Encoder strip) 4 S3M belt, carriage belt
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Operator 1
Description Code
Acetone
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 11 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.5. LM Blocks
There are 4 LM blocks at the back side of the head carriage unit, which guide the head carriage unit along the upper and lower LM guide.
Greasing the LM blocks should be done regularly, in particular every 6 Months or depending on the operating conditions. Insufficient grease causes noise sounds of the head carriage unit, printing quality deterioration, and can reduce the Anapurna�s life expectancy.
2.5.1. Greasing the LM Blocks
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1 10� 10�
Description Code
Spray gun MG70
Description Code
AFB lubricating grease
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 12 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
E. PROCEDURE
1 Open the purge top and rear door.
2 Open the head cover door of the head carriage unit to get access to the top side of the head carriage unit.
3 Locate the greasing nipples of the 4 LM blocks.
4 Grease each LM block.
4.1 Insert the spray gun into the grease nipple.
4.2 Carefully spray approximately 10-30 ml.
CAUTION: An overdose of grease can contaminate the printing conditions.
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 13 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.6. Carriage Belt (S5M Belt)
2.6.1. Inspecting the Carriage Belt (S5M)
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
1 Manually inspect the tension of the carriage belt (no belt sag?) (1) and re tension if necessary.
1.1 Open the purge left side door to get access to the idle pulley assembly.
1.2 Tighten the two socket screws (2) to re tension the carriage belt (1).
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
1
2
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 14 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2 Inspect the position of the carriage belt.
2.1 Open the home right side door to get access to the double pulley assembly.
2.2 Remove the double pulley protection cover (3) by unscrewing 5 screws.
2.3 Inspect the position of the carriage belt (4) on the double pulley.
2.4 If the carriage belt is not centered, align the carriage belt by adjusting the 2 lateral bearing height adjusting blocks (5) as illustrated in the figure below.
2.5 Replace and fix the double pulley protection cover.
3 Inspect the state (worn out?) of the carriage belt and replace if necessary.
Refer to �Replacing the Carriage Belt (S5M)� on page 4-15.
3
45 5
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 15 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.6.2. Replacing the Carriage Belt (S5M)
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1 60� 60�
Description Code
S5M Belt (15 mm), grey D2+2959029
Bearing
Idle pulley
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 16 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2.7. S3M Belt
2.7.1. Inspecting the Position of the S3M Belt
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
None
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
1 Open the home right side door to get access to the double pulley assembly.
2 Remove the double pulley protection cover (1) by unscrewing 5 screws.
3 Inspect the position of the S3M belt on the double pulley.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician
Description Code
Jig
1
2 3
2 S3M belt not centred 3 S3M belt centred
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 17 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4 If the S3M belt is not centered, align the S3M belt as follows:
4.1 Take out the jig.
4.2 Insert the jig as illustrated in the figure below.
4.3 Adjust the position of the 2 bottom bearing height adjusting blocks (4) until the wing of the motor pulley (5) touches the lower panel of the jig (5).
5 Replace and fix the double pulley protection cover.
44
5
6
NOTE: The tension of the S3M belt is determined by the distance between the double pulley and the motor pulley
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 18 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2.7.2. Replacing the S3M Belt
When this belt wears out, it looses its teeth, parts as well as complete teeth. Discontinuity of the teeth results in noisy movements of the head carriage unit.
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician
S3M belt
Bearing ULF004
Double pulley
Carriage servo motor
S5M belt
Motor pulley
Bearing height adjusting block
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 19 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Open the home right side door and the home rear door to get access to the double pulley assembly.
2 Remove the double pulley protection cover (1) by unscrewing 5 screws.
3 Disconnect the two connectors of the carriage servo motor (2)
4 Remove the carriage servo motor (3) by unscrewing the 4 socket-head screws (4).
Description Code
S3M Belt (564 mm), black D2+2959024
1
2
3
4
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 20 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
5 Remove the double pulley fixing support (5).
6 Loosen the ULF004 bearing at carriage servo motor side
6.1 First remove the ring (6) using an Allen Key.
6.2 Loosen the ULF bearing (7) by removing the 2 socket-head screws (8).
7 Remove the ring (9) of the ULF Bearing at the opposite side.
5
6 6 8 7
9
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 21 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
8 Loosen 2 screw bolt (10) of the 2 bearing height adjusting blocks (11) at carriage servo motor side and remove the ULF004 bearing (12).
9 Remove the old S3M belt (13).
10 11 121011
13
NOTE: For convenience's sake, you can loosen the tension of the carriage belt (S5M) (14) by unscrewing the 2 socket screws (15) of the idle pulley assembly (purge side).
14 1515
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 22 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
10 Insert (wriggle) the new S3M belt along the right double pulley fixing bracket (16).
11 Remount the ULF004 bearing (17) and the ring (18) at carriage servo motor side.
12 Remount the ring (19) of the ULF Bearing at the opposite side.
16
17 18
19
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 23 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
13 Remount the double pulley fixing support (20).
14 Remount the carriage driver motor (21) using the 4 socket-head screws.
15 Finally, establish the following two belt alignments:
! Aligning the S3M belt.Refer to �Inspecting the Position of the S3M Belt� on page 4-16.
! Aligning the S5M belt.Refer to �Inspecting the Carriage Belt (S5M)� on page 4-13, step 2.
20
21
NOTE: If you have loosen the tension of the carriage belt (S5M) in step 9, re tension the carriage belt. Refer to �Inspecting the Carriage Belt (S5M)� on page 4-13, step 1.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 24 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2.8. Linear Scale Encoder
2.8.1. Inspecting and Cleaning the Encoder Strip
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
None
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Visually inspect the linear scale (encoder strip) for dust and grease.
2 Clean the linear scale using a cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol to remove grease and dust. When stained, clean with acetone.
3 Execute the Encoder Test (Enc. Count Test in Test Menu window).
Refer to the procedure �Encoder Checking� on page 4-25, step 1 and 2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Operator 1
Description Code
Isopropyl alcohol
Acetone
1
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 25 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.8.2. Encoder Checking
An encoder check is required in the following circumstances:
! the head carriage unit is not moving,
! the head carriage unit is not moving smoothly,
! the position of the head carriage unit is shifting.
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
None
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
1 In the Control Program, click Test.
The Test Menu window appears.
2 In the Test Menu window, select Enc. Count Test (1) and click Test (2).
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 2
2
1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 26 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
The Encoder Test window appears.
! If the encoder reads the linear scale normally, the head carriage repeatedly moves from left to right. Proceed with step 6.
! If the encoder cannot read correctly, the error message �encoder failed� is displayed on the window pane. Proceed with step 3.
3 Check the encoder parameters.
3.1 In the Control Program, click Setup.
The Setup Parameters window appears.
3.2 In the Setup Parameters window, click Factory Set (3).
3.3 Enter the password (4) and click OK.
The Factory Data Setting window appears.
3.4 Note down the following regulated values submitted by the manufacturer when the machine is shipped out.
Max. Platen Size (5), Home Pos.Offset (6), Max. Mark Count (7) and Carriage Gear Ratio (8).
3
4
NOTE: The default set value for the Carriage Gear Ratio (8) is always 7742.
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 27 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4 Execute a field-test to determine the Max. Platen Size (5), Home Pos.Offset (6) and Max. Mark Count (7) values.
This field-test involves three tests to be executed one after another:
4.1 Manually determine the number of marks (Max. Mark Count value) on the linear scale.
Refer to �Determining the number of marks on the linear scale� on page 4-28.
4.2 Define the Home Pos.Offset value.
Refer to �Defining the Home Position Offset� on page 4-29.
4.3 Test the number of pulses the encoder reader counts.
Refer to �Testing the number of pulses the encoder reader counts� on page 4-30.
5 If necessary, adjust the values Max. Platen Size (5), Home Pos.Offset (6), Max. Mark Count (7) in the Factory Data Setting window.
6 In the Control Program, click Test and select Jet Test to check the condition of the nozzle.
Refer to �Nozzle Check� on page 4-40.
7 Print a sample and check the printing quality.
8 Clean the linear scale with acetone.
Refer to �Inspecting and Cleaning the Encoder Strip� on page 4-24.
5
7
8
6
NOTE: When you change one of the three parameters, do not forget to download the parameters to validate the new values. See option Parameter Download in the Test Menu window. For more information about downloading parameters, refer to �Parameter Download� on page 1-89 (chapter Functional Description).
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 28 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
! Determining the number of marks on the linear scale
Definition Max. Mark Count: The markers counted (read by the encoder) from the home position (front right side) to the purge position (front left side).
To count the total number of marks the encoder passes between home and purge, proceed as follows:
1 In the Control Program, click Test.
The Test Menu window appears.
2 In the Test Menu window, select Carriage Release Test (1) and click Test (2).
As a result, the head carriage unit can be moved manually from home side to purge side.
3 First, push the head carriage unit to the limit switch (3), located in the home unit.
4 Secondly, slowly push the head carriage unit to the purge side (left) until you encounter the first MARK. Note this mark as the first mark.
5 Then, manually move the head carriage unit towards the purge side (left), while counting the number of MARKs the head carriage unit passes during the movement.
Stop pushing the head carriage unit just before the head carriage unit touches the purge shock absorber.
2
1
3
NOTE: MARK = 1 thick stripe every 50 mm.
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 29 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
The last MARK the head carriage unit passes, is noted as last MARK.
6 Note down the total number of MARKs counted (= Max. Mark Count).
! Defining the Home Position Offset
Definition Home Pos. Offset: Distance between detecting the home position and the real home position.
To define the home position offset, proceed as follows:
1 Execute a Carriage Release Test.
For more information on how to execute a Carriage Release Test, refer to �Determining the number of marks on the linear scale� on page 4-28, step 1 and 2.
2 First, push the head carriage unit to the limit switch (1), located in the home unit (= Detected home position).
3 Secondly, slowly push the head carriage unit towards the purge side and stop the head carriage unit just before you can see the first MARK (= real home position).
4 Measure the distance the head carriage unit has travelled between those 2 positions (step 2 and step 3).
5 Calculate the home position offset.
Home Pos. Offset = measured distance in mm (step 4) x 154 and round down to the nearest 1000 (thousands).
6 Execute the following verification test to determine whether you need to fine-tune the calculated Home Pos. Offset of step 5.
6.1 Fill in the calculated Home Pos. Offset value in the Factory Data Setting window.
6.2 Execute a parameter download.
In the Control Program, click Test to open the Test Menu window. In the Test Menu window, select Parameter Download and click Test.
NOTE: Make sure that the head carriage unit is in home position (front right side)
1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 30 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
6.3 Verify whether the center of the encoder reader stops just before the MARK.
Execute a carriage release, move the head carriage unit by means of the double pulley (2) (gear of black S3M belt) while checking the MARK LED at the MAIN PCB. The MARK LED lights up when the encoder passes the MARK on the encoder scale.
! Testing the number of pulses the encoder reader counts
1 In the Control Program, click Setup.
2 In the Setup Parameter window, set the carriage speed (1) to 100 and click Save.
Do not select one of the pre-defined carriage speed values (2).
3 Execute a parameter download.
In the Control Program, click Test to open the Test Menu window. In the Test Menu window, select Parameter Download and click Test.
4 Prepare the head carriage unit for moving to purge position.
2
1 2
12
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 31 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.1 In the Control Program, click Purge (1).
4.2 The message "Carriage Clear to Move..?" appears.
4.3 Hold your PC mouse on the Yes button.
5 Press the Enter key on your keyboard and count how many times the MARK LED (5) flashes at the Main PCB (3) while the head carriage unit is moving towards the purge side.
6 Count how many times the MARK LED (5) flashes at the Main PCB (3) while the head carriage unit is moving from home to purge.
The number of counted pulses should be the same as from purge to home (see step 5). If not the encoder head is slanting or the distance encoder head/encoder scale is incorrect. Adjust the depth between the encoder head and the encoder scale. See d.
7 Finally, execute the encoder test (Enc. Count Test in the Test Menu window) at low carriage speed (6) and afterwards at normal carriage speed (7). Normally there should be no error message and the ENC and Mark LED at the MAIN PCB are flashing.
3
4 5
3 Main PCB 5 Mark LED
4 ENC LED (Encoder)
NOTE: The number of pulses should be the same as the value filled in the Max. Mark Count field in the Factory Data Setting window.
6 7
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 32 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
! Adjusting the depth between encoder head an linear scale
1 In the Control Program, click Head Lift Up.
2 Move the head carriage to home position.
3 Place the plastic 0.5 mm gap gauge between the encoder head (1) and the linear scale (2)
4 Adjust the distance between the encoder head (1) and the linear scale (2) by unscrewing/screwing the two bolts on top of the encoder bracket (3).
5 Make sure that you can remove the plastic 0.5 mm gap gauge.
When the distance is OK, there will be no error message while executing the encoder test (Enc. Count Test in the Test Menu window).
1 3 42
1 Encoder 3 Encoder bracket (view: home right side door side)
2 Linear scale (encoder strip) 4 Encoder bracket (view: purge top door)
NOTE: If you are not able to reach the two bolts when the head carriage is in the home position, execute the procedure at the purge position, where you can easily reach the two bolts of the encoder bracket (4) via the purge top door.
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 33 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.9. Bearings Print Media Unit
2.9.1. Greasing the Bearings of the Print Media Unit
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
None
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Lubricate the following bearings of the double pulley assembly:
1.1 Two UFL004 bearings (1).
1.2 Four bearing height adjusting blocks (2),
2 Lubricate the idle pulley bearing (3).
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
AFB lubricating grease in a squeeze bottle
21 222 1
3
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 34 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3 Lubricate the 2 bearings ULF diameter 40 (4), located behind the shaft cover (5).
4 Lubricate the tension roll-pipe bearings.
5 Lubricate the bearings of the rigid table.
4
5
PRINT MEDIA UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 35 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.10. Waste Tank
2.10.1. Inspecting and Emptying the Waste Tank
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
None
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Inspect the following connections:
Drain hose (thick), venturi hose (thin) and full detection sensor connector (2-pin) which is located in the cable trunk.
2 Place a black snap-on lid Polyethylene container underneath the waste tank.
3 Open the drain cock underneath the waste tank to empty the waste tank.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Operator 1
Description Code
Snap-on lid Black Polyethylene Containers.
WARNING: Be aware of the waste disposal and regulations that bear on UV curable ink.
NOTE: The full detection sensor is activated when the contents of the waste tank reaches 3.5 litre. The signal P01 on the PLC, illuminates when the waste tank is full (3.5 litre).
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 36 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3. Head Carriage Unit Maintenance
3.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction
! Handling UV Curable ink
! UV radiation
Ultraviolet radiation (UV) has a high photon energy range and is particularly hazardous because there are usually no immediate symptoms of excessive exposure.
Always wear UV protective (tinted) glasses while working with an open front cover or while working on the head carriage.
! Maintenance safety instructions
WARNING: Consult the appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) before handling UV curable ink.
WARNING: UV ink contains some chemicals harmful to eyes and skin. Always wear safety gloves when handling UV ink. In case of accidental contact, rinse immediately with plenty of water and consult a doctor, if required.
WARNING: UV ink contains chemicals harmful to eyes and skin. 1. Always wear splash-resistant nitril safety gloves when handling UV ink. (Only safety gloves for single use are allowed). 2. Always wear protective glasses when refilling or changing the ink. 3. Avoid inhalation of the ink.
WARNING: Be aware of the waste disposal and regulations that bear on UV curable ink. Always follow the instructions on the label of the ink cartridge.
WARNING: UV light can cause harmful damage to eyes and skin. Therefore never look into UV light without wearing protective glasses. Never exposure your skin to UV light.
WARNING: Do not touch the print head during printing or maintenance actions. Do not place any obstacle on the print table which can hinder the head carriage during movement.
CAUTION: Regular inspecting and cleaning of the Anapurna L/XL is required to help to prevent machine damage and printing difficulties.
CAUTION: Do not move the Anapurna L/XL while printing.
CAUTION: The print table is not to be used as a worktable. Never lean on the printer and do not place anything on the printer.
HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 37 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
NOTE: At the end of the day, and when you stop printing, the head carriage unit needs to be placed in the purge position. For overnight or longer standstill times, the grid underneath the head carriage unit must be pushed to the back.
NOTE: A default "Weeping" time is set in the engine software to keep the heads open, this small amount of ink is collected in the underneath waste box, which leads to a waste tank underneath the engine.
NOTE: Place some towels in front of the purge grid, this will help to keep the area clean, it is advisable to replace them weekly
NOTE: The purge grid must be placed forward again when you start to print.It prevents the ink in the underneath waste box from getting cured by the UV lamps during the printing stage. It also prevents the UV lamps from curing the ink onto the heads.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 38 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3.2. Print Head
3.2.1. Cleaning a Print Head
The preserve optimal printing conditions, it is imperative to maintain the print heads.
The way to maintain the print heads, is mainly determined by the current conditions of the print heads, such as missing nozzles, no ink firing, leaking heads, ....
To avoid print head problems, attach great importance to the daily print head maintenance procedures.
In this section, we will discuss several cleaning procedures. The point of time and the sequence in which you should use the different cleaning possibilities is explained in the Operator Manual. One of the actions the operator should perform is the nozzle check, which is also explained in this section.
We distinguish the following cleaning possibilities:
! Manual Clean Up,
! Automatic Weeping,
! Manual Weeping,
! Little Purge,
! Large Purge,
! Cleaning with solution (flushing).
NOTE: The manual weeping, the little purge and the large purge cleaning procedures mention the use of the purge switch button, located at the front side of the print heads.
NOTE: By pushing the purge switch button you are applying positive pressure to the ink column inside the sub ink tank, forcing ink through the nozzles. When using the purge switch button, keep in mind that:
� The contents of a sub ink tank is limited to 35 ml per color.� The ink supply hoses going to the sub ink tanks have a very narrow diameter and it takes
some time to refill the tanks.� For the white ink note that one sub ink tank is feeding both white print heads when purging.� When we hit the purge switch button the ink volume flowing away through the nozzles is
larger than the ink supplied into the sub ink tank.
NOTE: If we keep the button pushed during too long a period the sub ink tank will be drained completely since refill rate is slower than purge rate. As a result, air enters into the ink flow which causes even more missing nozzles. Give the sub ink tanks time to refill and be moderate on the use of the purge switch button.
HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 39 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
! Manual Clean Up
Clean the heads with a fiber-free cloth or cleaning stick, by wiping from back to front on each head separately. Use backside of cloth, or a new cloth for every next head.
! Automatic Weeping
A default "Weeping" time is set in the engine software to keep the heads open.
To capture an automatic weeping, proceed as follows:
1 Move the head carriage to the purge position (front left side).
2 Hold a white A4-paper underneath the base plate to check the nozzles.
3 Capture the ink when the heads are weeping during approximately 10 seconds.
As a result, vertical lines appears on the sheet.
4 Check them on interruption.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Operator 1
Description Code
Cleaning stick
Description Code
Lint-free cloth
NOTE: To order the cleaning stick, order D2+2161113 (cleaning stick rubber) and D2+2161115 (cleaning stick bracket).
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 40 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
! Manual Weeping
To execute a manual weeping, proceed as follows:
1 Move the head carriage to the purge position (front left side).
2 Set the vacuum pressure to zero during 2 minutes, by turning the pressure control adjustment knob.
3 Set the vacuum pressure by turning the pressure control adjustment knob to the desired pressure (range -0.032 MPa to -0.038 MPa).
! Nozzle Check
To execute a nozzle check, proceed as follows:
1 Move the head carriage to the home position (front right side).
2 Execute the head gap control.
Refer to �Executing a head gap control� on page 1-84 (chapter Functional Description).
3 Position a blank A4 paper on the print table as follows:
Between the 2 marking bullets positioned on the axle underneath the white transport belt and within the reach of the 2 marking bullets positioned on the side of the head carriage.
Pressure control adjustment knob
HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 41 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4 Switch on the vacuum.
5 In the Control Program, click Test.
The Test Menu window appears.
6 Select Jet Test and click Test to start the test print which checks the condition of the nozzles.
The nozzle check will be printed between the 4 white marking bullets.
NOTE: Use a black or colored paper to see the Spot- and Pre-white. The red area in the figure below shows the placement of the Spot- and Pre-white if it's turned on.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 42 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
7 Evaluate the nozzle check for missing nozzles.
For example, the nozzle condition is not good for black in the illustration below.
8 In case of nozzle failure:
8.1 Move the head carriage unit to purge position.
8.2 Push the grid backwards.
8.3 Execute a little and/or large purge.
Refer to �Little Purge� on page 4-42 and �Large Purge� on page 4-43.
! Little Purge
1 Close the print heads valves of the print heads that are OK.
Set them to the solution outlet positions (S).
2 Push the purge switch button at very short intervals.
3 Open all print head valves again.
Set them to the ink outlet positions (I).
1 2 3
4 5
1 K, C, M, Y, Lc and Lm valve 4 Ink outlet direction2 W valves 5 Solution outlet direction3 Solution (S) valve
Multiple short pulses
HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 43 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4 Clean the print heads with a fiber-free cloth.
Refer to �Manual Clean Up� on page 4-39.
5 Check on weeping
Refer to �Automatic Weeping� on page 4-39.
! Large Purge
1 Set all print head valves to the ink outlet position (I).
2 Push and hold the purge switch button during approximately 2 seconds and complete the proce-dure by pushing the purge switch button again, but now frequent, at very short intervals.
3 Clean the print heads with a fiber-free cloth.
Refer to �Manual Clean Up� on page 4-39.
4 Check on weeping
Refer to �Automatic Weeping� on page 4-39.
NOTE: Clean the heads with a fiber-free cloth, by wiping from back to front on each head separately. (Use backside of cloth, or a new cloth for every next head)
1 2 3
4 5
1 K, C, M, Y, Lc and Lm valve 4 Ink outlet direction2 W valves 5 Solution outlet direction3 Solution (S) valve
Long pulse (2 seconds) + multiple short pulses
NOTE: Clean the heads with a fiber-free cloth, by wiping from back to front on each head separately. (Use backside of cloth, or a new cloth for every next head)
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 44 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
5 If nozzle failure still exists, proceed as follows:
5.1 Set the vacuum pressure to zero by turning the pressure control adjustment knob.
5.2 Leave the system for 1 to 2 minutes.
Ink will starts dripping out the heads.
5.3 Restore the vacuum pressure to -0.034 MPa.
5.4 Clean the print heads with a fiber-free cloth.
Refer to �Manual Clean Up� on page 4-39.
5.5 Check on weeping
Refer to �Automatic Weeping� on page 4-39.
! Cleaning with solution
To clean the failing heads with solution, proceed as follows:
1 Set the print head valves of the failing print heads to the solution outlet position (S).
2 Set the solution valve to solution outlet position (S).
NOTE: When purging with cleaning solution, always work in three steps. To clean all 8 print heads with solution, first purge the 4 right heads (Lc, Lm, W1, W2), close them, and in a second stage, flush the remaining 4 left heads (K, C, M, Y). Finally, open the 4 right heads again, and purge all 8 heads together now. This way, you attain the most optimal cleaning pressure.
1 2 3
4 5
1 K, C, M, Y, Lc and Lm valve 4 Ink outlet direction2 W valves 5 Solution outlet direction3 Solution (S) valve
HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 45 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3 Push the solution valve button until you see a full solution-curtain, then stop pushing.
As a result, the solution runs from the refill system to the sub ink tank, mounted at the rear of the head carriage.
Note that the solution valve button is located at the back side of the print heads.
4 Leave the print heads in this condition for at least 5 minutes.
5 Put all ink valves and the solution valve in the ink outlet (I) position and set the vacuum pressure to zero.
6 Wait till the ink drops out of the heads (a few minutes).
7 Set the vacuum pressure by turning the pressure control adjustment knob to the desired pressure (range -0.032 MPa to -0.038 MPa).
8 Clean the print heads with a fiber-free cloth.
Refer to �Manual Clean Up� on page 4-39.
9 Check on weeping
Refer to �Automatic Weeping� on page 4-39.
3.2.2. Replacing a Print Head
Refer to �Replacement of a Print Head� on page 3-61 (chapter Repair and Service).
3.2.3. Adjustment of the Print Head
Refer to �Print Head Adjustments� on page 3-91 and �Head Base Alignment� on page 3-99 (chapter Repair and Service).
NOTE: Clean the heads with a fiber-free cloth, by wiping from back to front on each head separately. (Use backside of cloth, or a new cloth for every next head)
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 46 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3.3. UV Lamp Box / UV Lamp Box Housing
3.3.1. Cleaning the Crystal Glass Plate
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Look into the UV lamp box housing. The lamp shutter (1) is closed.
2 To open the lamp shutter, do one of the following:
! Connect the lamp shutter OFF pneumatic tube (red) (3)to the lamp shutter ON connection (2) and leave the lamp shutter ON pneumatic tube (yellow) (4) open as illustrated below.
Operation Reference
Remove the UV Lamp Box. Chapter 3 §4.7.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Crystal Plate (190)(8C) D2+2509166
Isopropyl alcohol
1
2 3 4
HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 47 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
or
! Switch the connections on the corresponding lamp shutter solenoid valve (5,6). To get access the lamp shutter solenoid valves, open the purge top door and then open the head cover door of the head carriage unit.
3 Hold a white paper underneath the glass plate of the UV lamp box housing to inspect the state of the glass plate.
4 If the glass plate is dirty, do one of the following:
4.1 Clean using a lint-free cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol (IPA). Proceed with step 9
4.2 Replace the crystal glass plate. Proceed with step 5.
5 Raise the head carriage unit to the maximum height for easy access.
5 6
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 48 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
6 Remove at the bottom side the metallic blinking frame (4) that holds the glass plate, by unscrewing the four screws (5).
7 Replace the dirty glass plate by a new one.
8 Restore the lamp shutter ON/OFF pneumatic tube connections, to close the shutter.
Procedure: opposite step 2.
9 Remount the UV lamp box.
Refer to �Replacement of the UV Lamp Box� on page 3-73 (chapter Repair and Service).
3.3.2. Checking the Printing and Curing Quality
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
5
4
HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 49 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3.3.3. Replacing the UV Lamps
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None.
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Turn the UV lamp box upside down.
2 Unscrew the two wires out of the connector blocs (1).
3 Lift the UV lamp (2) out of the brackets (3) without touching.
4 Take the new UV lamp out of the foil.
NOTE: Always change both UV lamps to avoid bi-banding.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Open the front and left purge door to get full access to the left UV lamp box.
Remove the UV lamp box. Chapter 3 §4.7.2.
Move the head carriage to the home position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Put the print engine in service mode. Chapter 3 §3.2.
Open the home right side door to get full access to the right UV lamp box.
Remove the UV lamp box. Chapter 3 §4.7.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Operator 1
Description Code
Lamp 190mm D2+2509221
1
3
1 12
CAUTION: Do not touch the glass part of the UV lamp with your bare hands. Wear gloves when necessary. If grease of your hands gets on the glass, it can reduce the lifetime of the UV lamp significantly.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 50 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
5 Mount the new UV lamp into the lamp housing.
6 Reconnect the 2 wires to the connector blocs.
7 Remount the UV lamp box.
Refer to �Replacement of the UV Lamp Box� on page 3-73 (chapter Repair and Service).
3.3.4. Inspecting the Lamp Shutter Functionality
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
1 Open the purge top and rear door.
2 Open the head cover door of the head carriage unit to get access to the top side of the head carriage unit.
NOTE: Make sure that the nipple of the UV lamp is positioned towards the reflection shield (metallic plate) of the lamp housing.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1 10� 10�
HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 51 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3 Locate the 2 lamp shutter solenoid valves.
4 Check the lamp shutter functionality by pressing the blue points, of the lamp shutter solenoid valves, using a pointed object.
5 Listen if the lamp shutter toggles.
21
1 Lamp shutter solenoid valve(Right UV lamp box housing)
2 Lamp shutter solenoid valve (Left UV lamp box housing)
43
3 Lamp shutter open 4 Lamp shutter closed
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 52 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3.3.5. Replacing the Lamp Shutter
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
HEAD CARRIAGE UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 53 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3.4. Head Carriage
3.4.1. Inspecting and Adjusting the Position of the Head Carriage Unit.
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
None
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
! To inspect the head base height, proceed as follows:
Refer to �Head Base Height Control� on page 1-57 (chapter Functional Description).
! To inspect the head gap, proceed as follows:
Refer to �Head Gap Control� on page 1-84 (chapter Functional Description).
! To replace a broken detection bracket
-.- Not Available Yet -.-
3.4.2. Checking the Head Voltage
Refer to �Adjusting the Head Voltage� on page 3-92 (chapter Repair and Service).
3.4.3. Inspecting the Head Base Plate Parallelism.
Refer to �Aligning the Head Base Plate� on page 3-99 (chapter Repair and Service).
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Operator 1
Description Code
measuring device
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REFILL UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 54 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4. Refill Unit Maintenance
4.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction
! Handling UV Curable ink
! UV radiation
WARNING: Consult the appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) before handling UV curable ink.
WARNING: UV ink contains some chemicals harmful to eyes and skin. Always wear safety gloves when handling UV ink. In case of accidental contact, rinse immediately with plenty of water and consult a doctor, if required.
WARNING: UV ink contains chemicals harmful to eyes and skin. 1. Always wear splash-resistant nitril safety gloves when handling UV ink. (Only safety gloves for single use are allowed). 2. Always wear protective glasses when refilling or changing the ink. 3. Avoid inhalation of the ink.
WARNING: Be aware of the waste disposal and regulations that bear on UV curable ink. Always follow the instructions on the label of the ink cartridge.
WARNING: UV light can cause harmful damage to eyes and skin. Therefore never look into UV light without wearing protective glasses. Never exposure your skin to UV light.
REFILL UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 55 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.2. Air filter 6 Color and White
4.2.1. Inspecting and Replacing the Air Filter
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
None
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Inspect the air filter (1) for any moisture.
2 If saturated, remove and replace the air filter.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Air filter (6C) D2+2509046
Air filter (W) D2+2509046
1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REFILL UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 56 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.3. Ink Filter
4.3.1. Bleeding the Ink Filters
Bleeding the air from an ink filter is necessary to fill the ink circuit completely with ink. If you do not extract the air from the ink filter, overflow can occur (and as well leaking heads as missing nozzles) because the sub ink tank is filled with air. Bleeding occurs manually.
Bleeding the ink filter is necessary in two circumstances:
! When starting up the Anapurna L/XL for the first time after installation, bleed each ink filter after filling each ink tank with 1 liter of ink.
! If an ink tank has remained empty during too long a period and if consequently, the ink filter is dry.
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
None
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
CAUTION: The ink filter should not be exposed to fluorescent light and sunlight.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Absorbent lint free cleaning tissues
REFILL UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 57 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
E. PROCEDURE
1 Get access to the refill PCB and reconnect all pump connectors. The connector J17 should remain disconnected.
2 Unscrew the four screws to remove the refill system panel.
Place the panel against the right cover.
3 Put some absorbent lint free cleaning tissues underneath the ink filters to catch possible spilled ink
4 Open the cap on top of the filter (e.g. Lm).
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REFILL UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 58 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
5 Hold an absorbent lint free cleaning tissue against the filter opening.
6 Press and hold the priming switch of the corresponding color until the ink flows upwards and is spilled. Use a 5 second on/off sequence (leave 5 seconds on, then 5 seconds off), in order to fill up both chambers of the filter.
7 Repeat the bleeding procedure a second and a third time to be sure that all air is extracted from the ink filter (reason: filter has a compartment that fills with a certain delay).
8 Screw the cap on top of the ink filter and clean the ink filter with a cleaning tissue.
NOTE: Wait some seconds in between the bleeds and reduce the sequence time when bleeding the second (e.g. 3 seconds on/off sequence) and third (e.g. 2 seconds on/off sequence) time.
REFILL UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 59 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
9 Repeat steps 4 to 8 for all other colors.
10 Mount the refill system panel using the four screws.
4.3.2. Draining the First Ink from the Sub Ink Tanks
When all filters have been bled, you need to drain the first ink from the sub ink tanks (approx. 30 ml).
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
None
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
1 Unscrew the locknut underneath each print head valve (K, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm, W1 and W2).
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
NOTE: All print head valves are still set to the solution outlet position (S)!
NOTE: Connector J17 on the Refill PCB is still disconnected.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REFILL UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 60 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2 Shear the tube of each valve.
3 Open the drain cock of the sub air tank.
The sub air tank is located behind the purge rear door.
4 Connect the connector J17 on the refill PCB to pump ink from the main ink tanks to the sub ink tanks and wait until all pumps are idle.
All refill leds on the refill system indicator go out when all pumps are idle.
5 As soon as all pumps are idle, close the drain cock of the sub air tank.
1
2
1 Locknut 2 Tube
µ
1
1 Drain cock
NOTE: The first time you drain the first ink, there is also air in the ink tubes between the main ink tanks and the sub ink tanks. The air can leave the tubes through the drain cock of the sub air tank.
REFILL UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 61 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
6 Drain the seven ink channels (K, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm, W1, W2) one after the other. To drain one ink channel, proceed as follows:
6.1 Place a receiving bin underneath the valve (e.g. K valve).
6.2 Put some absorbent lint free cleaning tissues near the receiving bin to catch possible spilled ink.
6.3 Set the valve to the ink outlet position (I).
6.4 Let the ink drop out completely (approx. 30 ml).
6.5 Wait a few seconds and let the ink drop out again (approx. 30 ml).
6.6 Set the valve to the solution outlet position (S).
7 Repeat steps 6.
When draining the first ink from the sub ink tank a second time, the drained ink volume increases.
8 Repeat step 6 once again (third time) and then proceed with step 9.
9 Reconnect the tube of each print head valve and manually tighten the locknut.
1
2
1 Locknut 2 Tube
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REFILL UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 62 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
10 Adjust the vacuum pressure by turning the pressure control adjustment knob until you reach the desired pressure (range -0.032 MPa to -0.038 MPa).
The old ink has drained out sufficiently. Now you can start flushing the heads with cleaning solution.
4.3.3. Replacing an Ink Filter
Refer to �Replacement of the Ink Filter� on page 3-35 (chapter Repair and Service).
PURGE UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 63 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
5. Purge Unit Maintenance
5.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction
! Handling UV Curable ink
! UV radiation
5.2. Purge box
5.2.1. Inspecting and Cleaning the Purge Grid
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
WARNING: Consult the appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) before handling UV curable ink.
WARNING: UV ink contains some chemicals harmful to eyes and skin. Always wear safety gloves when handling UV ink. In case of accidental contact, rinse immediately with plenty of water and consult a doctor, if required.
WARNING: UV ink contains chemicals harmful to eyes and skin. 1. Always wear splash-resistant nitril safety gloves when handling UV ink. (Only safety gloves for single use are allowed). 2. Always wear protective glasses when refilling or changing the ink. 3. Avoid inhalation of the ink.
WARNING: Be aware of the waste disposal and regulations that bear on UV curable ink. Always follow the instructions on the label of the ink cartridge.
WARNING: UV light can cause harmful damage to eyes and skin. Therefore never look into UV light without wearing protective glasses. Never exposure your skin to UV light.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the home position Chapter 3 §3.1.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Operator 1
Description Code
filling-knife or a wide screwdriver
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PURGE UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 64 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
E. PROCEDURE
1 Visually check the state of the purge grid.
2 If cured ink is accumulated on the grid, use a filling-knife or a wide screwdriver to cut off the cured ink on the ribs.
5.2.2. Cleaning the Ink Receiving Bin
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
1 Push the grid to the back.
2 Use a filling-knife or a wide screwdriver to cut off the cured ink in the receiving bin.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the home position Chapter 3 §3.1.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Operator 1
Description Code
filling-knife or a wide screwdriver
HOME UNIT MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 65 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
6. Home Unit Maintenance
6.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction
! Handling UV Curable ink
! UV radiation
6.2. Home box
6.2.1. Inspecting and Cleaning the Home Grid
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
WARNING: Consult the appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) before handling UV curable ink.
WARNING: UV ink contains some chemicals harmful to eyes and skin. Always wear safety gloves when handling UV ink. In case of accidental contact, rinse immediately with plenty of water and consult a doctor, if required.
WARNING: UV ink contains chemicals harmful to eyes and skin. 1. Always wear splash-resistant nitril safety gloves when handling UV ink. (Only safety gloves for single use are allowed). 2. Always wear protective glasses when refilling or changing the ink. 3. Avoid inhalation of the ink.
WARNING: Be aware of the waste disposal and regulations that bear on UV curable ink. Always follow the instructions on the label of the ink cartridge.
WARNING: UV light can cause harmful damage to eyes and skin. Therefore never look into UV light without wearing protective glasses. Never exposure your skin to UV light.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position Chapter 3 §3.1.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Operator 1
Description Code
filling-knife or a wide screwdriver
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE HOME UNIT MAINTENANCE
4 - 66 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
E. PROCEDURE
1 Visually check the state of the home grid.
2 If cured ink is accumulated on the grid, take out the grid (1).
3 Use a filling-knife or a wide screwdriver to cut off the cured ink on the ribs.
6.2.2. Cleaning the Ink Receiving Bin
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
1 Take out the grid (1).
2 Use a filling-knife or a wide screwdriver to cut off the cured ink in the receiving bin (2).
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position Chapter 3 §3.1.
Take out the grid Chapter 4 §6.2.1.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Operator 1
Description Code
filling-knife or a wide screwdriver
1
1
2
SAFETY CIRCUIT PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 67 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
7. Safety Circuit
7.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction
None
7.2. Emergency Stop Circuit
7.2.1. Inspecting the Emergency Stops
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
None
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
1 Push the emergency stop button.
2 Verify whether the emergency button cuts off the power, except for the PC and SMPS8.
3 Pull the emergency button back.
The emergency stop is cancelled.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
1 20� 20�
NOTE: The system is provided with 4 emergency stops, two at the front side and two at the back side.The inspecting procedure is written for one emergency stop. Repeat the procedure for all four emergency stops.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SAFETY CIRCUIT
4 - 68 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4 Push the Start button (white button) to restart the engine.
NOTE: For more information about the emergency stop circuit, refer to �Emergency Stop Circuit� on page 1-14 (chapter Functional Description)
AIR TANK MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 69 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
8. Air Tank Maintenance
8.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction
None
8.2. Air Tank
8.2.1. Draining the Air Tank
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
None
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
1 Open the drain cock (2) to eliminate the water of the air tank (1).
Operation Reference
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1 5� 5�
21
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE AIR PRESSURE PANEL MAINTENANCE
4 - 70 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
9. Air Pressure Panel Maintenance
9.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction
9.2. Air Pressure Panel
9.2.1. Draining the Air Filter
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
1 Remove the air pressure panel (1).
CAUTION: Never turn off the compressed air during idle periods. If it is needed to do this, execute the following actions before shutting down the engine:
! put all ink valves in the solution (S) outlet position,
! mount the capping plate underneath the head base plate,
! disconnect the 2 cables of the carriage servo motor to avoid that after power-up the engine again, the carriage accidentally moves after reset while the capping plate is still mounted.
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1 5� 5�
Description Code
1
AIR PRESSURE PANEL MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 71 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2 Remove the 2 cable trunk covers (2).
3 Locate the two air filters (AF20-01BG) (3), the water drain out connector (4) and the drain pipe (5).
4 Drain the water from the 2 air filters.
4.1 Place a receiving bin underneath the drain pipe (7).
4.2 Open the black nut (6) underneath the filter to remove the water.
2
2
3 3
5
4
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE AIR PRESSURE PANEL MAINTENANCE
4 - 72 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4.3 Close the black nut (6) when the water is removed.
9.2.2. Replacing the Air Filter
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
E. PROCEDURE
1 Set all print head valves (K, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm, W1 and W2) to the solution outlet position (S).
2 Set the solution valve to the ink outlet position (I).
7 668
NOTE: Follow the same procedure to drain the water from the main regulator (AW20-02BCG) (8)
Operation Reference
Move the head carriage to the purge position. Chapter 3 §3.1.
Remove air pressure panel and cable trunk covers Chapter 4 §9.2.1.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1 15� 15�
Description Code
Description Code
Air filter (AF20-01BG) D2+2509015
AIR PRESSURE PANEL MAINTENANCE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 73 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3 Switch off the engine.
4 Turn off the compressed air supply.
5 Locate the air filter (AF20-01BG) (6).
6 Replace the air filter.
6.1 Unscrew the 2 cross-slotted screws.
6.2 Disconnect the air hoses.
1 2 3
4 5
1 K, C, M, Y, Lc and Lm valve 4 Ink outlet direction2 W valves 5 Solution outlet direction3 Solution (S) valve
6 6
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE AIR PRESSURE PANEL MAINTENANCE
4 - 74 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
6.3 Mount a new air filter, tighten the 2 cross-slotted screws and reconnect the air hoses.
7 Restore the compressed air supply.
8 Restart the engine.
9 Set all print head valves and the solution valve to the proper outlet position.
10 Verify the printing conditions and if necessary clean the print heads.
Refer to �Cleaning a Print Head� on page 4-38.
ENGINE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 75 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
10. Engine
10.1. Guidelines and Specific Safety Instruction
None
10.2. Engine Level
10.2.1. Checking the Engine Level
Balance influences the output quality, so it is essential that the Anapurna L/XL is levelled properly to ensure optimum printing conditions.
Regularly check the three built-in spirit levels.
10.2.2. Levelling the Print Engine
The print engine is provided with three built-in spirit levels at the front side, which can be used to level the print engine. The levels are positioned at print table height; one level is positioned at the middle of the connections bar, the 2 other levels are mounted on the left and right side panels.
Figure 4.1: Levelling
Levelling must be done in two directions:
! Levelling in the longitudinal direction (Front/Rear side):Use the levels mounted on the left and right side panels.
! Levelling in the cross direction (Left/Right side):Use the level mounted in the middle of the connection bar.
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
None
1 1
1 Spirit level (middle) 2 Spirit level (front right side panel)
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ENGINE
4 - 76 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
1 Manually turn the 8 support feet downwards until they touch the ground.
2 Lower each support foot further by turning them over one complete turn.
3 Use the left and right built-in level to check the level of the print engine in longitudinal direction.
4 Look at the position of the air bubble of the left built-in level. If necessary, adjust the lowest (on the opposite side of the air bubble) point of support foot number 1, slightly until the air bubble of the level is in the middle.
5 Look at the position of the air bubble of the right built-in level. If necessary, adjust the lowest (on the opposite side of the air bubble) point of support foot number 2, slightly until the air bubble of the level is in the middle.
6 Repeat steps 4 to 5 until the air bubble is exactly in the middle.
7 Look at the position of the air bubble of the middle built-in level.If necessary, adjust the lowest (on the opposite side of the air bubble) point of support foot number 3, slightly until the air bubble of the level is in the middle. Make sure not to disturb the longitudinal balance. This is done by adjusting both support feet (number 3A or 3B) equally over the same distance.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1 10� 10�
Description Code
Nut wrench no.36
REAR
FRONT
1
1
2
2
REAR
FRONT
1
1 2
2
REAR
FRONT
3A
3A 3B
3B
ENGINE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 4 - 77 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
8 Lower the outer support feet until they touch the ground.
9 When the correct height is reached, is it necessary to secure the feet by tightening the locknut against the frame.
10 Check whether the ink supply door is leveled. If not do the ink supply door levelling.
For more information, refer to �Levelling the Ink Supply Door� on page 4-77.
10.2.3. Levelling the Ink Supply Door
A. PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES
B. MANPOWER
C. SPECIAL TOOLS
D. CONSUMABLES, MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS
None
E. PROCEDURE
1 Level the ink supply door, using a nut wrench no. 24, in such a way:
1.1 the ink supply door does not drag when you open it,
1.2 the ink supply door closes easily,
1.3 the 3 door hinges are not extremely overloaded.
REAR
FRONT
NOTE: Check whether the air bubble of the three built-in levels is still in the middle. If not redo the levelling.
Operation Reference
Level the print engine Chapter 4 §10.2.2.
Qualification Number of people Man-hours Execution time
Service technician 1
Description Code
Nut wrench no.24
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ENGINE
4 - 78 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
2 When the correct height is reached, secure the support wheel.
CHAPTER
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 5 - 1:Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
5 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes how you can recognize and solve mechanical, electrical and image problems you could encounter when printing with the Anapurna L/XL.
1. Troubleshooting Based on Visible Problems ............................................................................................... 5 - 21.1. Troubleshooting Based on Tower Lamp Indications .................................................................... 5 - 21.2. Troubleshooting Based on Mechanical and/or Electrical Problems ..................................... 5 - 2
2. Troubleshooting Based on UI Error Messages .......................................................................................... 5 - 133. Troubleshooting based on Image Quality Control .................................................................................. 5 - 14
3.1. Encoder (MARK) Error ........................................................................................................................... 5 - 143.2. Black Strips .............................................................................................................................................. 5 - 153.3. Waves on the Media Surface ............................................................................................................ 5 - 153.4. Only UNI MODE Output ...................................................................................................................... 5 - 163.5. Image Quality Failure .......................................................................................................................... 5 - 163.6. Spray on your Image ............................................................................................................................ 5 - 183.7. Print Length Exceeds Maximum Platen Length ......................................................................... 5 - 18
4. UV Lamp Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 5 - 205. Servo Motor Driver Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 5 - 21
TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON VISIBLE PROBLEMS
5 - 2 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
1. Troubleshooting Based on Visible Problems
1.1. Troubleshooting Based on Tower Lamp Indications
The tower lamp indicates if there are troubles. This is indicated by beeping and flashing of one or more lamps of the tower lamp. Along the color of the flashing lamp(s), the problem is defined.
1.2. Troubleshooting Based on Mechanical and/or Electrical Problems
Trouble Cause Action See
RED lamp is flashing and beeping.
(Red lamp lights up in nor-mal state)
Air pressure is under 0.3 MPa � Check the industrial compresso-compressor.
� Check the status of the tube connection.
1 §4.1.2.
YELLOW lamp is flashing and beeping.
(Yellow lamp lights up in normal state)
Low ink level at main ink tank � Refill ink into main ink tank.
� Check air at ink filter.
� Installation manual
� 4 §4.3.1.
GREEN lamp is flashing and beeping
(Green lamp lights up in when UV lamp is turned on).
� Lamp power off � Check the UV power switch if it is turned on or off.
� Check UV power cable connec-tion status.
� Check stability of electric supply.
� 1 §10.1.3.
� 1 §10.1.5.1 §10.1.6.1 §10.1.7.
� Overheat � Change the secondary of the UV coil to 60 (Note: only possible for 50Hz countries).
� 5 §1.2.1.
BLUE lamp is flashing and beeping
(Blue lamp lights up when the register pins are down)
Full waste ink tank (> 3.5 litre) Empty waste ink tank. 4 §2.10.1.
All lamps are flashing and beeping
Overflow (of ink) in sub air tank. Ink run from sub ink tank to sub air tank
� Lower the pressure to �0�� Empty sub air tank
5 §1.2.2.
Trouble Cause Action See
Rear TAKE-UP motor does not stop
No media detected Media position check. The media should be between media detec-tion sensor and reflection plate.
� 1 §6.1.4.2.� 1 §6.1.4.4.� 1 §14.11.
Rear TAKE-UP motor does not move
Obstacle (e.g. vacuum pumps) in the beam of the media detection signal sensor.
Remove obstacle. � 1 §6.1.4.2.� 1 §6.1.4.4.
Beeping (every 3 sec)[main PCB beeping]
Take-up overload Pressing CW/CCW button for a long time at the take-up control system panel
1 §6.1.4.2.
TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON VISIBLE PROBLEMS TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 5 - 3 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
Media distorting Wrong positioning of media � Check whether the print medium is loaded correctly on the rear media roll bar.
� Check whether the tension roll bar is inserted correctly.
� Check the position of the print medium on the print table.
1 §6.1.4.4.
Tension roll bar (rear/front) lifted out of its posi-tion.
Wrong positioning of the tension roll bar
Check whether the 2 tension roll bars of the roll to roll system are mounted correctly
1 §6.1.4.1.
Media fixing roll bar (rear/front) lifted out of its posi-tion.
Wrong positioning of the media fixing roll bar
Check whether the 2 media fixing roll bars above the print table are mounted correctly
1 §6.1.2.1.
Ink not cured Check UV lamp life span Replace lamp 4 §3.3.3.
Immediate stop during printing
Communication error, output data error
� Check communication cables and data
� Check RTL file
Strange noise and no movement of print media
Feed speed � Adjust feed speed value� Check parameters at servo driver
� 1 §12.3.4.� 1 §6.1.6.1.
Noise while head carriage unit is moving
Obstacles Remove obstacle and supply grease to S3M belt
4 §2.7.1.
Head carriage unit does not move
Obstacles exist while head car-riage unit is moving
� Check obstacles in the range of the head carriage unit.
� Check power and cable between carriage and feed servo motor
� Turn off main power and start again
� Check servo motor driver error message
�
�
�
� 5 §5.
Ink drips on the print media
Contaminated print head or for-eign materials ink remainders
� Clean head nozzle and check minus pressure
� Remove air at ink filter
� 4 §3.2.1.� 1 §4.1.3.1.� 4 §4.3.1.
Motor noise(Feed and carriage)
Check servo motor driver Adjust servo motor driver accord-ing to gain value.
1 §6.1.6.1.
Lots of ink drops on print media
Negative pressure error Check negative gauge, adjust to normal value
� 1 §9.1.1.� 1 §4.1.3.1.
Not ejecting ink instantly Electrical noise by static current, it influences head ejecting
� Static current hinders electrical signals of head
� Check ground� By purging 2~3, supply ink and
clean head
�
�� 4 §3.2.1.
Can not supply ink to sub ink tank
Refill device does not work prop-erly
Check ink at main ink tank and then call service
Unexpected line appeared on image
Head nozzle is clogged Check nozzle conditions by doing jet test
� 1 §12.4.1.� 4 §3.2.1.
Dark lines in the print, as a result of overlapping passes
Wrong Step Size value Adjust Step Size value 1 §12.3.2.
White lines in the print, as a result of a gap between the passes.
Wrong Step Size value Adjust Step Size value 1 §12.3.2.
Trouble Cause Action See
TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON VISIBLE PROBLEMS
5 - 4 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
Head heater temperature is increasing or decreasing
� Problem with PT sensor head base plate
� Problem with head temperature sensor (safety thermostat 45°C)
� Problems with the heating ele-ments of each print head (heater bar - red cables)
� Problem with the safety thermo-stat (80°C) mounted on the head base plate
� Check connection PT sensor head base plate with Head Lift PCB (J17). Replace if necessary.
� Check connection head temper-ature sensor with Head PCB (J29) + check connection with Magenta print head. Replace thermistor if necessary
� Check connection with Head PCB and replace head heater if necessary.
� Check safety thermostat and replace if necessary.
� 1 §9.1.2.2. and 3 §4.6.4.
� 1 §9.1.2.2. and 3 §4.6.3.
� 1 §9.1.2.2. and 3 §4.6.3.
�
Overflow � Air in the ink filter
� Malfunction of the sub ink tank level sensors
� Malfunction of the waste ink tank level sensor
� Connection error/minus pressure error
� Ink in sub air tank
� Ink filter should be filled with sufficient ink without air
� Replace level sensor
� Replace level sensor
� Check compressor and tube con-nection status. Adjust the air pressure to the appropriate value.
� Check sub air tank if air exists or not. It should be always empty and clean.
� 4 §4.3.1.
� 1 §7.1.3.5. and 3 §4.4.1. and 3 §4.4.3.
� 4 §2.10.1.
� 1 §4.1.2.
� 1 §4.1.3.1.
Loss of voltage Check the permanent voltage 5 §1.2.4.
Overheating base plate Head base plate temperature > 38°C during printing
� Stop printing at the end of the current print job.
� Switch off the UV-lamps.� Run the Encoder Test for 5 min-
utes
�
� 1 §10.1.3.� 1 §9.1.2.
Overheating UV assembly Change the secondary of the UV coil to 60 Hz (Note: only possible for 50Hz countries)
5 §1.2.1.
UV lamp burnout The metal connector inside the ceramic block is completely burned up
Replace lamp house 5 §1.2.3.
The S3M belt wears out, it looses its teeth, parts as well as complete teeth.
Replace the S3M belt 4 §2.7.2.
Noisy movement of the head carriage unit
Discontinuity of the teeth of the S3M belt results in noisy move-ments of the head carriage unit
Replace the S3M belt 4 §2.7.2.
Vacuum not strong enough on printing table
Vacuum holes printing tabla are clogged up
Puncture all holes of the vacuum table using a syringe needle.
4 §2.3.1.
Trouble Cause Action See
TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON VISIBLE PROBLEMS TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 5 - 5 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
1.2.1. Overheat UV Assembly
The green tower lamp is flashing and beeping due to an overheat of the UV assembly.
! To solve the overheat, proceed as follows:
1 Get access to the UV lamp power box, which is located behind the main box left side door.
2 Change the secondary of the UV coil to 60 Hz for both the left and right UV lamp power.
If you have the UV lamp power box in front of you, the secondary is on the right hand side.
1.2.2. Overflow (of Ink) in Sub Air Tank
Ink overflow happens when ink runs through from the sub ink tank to the sub air tank. At that time, all tower lamp start flashing and beeping.
! To solve an overflow in the sub air tank, proceed as follows:
1 Move the head carriage to the purge position (front right side).
2 Set the vacuum pressure to zero by turning the pressure control adjustment knob (1).
NOTE: This solution is only possible for 50 Hz countries.
1 2
250V
220V
208V
60Hz
50Hz
250V
220V
208V
60Hz
50Hz
5060
CHOKE(R)-LOW
CHOKE(R)-HIGH
1 UV lamp power (left) 2 UV lamp power (right)
1
TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON VISIBLE PROBLEMS
5 - 6 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3 Open the drain cock (2) of the sub air tank and empty the waste ink from the sub air tank.
4 Close the drain cock (2) of the sub air tank.
5 Adjust the vacuum pressure by turning the pressure control adjustment knob until you reach the desired pressure (range -0.032 MPa to -0.038 MPa).
6 Restart printing.
1.2.3. UV Lamp Burnout
! To solve an UV lamp burnout
1 Check the state of the components at the underside of the UV lamp box.
2 If only the bolt (4) of the ceramic block is burned through, replace the bolt of the ceramic connector.
3 If the ceramic connector bloc (1), the brackets (3), the UV lamp (2), ... are damaged due to the burn out, replace the complete UV lamp box.
Refer to �Replacement of the UV Lamp Box� on page 3-73 (chapter Repair and Service).
µ
2
1
3
1 12
4
1 Ceramic connector block 3 Bracket2 UV lamp 4 Bolt ceramic connector
TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON VISIBLE PROBLEMS TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 5 - 7 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
1.2.4. Checking the Permanent Voltage
! To check the permanent voltage, proceed as follows:
1 Make sure that all automatic fuses are in the off position.
2 Turn on the external main switch (at the switch box).
3 Check whether the input voltage is stable on the main power inlet terminal.
! 380V +/- 10% (50Hz)
! 208-240V (60Hz)
4 Check whether the UV lamp power settings (left and right) are set correctly (voltage/frequency check). If necessary, switch the plug connectors.
WARNING: Keep in mind always to plug the connector to the voltage connection equal to or larger than the effective input voltage. Possible connections are: 208/220/250V, 50/60Hz.e.g. if the input voltage is 235V (Spain), connect to the 250V connection.
1 2
250V
220V
208V
60Hz
50Hz
250V
220V
208V
60Hz
50Hz
1 UV lamp power (left) 2 UV lamp power (right)
TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON VISIBLE PROBLEMS
5 - 8 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
5 Check the four emergency buttons.
The system is provided with 4 emergency stops, two at the front side and two at the back side.
6 Check the first circuit breaker.
7 Push the PC button (green button) to operate the PC.
WARNING: When the emergency button is activated all systems are cut off from the mains, except for the PC.
1
1 First circuit breaker (MCCB)
TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON VISIBLE PROBLEMS TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 5 - 9 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
8 Activate the automatic fuses of the following systems one by one:
! Lamp power
! Ring blower 1
! Ring blower 2
! Motor drive
! Control rack
9 Push and hold the Start button (white button) for 1 second until you hear the relays and the head carriage starts moving to its home position.
10 After starting up for the first time, the yellow tower lamp starts blinking (the head carriage moves slowly to the home position) and the print engine produces a beeping sound.
NOTE: Make sure that the carriage servo motor connectors are plugged in and that the head carriage has a free path to its home position (head altitude high enough to pass over the conveyor belt without any obstruction).
TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON VISIBLE PROBLEMS
5 - 10 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
1.2.5. Wrong Ink in the Main Ink Tank
Respect the color sequence of the ink buffer system. Each ink tank is fitted with a colored label indicating the color type. From left to right: (W), Lm, Lc, Y, M, C, K, Solution.
! When you fill an ink tank with the wrong ink proceed as follows:
! If noted during ink filling:
1 Press one of the emergency stop buttons.
2 Drain the main ink tank.
To get access to the drain cock (1) of the main ink tank, remove the panel underneath the ink tank indicator panel.
3 Rinse the main tank with cleaning solution using a squeeze bottle.
4 Fill the main ink tank.
Refer to �Filling the Ink Tanks� of the Installation Manual.
5 Bleed the corresponding ink filter.
Refer to �Bleeding the Ink Filters� on page 4-56 (chapter Preventive Maintenance)
1
TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON VISIBLE PROBLEMS TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 5 - 11 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
! If noted during printing
1 Drain the main ink tank.
To get access to the drain cock of the main ink tank, remove the panel underneath the ink tank indicator panel.
2 Replace the corresponding ink filter.
Refer to �Replacement of the Ink Filter� on page 3-35 (chapter Repair and Service)
3 Fill the main ink tank with cleaning solution.
4 Clean the complete ink circuit and print with cleaning.
5 Refill the main ink tank with the correct color.
Refer to �Filling the Ink Tanks� of the Installation Manual.
6 Load new ink and bleed the ink filter.
Refer to �Bleeding the Ink Filters� on page 4-56 and �Draining the First Ink from the Sub Ink Tanks� on page 4-59(chapter Preventive Maintenance).
1
TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON VISIBLE PROBLEMS
5 - 12 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
1.2.6. Wrong Refill System LED Indications
If both the empty and feeding leds are burning on the Refill Control PCB, proceed as follows:
1 Visually check the ink level of the appropriate ink color(s).
2 Press the priming switch (manual feed) of the appropriate color(s).
3 If the problem still persists, first press one of the emergency stop buttons and restart the system.
4 If problem still persists, proceed as follows:
4.1 Bleed the ink filter of the appropriate color(s).
Refer to �Bleeding the Ink Filters� on page 4-56 (chapter Preventive Maintenance)
4.2 Check the ink pump of the appropriate color(s).
4.3 Check the float sensor connection of the sub ink tank of the appropriate color(s).
The level of each sub ink tank is controlled by means of a float senor connected to the Head PCB (Refer to the diagram �HEAD PCB� on page 7-37).
TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON UI ERROR MESSAGES TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 5 - 13 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2. Troubleshooting Based on UI Error Messages
The purpose of this troubleshooting is to give an overview of all UI error messages, which are integrated in the system, and to deliver a cause and/or solution so you are able to solve the problem(s).
The table below lists all UI error messages of an V1.2 engine.
Error Message Cause/Solution
*** ERROR *** Factory Data File (Factory.Set) Open Failed ..*** Factory.Set File is missing or corrupted.
*** ERROR *** Setup Data File Open Failed ..*** Setup Data file is missing or corrupted.
*** ERROR *** Missing Resolution Header *** File header in RTL file missing. (ex: VERTICAL RESOLUTION=363)
*** ERROR *** Missing Color Number Header *** File header in RTL file missing. (ex: INKS=6).
*** ERROR *** Invalid Resolution Header *** File header in RTL file missing.
*** ERROR *** Carriage Not At Home Position.... *** Try to run TEST routine when carriage is not at home position.
*** ERROR ** Print Length Exceeds Max. Platen Length.*** Try to run/move carriage exceeding Max. Platen Length.
*** ERROR *** Command Download('O') Failed. *** Internal error message for Printing Download command.
*** ERROR *** Command Download('K') Failed. ***
*** ERROR *** Carriage Lift Error.. *** Time-out error during Carriage Lift Command.
*** ERROR *** Carriage Vacuume Error. ***Hardware Reset Required...
Carriage Vacuum loss sensor triggered.
*** ERROR *** Waste Can Overflow Error. ***Hardware Reset Required...
Waste Can Overflow sensor triggered.
*** ERROR *** Door Open Alarm Error. *** Close Door to Continue...
Try to print, move, feed or test when cover door is open.
*** ERROR *** Serial Com. Timeout Error. (No 'SI' Received..) ***Hardware Reset Required... Software Reboot Required...
When PC loses communication to Main board.
*** ERROR *** Inputs Not Ready for Print. *** Try to print, move, feed or test when media set sensors are triggered.
*** ERROR *** Value Should be between -300 to 300... *** Try to jog feed media.
*** ERROR *** Carriage Speed Should be between 100 .. 2700. Try to save values in Setup Menu.
*** ERROR *** Feed Speed Should be between 100 .. 2000.
** WARNING ** Gap Exceeds Max. Value (50 mm). Set to 50. ** During Set Gap routine.
** WARNING ** Check Distance Below Min. Distance (600 mm). Set to 600. **
*** ERROR *** Lower Limit SW Error....(DOWN). ***
*** ERROR *** Lower Limit Error.... (UP). ***
*** ERROR *** Carriage Down Error.. *** Time-out error during carriage moving down.
*** ERROR *** Lower Limit SW-ON Error.... ***
TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL
5 - 14 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3. Troubleshooting based on Image Quality Control
The purpose of this troubleshooting is to show and recognize the image defects (due to machine failures) one can encounter when printing.
This section discuss the following errors:
! Encoder (MARK) Error,
! Black Strips,
! Waves on the Media Surface
! Only UNI MODE Output,
! Image Quality Failure,
! Spray on your Image,
! Print Length Exceeds Maximum Platen Length.
3.1. Encoder (MARK) Error
3.1.1. Description
This is when there are no images, even though the head is moving.
3.1.2. Action
1 Clean the linear scale (encoder strip) with acetone.
Refer to �Inspecting and Cleaning the Encoder Strip� on page 4-24 (chapter Preventive Maintenance).
2 Adjust the distance between the encoder and the linear scale using the 0.5 mm gap gauge in order to maintain a regular gap.
Refer to �Adjusting the depth between encoder head an linear scale� on page 4-32 (chapter Preventive Maintenance).
3 Check the flashing of the ENC LED and MARK LED at the MAIN PCB:
Refer to �Testing the number of pulses the encoder reader counts� on page 4-30 (chapter Preven-tive Maintenance).
NOTE: For detailed information, refer to the Image Artefacts Book where you can find for each artefact a sample, a description, a cause and a solution to be solved by either the operator or the service technician.
TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 5 - 15 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3.2. Black Strips
3.2.1. Description
Black stripes appears on the image.
3.2.2. Action
1 Check whether there is an Encoder error
See �Encoder (MARK) Error� on page 5-14.
2 Check whether there is a FPGA PCB error
2.1 Check the connection with the MAIN PCB (J10).
2.2 Check the Data LED flashing.
For more information, refer to �FPGA PCB� on page 1-102 (chapter Functional Description).
3 Check whether there is a PCI CARD error
3.1 Check configuration (DI: 1, DO: 17.000).
3.2 Check the connection with the FPGA PCB (J8-Connection to PCI I/O card CN1 and J7- Connection to PCI I/O card CN2).
3.3 Check whether the PCI I/O card is fixed correctly on the PC Main board slot.Direct connection between PC main board and the FPGA PCB via PCI I/O card.
For more information, refer to �FPGA PCB� on page 1-102 (chapter Functional Description).
4 Execute a grounding check between MAIN, HEAD PCB + 24V, chassy G
3.3. Waves on the Media Surface
3.3.1. Description
When using weak print media, it is possible that due to the heat generated by the UV lamp waves appears on the media surface during the print process.
TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL
5 - 16 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3.3.2. Action
When printing with weak print media, increase the head base height (> 3mm).
Refer to �Automatic head base height setup� on page 1-57 (chapter Functional Description).
3.4. Only UNI MODE Output
3.4.1. Action
1 Check encoder.
Refer to �Encoder Checking� on page 4-25 (chapter Preventive Maintenance).
2 Check the resolution at RIP program.
When �RTL FILE generated, check �RTL resolution� and �S/W printing pass�.
3.5. Image Quality Failure
3.5.1. Description
Reduced printing quality in general.
3.5.2. Action
Execute one or more of the following checks:
1 Check the pressure distribution.
Adjust all pressure values to the pressure values indicated on each sticker.
For more information, refer to �Negative Pressure Setting� on page 1-27 (chapter Functional Description).
2 Check the head ejecting voltage.
Check whether each print head voltage is set up to the regulated voltage values for that color.
For more information, refer to �Adjusting the Head Voltage� on page 3-92 (chapter Repair and Service)
TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 5 - 17 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3 Check calibration (BI, STEP).
3.1 Bi-Dir Alignment control.
Increase setting values, move to purge position.Decrease setting values, move to home position.
3.2 Step Size (Media Feed) control.
If output overlap, increase value. If the opposite way, decrease value.
For more information, refer to
! �Bi-Dir Alignment� on page 1-82 (chapter Functional Description).
! �Step Size (Media Feed)� on page 1-82 (chapter Functional Description).
! �Software Alignment of the Print Head� on page 3-95 (chapter Repair and Service).
4 Check carriage speed:
Inferior output quality can be caused by overspeed. Adjust the carriage speed to an optimal quality speed.
For more information, refer to �Carriage Speed� on page 1-83 (chapter Functional Description)
5 Check the head base height and the levelling of the engine.
For more information, refer to:
! �Head Gap Control� on page 1-84 (chapter Functional Description).
! �Engine Level� on page 4-75 (chapter Preventive Maintenance).
6 Check whether the ink is cured. If not:
! UV lamp life span can be expired.
! Check UV lamp power and cooling time.
7 Check the sub ink tank temperature and the head base temperature.
For more information, refer to:
! �Sub ink tank (6C + White)� on page 1-50 (chapter Functional Description).
! �Head Base Temperature Control� on page 1-63 (chapter Functional Description).
TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL
5 - 18 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
3.6. Spray on your Image
3.6.1. Description
Spray on your image when jetting ink, caused by a too high head base temperature e.g. > 38°C.
3.6.2. Action
When the head base plate temperature is too high (> 38°C) during printing, do the following:
1 Stop printing at the end of the current print job.
2 Switch off the UV-lamps.
3 Run the Encoder Test for 5 minutes (refer to �Encoder Count Test� on page 1-89).
As a result, the head carriage unit will now move continuously without printing, allowing the head base plate to cool down.
For more information about the head base plate temperature, refer to �Head Base Temperature Control� on page 1-63 (chapter Functional Description).
3.7. Print Length Exceeds Maximum Platen Length
3.7.1. Description
When you are trying to print a file at the maximum specified width you might encounter the error message "Print Length Exceeds Max. Platen Length" when you start the print job.
This means that the Anapurna calculates the amount of Left Margin Offset + ripped image width + Mark Center Offset value (additional travel of head carriage unit) and decides that it cannot execute the print command since this length exceeds the maximum travel distance of the head carriage unit.
3.7.2. Action
3 3
3
2
1
TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 5 - 19 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
To solve this problem:
1 Increase the value for the Left Margin Offset (2) in order for the print to start at the leading edge of the media.
Left Margin Offset shifts the origin (where the heads start to print) to the left when the value is increased. It is a permanently enabled Left Margin Offset.
2 Decrease the value for the Mark Center Offset (3) with a certain amount to reduce the extra travel (e.g. 5000 --> 0).
3 Increase the Bi-Dir Alignment value (1) with the exact same amount (-4960 -->+40).
Mark Center Offset = the extra distance the head carriage unit travels in the fastscan direction after the last dots are printed. By increasing this value you can make sure that the head carriage unit and UV lamp completely surpass the substrate.
E.g.: The Mark Center Offset value is default set to 5000. A value of 2500 pulses means that the head carriage unit travels 5 cm past the last cured area. A value of 5000 means that the head carriage unit surpasses the print 10 cm before returning for the next pass.
You will notice that the Bi-Dir Alignment value is set to a value of -5000. This is no coincidence since the head carriage unit also needs a delay of 5000 units before it starts laying down dots on its return pass. When the Bi-Dir Alignment would be set to 0, it would indicate that the heads start firing immediately without delay on its return pass. This would result in the bidir being way off.
If the head carriage unit moves 5000 marks after the last printed dot, the head carriage unit needs to be delayed 5000 marks when on its return pass. So if you decide to increase Mark Center Offset you will need to decrease the Bi-Dir Alignment value with the same amount. The exact value will not be -5000 but e.g.. -4960 because of difference in head carriage unit speed and head gap.
So increasing the Mark Center Offset from 5000 to 15000 means decreasing the bidir from -4960 to -14960.
The Bi-Dir Alignment can be found in the Setup Parameters window. The Left Margin Offset and the Mark Center Offset can be found in the Factory Data Setting window.
For more information about accessing the Setup Parameters window and the Factory Data Setting window, refer to �Anapurna Control Program� on page 1-80 (chapter Functional Description).
TROUBLESHOOTING UV LAMP TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 20 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
4. UV Lamp Troubleshooting
Go through the troubleshooting flow diagram below to find out were the problem is situated and to solve the problem.
UV lampOperation Process
Main Power ON
�Lamp WarmTime Check
Printing
Repair Or Change
Repair Or Change
Program Download
Push Start Button
�Servo / ControlCircuit Breaker
CheckMCCB #5
�Increase bulk or
connectseparately
�Reset Button Pushand Relay CableCheck or replace
MC1
�Ground Or Cable
Check
�Lamp Power
Circuit BreakerCheck
MCCB #2
�UV Lamp PowerUnit Switch ON
Main Software
Invoking
Replace Fuse
�Power unit to
Housing CableConnector
Printing Prepare
�Main
Circuit Breaker (50A)ON?
��
Lamp ON?
�Lamp House
Cable ConnectionOK?
Lamp OK?
�Main to
Lamp Power Control Cable Check
OK?
�Main PLC
Connection CheckOK?
�Main PLC
Program CheckOK?
�Lamp PLC
Program CheckOK?
�MC1�
Circuit Breaker (50A) ON?
�Lamp Power
Circuit BreakerON?
�UV Lamp
Power Unit Power LEDON?
PrintingReady?
��Leakage Test
�A
�B
�END
�B
�Reset Button Pushand Relay CableCheck or replace
MC1
�Check Power
Cable Connection
�Power unit to
Housing CableConnector Check
�Power bulk�Check OK?
Fuse Broken?
�Cable�
ConnectorOK?
Check Power bulk
Check
�A
��
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
nono
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
SERVO MOTOR DRIVER TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 5 - 21 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
5. Servo Motor Driver Troubleshooting
The table below gives an overview of the servo motor driver error alarms.
No. Start-up sequence Fault Investigation Possible cause
1 Power on � LED is not lit.� LED flickers.
Not improved is connectors CN1A, CN1B, CN2 and CN3 are disconnected.
1. Power supply voltage fault.2. Servo amplifier is faulty.
Improved when connectors CN1A and CN1B are discon-nected.
Power supply of CNP1 cabling is shorted.
Improved when connector CN2 is disconnected.
1. Power supply of encoder cabling is shorted.2. Encoder is faulty.
Improved when connector CN3 is disconnected.
Power supply of CN3 cabling is shorted.
Alarm occurs.
2 Switch on servo-on sig-nal
Alarm occurs.
Servo motor shaft is not servo-locked (is free).
1. Check the display to see if the servo amplifier is ready to operate.2. Check the external I/O sig-nal indication to see if the servo-on (SON) signal is ON.
1. Servo-on signal is not input.(Wiring mistake)2. 24VDC power is not supplied to COM.
3 Gain adjustment Rotation ripples (speed fluctuations) are large at low speed.
Make gain adjustment in the following procedure:1. Increase the auto tuning response level.2. Repeat acceleration and deceleration several times to complete auto tuning.
Gain adjustment fault.
Large load inertia moment causes the servo motor shaft to oscillate side to side.
If the servo motor may be run with safety, repeat accelera-tion and deceleration several times to complete auto tun-ing.
Gain adjustment fault.
4 Cyclic operation Position shift occurs. Confirm the cumulative com-mand pulses and actual servo motor position.
Pulse counting error, etc. due to noise.
TROUBLESHOOTING SERVO MOTOR DRIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 22 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
Display
(Note 2) Alarm code
Name
Alarm deactivation
CN1B-19 pin
CN1A-18 pin
CN1A-19 pin
Power OFF"ON
Press �SET� on current
alarm screen
alarm reset (RES) signal
Ala
rm
AL. 10 0 1 0 Undervoltage O O O
AL. 12 0 0 0 Memory error 1 O
AL. 13 0 0 0 Clock error O
AL. 15 0 0 0 Memory error 2 O
AL. 16 1 1 0 Encoder error 1 O
AL. 17 0 0 0 Board error O
AL. 19 0 0 0 Memory error 3 O
AL. 1A 1 1 0 Motor combination error O
AL. 20 1 1 0 Encoder error 2 O
AL. 24 1 0 0 Main circuit error O
AL. 25 1 1 0 Absolute position erase O
AL. 30 0 0 1 Regenerative error O (NOTE 1) O (NOTE 1) O (NOTE 1)
AL. 31 1 0 1 Overspeed O O O
AL. 32 1 0 0 Overcurrent O O O
AL. 33 0 0 1 Overvoltage O
AL. 35 1 01 1 Command pulse frequency error O O O
AL. 37 0 0 0 Parameter error O
AL. 39 0 0 0 Program error O
AL. 45 0 1 1 Main circuit device overheat O O O
AL. 46 0 1 1 Servo motor overheat O O O
AL. 50 0 1 1 Overload 1 O (NOTE 1) O (NOTE 1) O (NOTE 1)
AL. 51 0 1 1 Overload 2 O (NOTE 1) O (NOTE 1) O (NOTE 1)
AL. 52 1 0 1 Error excessive O O O
AL. 63 1 0 1 Home position return incomplete O O O
AL. 64 1 0 1 Home position setting error O O O
AL. 8A 0 0 0 Serial communication time-out error O O O
AL. 8E 0 0 0 Serial communication error O O O
88888 0 0 0 Watchdog O
War
ning
AL. 92 Open battery cable warning
Removing the cause of occurrence deac-tivates the alarm automatically.
AL. 97 Program operation disable
AL. 98 Software limit warning
AL. 9F Battery warning
AL. E0 Excessive regenerative warning
AL. E1 Overload warning
AL. E3 Absolute position counter warning
AL. E6 Servo emergency stop warning
AL. E9 Main circuit off warning
NOTE: 1. Deactivate the alarm about 30 minutes of cooling time after removing the cause of occurrence.
NOTE: 2. 0: Pin-SG off (open)1: Pin-SG on (short)
SERVO MOTOR DRIVER TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 5 - 23 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
Display Name Definition Cause Action
AL. 10 Undervoltage Power supply voltage dropped.MR-J2S-"CL:
160VAC or lessMR-J2S-"CL1:
83 VAC or less
1. Power supply voltage is low. Review the power supply.
2. There was an instantaneous control power failure of 60ms or longer.
3. Shortage of power supply capacity caused the power supply voltage to drop at start, etc.
4. Power was restored after the bus voltage had dropped o 200VDC.(Main circuit power switched on within 5s after it had switched off.)
5. Faulty parts in the servo amplifier.Checking method
Alarm (AL. 10) occurs if power is switched on after disconnection of all cables but the con-trol circuit power supply cables.
Change the servo amplifier.
AL. 12 Memory error 1 RAM, memory fault Faulty parts in the servo amplifierChecking method
Alarm (any of AL. 11 and 13) occurs if power is switched on after disconnection of all cables but the control circuit power supply cables.
Change the servo amplifier.
AL. 13 Clock error Printed board fault
AL. 15 Memory error 2 EEP-ROM fault 1. Faulty parts in the servo amplifierChecking method
Alarm (AL. 15) occurs if power is switched on after disconnection of all cables but the con-trol circuit power supply cables.
Change the servo amplifier.
2. The number of write times to EEP-ROM exceeded 100.000.
AL. 16 Encoder error 1 Communication error occurred between encoder and servo amplifier.
1. Encode connector (CN2) disconnected. Connect correctly.
2. Encoder fault Change the servo motor.
3. Encoder cable faulty (wire breakage or short)
Repair or change the cable.
AL. 17 Board error CPU/parts fault Faulty parts in the servo amplifierChecking method
Alarm (AL. 17 or A. 18) occurs if power is switched on after disconnection of all cables but the control circuit power supply cables.
Change the servo amplifier.
AL. 19 Memory error 3 ROM memory fault
AL. 1A Motor combination error
Wrong combination of servo amplifier and servo motor.
Wrong combination of servo amplifier and servo motor connected.
Use correct combination.
AL. 20 Encoder error 2 Communication error occurred between encoder and servo amplifier.
1. Encoder connector (CN2) disconnected. Connect correctly.
2. Encoder fault change the servo motor.
3. Encoder cable faulty (wire breakage or shortage)
Repair or change the cable.
AL. 24 Main circuit error Ground fault occurred at the servo motor outputs (U, V and W phases) of the servo amplifier.
1. Power input wires and servo motor output wires are in contact at main circuit terminal block (TE1).
Connect correctly.
2. Sheathes of servo motor power cables dete-riorated, resulting in ground fault.
Change the cable.
3. Main circuit of servo amplifier failedChecking method
AL. 24 occurs if the servo is switched on after disconnecting the U, V, W power cables from the servo amplifier.
Change the servo amplifier.
TROUBLESHOOTING SERVO MOTOR DRIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 24 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
AL. 25 Absolute position erase Absolute position data in error.
1. Reduced voltage of super capacitor in encoder.
After leaving the alarm occurring for a few minutes, switch power off, then on again. Always make home position setting again.
2. Battery voltage low. Change battery.Always make home position setting again.
3. Battery cable or battery is faulty.
Power was switched on for the first time in the absolute position detection system.
4. Super capacitor of the absolute position encoder is not charged.
After leaving the alarm occurring for a few minutes, switch power off, then on again. Always make home position setting again.
AL. 30 Regenerative alarm Permissible regenera-tive power of built-in regenerative brake resistor or regenera-tive brake option is exceeded.
1. Wrong setting of parameter No. 0 Set correctly.
2. Built-in regenerative brake resistor or regenerative brake option is not connected.
Connect correctly.
3. High-duty operation or continuous regener-ative operation caused the permissible regen-erative power of the regenerative brake option to be exceeded.
Checking methodCall the status display and check the regener-ative load ratio.
1. Reduce the frequency of position-ing.2. Use the regenerative brake option of larger capacity3. Reduce the load.
4. Power supply voltage is abnormal.MR-J2S-"CL: 260VAC or more.MR-J2S-"CL1: 135VAC or more.
Review power supply
5. Built-in regenerative brake resistor or regenerative brake option faulty.
Change servo amplifier or regenera-tive brake option.
Regenerative transis-tor fault
6. Regenerative transistor faulty.Checking method
1) The regenerative brake option has over-heated abnormally.2) The alarm occurs even after removal of the built-in regenerative brake resistor or regen-erative brake option.
Change the servo amplifier.
AL. 31 Overspeed Speed has exceeded the instantaneous per-missible speed.
1. Input command pulse frequency exceeded the permissible instantaneous speed fre-quency.
Set command pulses correctly.
2. Small acceleration/deceleration time con-stant caused overshoot to be large.
Increase acceleration/deceleration time constant.
3. Servo system is instable to cause over-shoot.
1. Re-set servo gain to proper value.2. If servo gain cannot be set to proper value:
1) Reduce load inertia moment ratio, or
2) Reexamine acceleration/deceleration constant.
4. Electronic gear ratio is large (parameters No. 4, 5).
Set correctly.
5. Encoder faulty. Change the servo motor.
Display Name Definition Cause Action
SERVO MOTOR DRIVER TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 5 - 25 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
AL. 32 Overcurrent Current that flew is higher than the per-missible current of the servo amplifier.
1. Short occurred in servo amplifier output phases U, V and W.
Correct the wiring.
2. Transistor (IPM) of the servo amplifier faulty.
Checking methodAlarm (AL. 32) occurs if power is switched on after U, V and W are disconnected.
Change the servo amplifier.
3. Ground fault occurred in servo amplifier output phases U, V and W.
Correct the wiring.
4. External noise caused the overcurrent detection circuit to misoperate.
Take noise suppression measures.
AL. 33 Overvoltage Converter bus voltage exceeded 400VDC.
1. Lead of built-in regenerative brake resistor or regenerative brake option is open or dis-connected.
1. Change lead.2. Connect correctly.
2. Regenerative transistor faulty. Change servo amplifier.
3. Wire breakage of built-in regenerative brake resistor or regenerative brake option.
1. For wire breakage of built-in regenerative brake resistor, change servo amplifier.2. For wire breakage of regenerative brake option, change regenerative brake option.
4. Capacity of built-in regenerative brake resistor or regenerative brake option is insuffi-cient.
Add regenerative brake option or increase capacity.
5. Power supply voltage high. Review the power supply.
AL. 35 Command pulse fre-quency error
Input pulse frequency of the command pulse is too high.
1. Pulse frequency of the manual pulse gener-ator is too high.
Change the pulse frequency to a proper value.
2. Noise entered the pulses of the manual pulse generator.
Take action against noise.
3. Manual pulse generator failure. Change the manual pulse generator.
AL. 37 Parameter error Parameter setting is wrong.
1. Servo amplifier fault caused the parameter setting to be rewritten.
Change the servo amplifier
2. Regenerative brake option not used with servo amplifier was selected in parameter No. 0.
Set parameter No. 0 correctly.
3. Value outside setting range has been set in some parameter.
Set the parameter correctly.
4. Value outside setting range has been set in electronic gear.
Set parameters No. 4, 5 correctly.
5. Opposite sign has been set in software limit increasing side (parameters No. 46, 47). Similarly, opposite sign has been set in soft-ware limit decreasing side (parameters No. 48, 49)
Set parameters No. 46 to 49 cor-rectly.
6. Opposite sign has been set in position range output address increasing side (parame-ters No. 50, 51). Similarly, opposite sign has been set in position range output address decreasing side (parameters No. 52, 53)
Set parameters No. 50 to 53 cor-rectly.
7. The number of write times to EEP-ROM exceeded 100,000 due to parameter write, program write, etc.
Change the servo amplifier.
Display Name Definition Cause Action
TROUBLESHOOTING SERVO MOTOR DRIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 26 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
AL. 39 Program error Program data is abnor-mal
1. Servo amplifier fault caused the program data to be rewritten.
Change the servo amplifier.
2. Command argument is out of the setting range.
Programming correctly.
3. The number of write times to EEP-ROM exceeded 100,000 due to parameter write, program write, etc.
Change the servo amplifier.
AL. 45 Main circuit device overheat
Main circuit device overheat
1. Servo amplifier faulty. Change the servo amplifier.
2. The power supply was turned on and off continuously by overloaded status.
The drive method is reviewed.
3. Air cooling fan of servo amplifier stops. 1. Exchange the cooling fan or the servo amplifier.2. Reduce ambient temperature.
AL. 46 Servo motor overheat Servo motor tempera-ture rise actuated the thermal protector.
1. Ambient temperature of servo motor is over 40°C.
Review environment so that ambient temperature is 0 to 40°C.
2. Servo motor is overloaded. 1. Reduce load.2. Review operation pattern.3. Use servo motor that provides larger output.
3. Thermal protector in encoder is faulty. Change servo motor.
AL. 50 Overload 1 Load exceeded over-load protection char-acteristic of servo amplifier.
1. Servo amplifier is used in excess of its con-tinuous output current.
1. Reduce load.2. Review operation pattern.3. Use servo motor that provides larger output.
2. Servo system is instable and hunting. 1. Repeat acceleration/deceleration to execute auto tuning.2. Change auto tuning response set-tings3. Set auto tuning to OFF and make gain adjustment manually.
3. Machine struck something. 1. Review operation pattern.2. Install limit switch.
4. Wrong connection of servo motor. Servo amplifier�s output terminals U, V, W do not match servo motor�s input terminals U, V, W.
Connect correctly.
5. Encoder faulty.Checking method
When the servo motor shaft is rotated with the servo off, the cumulative feedback pulses do not vary in proportion to the rotary angle of the shaft but the indication skips or returns midway.
Change the servo motor.
Display Name Definition Cause Action
SERVO MOTOR DRIVER TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 5 - 27 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
AL. 51 Overload 2 Machine collision or the like caused max. output current to flow successively for sev-eral seconds.Servo motor locked:
1s or moreDuring rotation:
2.5s or more
1. Machine struck something. 1. Review operation pattern.2. Install limit switches.
2. Wrong connection of servo motor. Servo amplifier�s output terminals U, V, W do not match servo motor�s input terminals U, V, W.
Connect correctly.
3. Servo system is instable and hunting. 1. Repeat acceleration/deceleration to execute auto tuning.2. Change auto tuning response set-ting.3. Set auto tuning to OFF and make gain adjustment manually.
4. Encoder faulty.Checking method
When the servo motor shaft is rotated with the servo off, the cumulative feedback pulses do not vary in proportion to the rotary angle of the shaft but the indication skips or returns midway.
Change the servo motor.
AL. 52 Error excessive The droop pulse value of the deviation counter exceeded 2.5 rotations.
1. Acceleration/deceleration time constant is too small.
Increase the acceleration/decelera-tion time constant.
2. Internal torque limit 1 (parameter No. 28) is too small.
Increase the torque limit value.
3. Motor cannot be started due to torque shortage caused by power supply voltage drop.
1. Review the power supply capacity.2. Use servo motor which provides larger output.
4. Position control gain 1 (parameter No. 7) is small.
Increase set value and adjust to ensure proper operation.
5. Servo motor shaft was rotated by external force.
1. When torque is limited, increase the limit value.2. Reduce load.3. Use servo motor that provides larger output.
6. Machine struck something. 1. Review operation pattern.2. Install limit switches.
7. Encoder faulty. Change the servo motor.
8. Wrong connection of servo motor. Servo amplifier�s output terminals U, V, W do not match servo motor�s input terminals U, V, W.
Connect correctly.
AL. 63 Home position return incomplete
In incremental sys-tem:1. Positioning opera-tion was performed without home position return.2. Home position return ended abnor-mally.
1. Positioning operation was performed with-out home position return.2. Home position return speed could not be decreased to creep speed.3. Limit switch was actuated during home position return starting at other than position beyond dog.
1. Perform home position return.2. Review home position return speed/creep speed/moving distance after proximity dog.
In absolute position detection system:1. Positioning opera-tion was performed without home position setting.2. Home position set-ting ended abnor-mally.
1. Positioning operation was performed with-out home position setting.2. Home position setting speed could not be decreased to creep speed.3. Limit switch was actuated during home position setting starting at other than position beyond dog.
1. Perform home position setting.2. Review home position setting speed/creep speed/moving distance after proximity dog.
Display Name Definition Cause Action
TROUBLESHOOTING SERVO MOTOR DRIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 28 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
AL. 64 Home position setting error
Home position set-ting could not be made.
1. Droop pulses remaining are greater than the in-position range setting.
Remove the cause of droop pulse occurrence.
2. Command pulse entered after clearing of droop pulses.
Do not enter command pulse after clearing of droop pulses.
3. Creep speed high. Reduce creep speed.
AL. 8A Serial communication time-out error
RS-232C or RS-422 communication stopped for longer than the time set in parameter No. 23.
1. Communication cable breakage. Repair or change communication cable.
2. Communication cycle longer than parame-ter No. 23 setting.
Set correct value in parameter.
3. Wrong protocol. Correct protocol.
AL. 8E Serial communication error
Serial communication error occurred between servo ampli-fier and communica-tion device (e.g. personal computer)
1. Communication cable fault (open cable or short circuit)
Repair or change the cable
2. Communication device (e.g. personal com-puter) faulty.
Change the communication device (e.g. personal computer).
88888 Watchdog CPU, parts faulty Fault of parts in servo amplifierChecking method
Alarm (88888) occurs if power is switched on after disconnection of all cables but the con-trol circuit power supply cables.
Change the servo amplifier.
AL. 92 Open battery cable warning
Absolute position detection system bat-tery voltage is low.
1. Battery cable is open. Repair cable or changed.
2. Battery voltage dropped to 2.8V or less. Change battery.
AL. 97 Program operation dis-able
Program was started in a program opera-tion disable status.
After a program change, the program was started without the servo amplifier being powered off/on.
Power off/on the servo amplifier.
AL. 98 Software limit warning Software limit set in parameter is reached.
1. Software limit was set within actual opera-tion range.
Set parameter No. 48 to 51 correctly.
2. Program of position data in excess of soft-ware limit was executed.
Set program correctly.
3. Software limit was reached during JOG operation or manual pulse generator opera-tion.
Perform operation within software limit range.
AL. 9F Battery warning Voltage of battery for absolute position detection system reduced.
Battery voltage fell to 3.2V or less. Change the battery.
AL. EO Excessive regenerative warning
There is a possibility that regenerative power may exceed permissible regenera-tive power of built-in regenerative brake resistor or regenera-tive brake option.
Regenerative power increased to 85% or more of permissible regenerative power of built-in regenerative brake resistor or regenerative brake option.
Checking methodCall the status display and check regenerative load ratio.
1. Reduce frequency of positioning.2. Change regenerative brake option for the one with larger capacity.3. Reduce load.
AL. E1 Overload warning There is a possibility that overload alarm 1 or 2 may occur.
Load increased to 85% or more of overload alarm 1 or 2 occurrence level.
Cause, checking methodRefer to AL. 50, 51.
Refer to AL. 50, AL. 51.
Display Name Definition Cause Action
SERVO MOTOR DRIVER TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 5 - 29 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
AL. E3 Absolute position counter warning
Absolute position encoder pulses faulty.
1. Noise entered the encoder. Take noise suppression measures.
2. Encoder faulty Change the servo motor.
AL. E6 Servo forced stop warn-ing
EMG-SG are open. External forced stop was made valid.(EMG-SG opened)
Ensure safety and deactivate forced stop.
AL. E9 Main circuit off warn-ing
Servo was switched on with main circuit power off.
Switch on main circuit power.
Display Name Definition Cause Action
TROUBLESHOOTING SERVO MOTOR DRIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 30 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
CHAPTER
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 6 - 1:Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
6 Glossary
This chapter describes definitions and abbreviations used throughout the Service Manual which you may not be familiar with.
GLOSSARY GLOSSARY
6 - 2 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
! Compressed Air
An external air compressor delivers compressed air which is required for operating pneumatical parts and other specific functions of teh Anapurna.
! Interlock
Interlock switches are a safety feature for protecting the operator against hazards. It is forbidden to bypass these safety interlocks.
! MSDS
Material Safety Data Sheet. For the chemical products or consumables being used, the supplier should provide MSDS�s. E.g. for ink, these data sheets will mention the hazards, handling and storage conditions.
! Nozzle
This is a microscopic opening from which an individual ink drop is jetted.in order to check if all nozzles are OK, you can print a special test job called �Nozzle Test�.
! Ozone
Triatomic oxygen or ozone (O3) is formed by oxygen being exposed to a high voltage and to wave lengths lower than 210 nm of UV energy. Ozone creates a barrier that absorbs the UV energy, resulting in a degradation of the UV curing.
! Purging
The maintenance and cleaning procedure includes purging of the ink. During this cleaning cycle, a small amount of ink is purged through one or more inkjet heads, if necessary e.g. to solve a problem of failing nozzles.
! UV Curing
Ultraviolet curing is a photochemical process in which UV energy is produced by a discharge lamp and focused at monomers in the ink, causing polymerization. Th ink contains phot-initiators to start the curing process.
CHAPTER
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 1:Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
7 Annex
This chapter gives an overview of the diagrams and printed circuit boards of the Anapurna L/XL. Finally, you can find a spare parts list.
1. Pneumatic Diagrams ............................................................................................................................................. 7 - 31.1. Pneumatic Diagram ................................................................................................................................. 7 - 5
2. Electrical Diagrams ................................................................................................................................................ 7 - 72.1. Main Power Distribution in the Electrical Circuit Panel ............................................................ 7 - 92.2. Power Supply Distribution - 3 Phase with neutral with ground star 380V (EU) ............ 7 - 112.3. Power Supply Distribution - 3 Phase no neutral with ground delta 208-240V (US) .... 7 - 132.4. UV Lamp Power Box Connections ................................................................................................... 7 - 152.5. UV Lamp Power Circuit ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 172.6. UV Lamp Head Part ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 192.7. UV Lamp Power Cables ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 21
3. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Block Diagram .......................................................................... 7 - 233.1. Main PLC ................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 253.2. UV Lamp PLC ........................................................................................................................................... 7 - 27
4. Printed Circuit Boards ........................................................................................................................................ 7 - 294.1. Total PCB Diagram Layout ................................................................................................................. 7 - 314.2. MAIN PCB ................................................................................................................................................. 7 - 334.3. FPGA PCB ................................................................................................................................................. 7 - 354.4. HEAD PCB ................................................................................................................................................. 7 - 374.5. REFILL PCB ............................................................................................................................................... 7 - 394.6. CARTRIDGE PCB ..................................................................................................................................... 7 - 414.7. HEAD LIFT PCB ........................................................................................................................................ 7 - 434.8. ITV CONTROLLER PCB .......................................................................................................................... 7 - 454.9. SUB PCB .................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 474.10. IF PCB ...................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 494.11. I/O PCB .................................................................................................................................................. 7 - 514.12. TAKE UP PCB ........................................................................................................................................ 7 - 534.13. REFILL CONTROL PCB ........................................................................................................................ 7 - 554.14. INDICATOR PCB ................................................................................................................................... 7 - 574.15. DRIVER COMMUNICATION PCB .................................................................................................... 7 - 59
5.
ANNEX ANNEX
7 - 2 2007 V1.0 - Service ManualCompany Confidential :Anapurna L/XL
PNEUMATIC DIAGRAMS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 3 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
1. Pneumatic Diagrams
Overview pneumatic diagrams:
! Pneumatic Diagram
PNEUMATIC DIAGRAMS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 5 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
1.1. Pneumatic Diagram
R
P
A
Air Tank
Waste TankOver-flow Sig.
Setting Press UV lamp0.10 - 0.15 MPa
Air Filter # 1
Air Filter # 2
EBEA
A
P
B
EBEA
A
P
B
� �
INOUT
Media set Cylinders
Media Hold Front/Rear Cylinders
0.3 MPa 0.15 MPa
Setting Press Carriage
Setting Press CarriageSetting Press Carriage
0.03 MPa
VACUUMEJECTOR
Purge S/WSig.
Purge S/W Sig.
EBEA
A
P
B
EBEA
A
P
B
Lamp Shutter Left/Right Cylinders
I/O PC B Sig. I/O PC B Sig.
4f Air Tube
A P
R
SU P OU T
P A R
P
A
P A
R
PCB
E/PRegulator
Float Sensor Sig.
Float SensorSig.
Pressure Sig.Float SensorSig.
PSE531-M5
Checkvalve
Checkvalve
SOLUTIONSUB-TANK
SOLUTIONBAR
MAIN WASTEINKTANK
SUBAIR
TANK
INKTANK
T
Carriage Part
Main Air Press.0.4 - 0.8 MPa
Max. Press. 2MPaCapacity 0.005M3
Setting Press0.6 MPa
0.3 - 0.7 MPaPurge Sig.
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 7 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2. Electrical Diagrams
Overview electrical diagrams:
! Main Power Distribution in the Electrical Circuit Panel
! Power Supply Distribution - 3 Phase with neutral with ground star 380V (EU)
! Power Supply Distribution - 3 Phase no neutral with ground delta 208-240V (US)
! UV Lamp Power Box Connections
! UV Lamp Power Circuit
! UV Lamp Head Part
! UV Lamp Power Cables
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 9 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.1. Main Power Distribution in the Electrical Circuit Panel
PE
P1
N
N
L31L1
T-L3
L42
P1
L21
P1
6-3
T-NL3
N
L11
PEP3
L41
P11
PE
L3
Green
L23
1-4
T-L3
L2
L21
RELAY #2-4
L1
T-N
W1
GND
V2
N
PE
L1
L3
N
P2
P3
L2
L3
T-L3N
T-L3
L42
W2
L23
PE
5-3
P22
L51
T-N
PE
Green
PE
PE
L52
P22
P3U1
T-N L1
L52
L2
L2 T-L3L1
P11
N
Green
PE 24V
G
L41
2-1
T-N
L32
P22
RELAY #3-4
PE
PE
L11
L2
2-2
L1
P23
P2
L1
L51
L32
Green
L22
P2
L2
N
L33
U2
L1
4-3
T-L3
T-N
PE
N
L33
P22
L22
P23
3-2
L3L3
SMPS GND
V1P22
5-2
L31
L3
NN
N
N
NE
ER
G
24V
1L
1-1
GND
3PHASE AC380V , 50/60Hz POWER IN
NE
ER
GC3 )ERAUQS 5.3(21# GWA
24V
N
2-3
2-41-4
NE
ER
G
C3 )ERAUQS 5.3(21# GWA
GREEN - METAL BASE TERMINAL
3L-T
RESTART BUTTON
AWG #10 (5.5 SQ) Black
GND
MOTOR
DRIVE_F
AWG #8 (7.5 sqar) 5C
C3 )ERAUQS 5.3(21# GWA
3.
1
3L
Teflon AWG #14 (2 sqar) Black
3
RING
BLOWER
5
96
: SHORT BAR
C4 )ERAUQS 5.3(21# GWA
1L
2-1
3
C4 )ERAUQS 5.3(21# GWA
24V
Ground- Green/Yellow 8AWG
EMERGENCYSWITCH
3L-T
4
N-T
AWG #8 (7.5 SQ) Black
TERMINAL600V-80A
4
GND
95
AWG #12(3.5 SQUARE) 3C
44
NE
ER
G
NE
ER
G
AWG #8 (7.5 Sq) Black
5
1L
3
AWG #10 (5.5 SQ) Black
1.
NE
ER
G
96
CONTROL
RACK
MOTOR
DRIVE_C
3L
RING
BLOWER
UV LAMP
POWER
51
2.
4.
43
2L
2-2
2L
NE
ER
G
AWG #8 (7.5 Sq) Black
C3 )ERAUQS 5.5(21# GWA
1-2
TERMINAL600V-55A
2 STAGE TERMINAL 300V-30A
95
DC line -Teflon AWG #20(0.5 sqar) Blue Wire USED
NE
ER
G
N-T
4
5.
TERMINAL600V-55A
1-3
1
2 STAGE TERMINAL
AWG #86.
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 11 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.2. Power Supply Distribution - 3 Phase with neutral with ground star 380V (EU)
3P2P1P
BCP DAEHGNITAEH
ETIHW,)7-5(+42CD6
BCP VTI
KCALB,)4-5(-42CD4
ETIHW,)3-5(+42CD3
10-LVU
CLPS08 K -RETSAM
SPMS5#
DAEHBCP TFIL ESAB
CLPC2 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
DIP2# RELLORTNOC
C2 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
DER,)7-5(+5CD6
-V42CD
RETAEH
C6 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
C4 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
BCP LLIFER
ETIHW,)1-5(+42CD5
WOLLEY,)6-5(+021CD2
SPMS2#
+V42CD
C2 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
,KCALB LLA ( ELBAC CA 01#GWA ,)NEERG : EP , + : ETIHW( ELBAC CD 61#GWA ,) - : KCALB
DAEH
SPMS6#
KCALB,)51-1(-42CD6
10-RVU
ETIHW,)6-5(+021CD1
BCP F/I
2HC
DER,)6-5(+42CD3
25L
DER,)51-1(+5CD6
ETIHW,)51-1(+42CD6
SPMS4#
DIP1# RELLORTNOC
EP
NEERG,)7-5(-5CD6
ETIHW,)5-5(+42CD3
+V5CD
BCP DAEH
KCALB,)1-5(-42CD5
KCALB,)5-5(-42CD3
10-HVU
S06RD-M7K
BCP DAEHGNIRIF KNI
CIGOL
EP
KCALB,)2-5(-42CD4
1HC
BCP AGPF/NIAM
C4 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
C6 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
15L
ETIHW,)4-5(+42CD4
10-FVU / 10-MVU
BCP BUS
NWORB,)6-5(-021CD1
NEERG,)51-1(-5CD6
KCALB,)3-5(-42CD3
NEERG,)6-5(-021CD2
15L
10-SVU
C2 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
-V5CD
10-AVU
ETIHW,)2-5(+42CD4
SPMS3#
DIP3# RELLORTNOC25L
KCALB,)6-5(-42CD3
10-IVU
SPMS1#
C6 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
KCALB,)7-5(-42CD6
ESAHP-3(1# BCLE)A05,V083CA
N
2# EVIRD OVRES
2L
zH06/05 ,V083CA ESAHP-3
DEEFW004 ROTOM OVRES-CA
ELBAC FTCV 21#GWA)KCALB(
1# EVIRD OVRES
metsyS cinortcelE margaiD tiucriC
A-CM
1L
11P
CDV42+
V42 CD
EGAIRRACW057 ROTOM OVRES-CA
DNG 2 OME
W/S CP
ELBAC FTCV 21#GWA)KCALB(
TRATSER
1 OME 3 OME
8# SPMS
SPMS-CPW003
CP ROTAREPO
N
4 OME
ELBAC FTCV 8#GWA)KCALB(
ERAUQS 5.5 = 01GWAERAUQS 5.3 = 21GWAERAUQS 0.2 = 41GWAERAUQS 52.1 = 61GWAERAUQS 0.1 = 81GWA
x x xx xx x- - -- -- -
) oN elbaC ( ----| | | | || | | |
) - / + ( leveL -------| | | | | | |
)V5/V42(EGATLOV ---------| | || |
)CD/CA(ECRUOS REWOP --------------| ||
.oN SPMS -----------------|
22P 32P 22P
N
22P
N
3L
)KCALB( ELBAC FTCV 01#GWA
)A03,V022CA(6# BCCM
ELBAC FTCV 01#GWA)KCALB(
ELBAC FTCV 01#GWA)KCALB(
ELBAC FTCV 01#GWA)KCALB(
)KCALB( ELBAC FTCV 01#GWA
2U
)A03 ,V022CA(5# BCCM
GP)A02,V083CA(3# BCCM
2V
1V
25L
)A02,V083CA(4# BCCM
TFEL _WOLB GNIR
15L
1U
DNG emarF rotoM
)A05,V022CA(2# BCCM
THGIR _WOLB GNIR
DNG emarF rotoM
32L
13L
21L
22L
24L
daolrevO lamrehT1# yaleR
1W
14L
daolrevO lamrehT2# yaleR
12L
11L
23L
33L
1L
2L3L
3L
2L
1L
2W
EP
1L
N
RETLIF ESION)A05(
3L
N
EP
EP
3L-T
N-T
EP
EP
EP
N-T
3L-T
EP
EP
N
N
212121
M
12
21
)A05(1# CM1 2 3
4 5 6
)L(PMAL VU
12
M
12
21
21
)A03(2# CM
1
2
3
4
5
6
M
12
)A03(2# CM
1
2
3
4
5
6
)R(PMAL VU
12
M
12
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 13 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.3. Power Supply Distribution - 3 Phase no neutral with ground delta 208-240V (US)
3P2P1P
BCP DAEHGNITAEH
ETIHW,)7-5(+42CD6
BCP VTI
KCALB,)4-5(-42CD4
ETIHW,)3-5(+42CD3
10-LVU
CLPS08 K -RETSAM
SPMS5#
DAEHBCP TFIL ESAB
CLP
C2 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
DIP2# RELLORTNOC
C2 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
DER,)7-5(+5CD6
-V42CD
RETAEH
C6 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
C4 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
BCP LLIFER
ETIHW,)1-5(+42CD5
WOLLEY,)6-5(+021CD2
SPMS2#
+V42CD
C2 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
,KCALB LLA ( ELBAC CA 01#GWA ,)NEERG : EP , + : ETIHW( ELBAC CD 61#GWA ,) - : KCALB
DAEH
SPMS6#
KCALB,)51-1(-42CD6
10-RVU
ETIHW,)6-5(+021CD1
BCP F/I
2HC
DER,)6-5(+42CD3
25L
DER,)51-1(+5CD6
ETIHW,)51-1(+42CD6
SPMS4#
DIP1# RELLORTNOC
EP
NEERG,)7-5(-5CD6
ETIHW,)5-5(+42CD3
+V5CD
BCP DAEH
KCALB,)1-5(-42CD5
KCALB,)5-5(-42CD3
10-HVU
S06RD-M7K
BCP DAEHGNIRIF KNI
CIGOL
EP
KCALB,)2-5(-42CD4
1HC
BCP AGPF/NIAM
C4 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
C6 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
15L
ETIHW,)4-5(+42CD4
10-FVU / 10-MVU
BCP BUS
NWORB,)6-5(-021CD1
NEERG,)51-1(-5CD6
KCALB,)3-5(-42CD3
NEERG,)6-5(-021CD2
15L
10-SVU
C2 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
-V5CD
10-AVU
ETIHW,)2-5(+42CD4
SPMS3#
DIP3# RELLORTNOC25L
KCALB,)6-5(-42CD3
10-IVU
SPMS1#
C6 ELBAC FTCV 61#GWA
KCALB,)7-5(-42CD6
ESAHP-3(1# BCLE)A05,V083CA
2# EVIRD OVRES
2L
zH06/05 ,V042~802CA ESAHP-3
DEEFW004 ROTOM OVRES-CA
ELBAC FTCV 21#GWA)KCALB(
1# EVIRD OVRES
metsyS cinortcelE margaiD tiucriC
A-CM
1L
11P
CDV42+
V42 CD
EGAIRRACW057 ROTOM OVRES-CA
DNG 2 OME
W/S CP
ELBAC FTCV 21#GWA)KCALB(
TRATSER
1 OME 3 OME
8# SPMS
SPMS-CPW003
CP ROTAREPO
4 OME
ELBAC FTCV 8#GWA)KCALB(
ERAUQS 5.5 = 01GWAERAUQS 5.3 = 21GWAERAUQS 0.2 = 41GWAERAUQS 52.1 = 61GWAERAUQS 0.1 = 81GWA
x x xx xx x- - -- -- -
) oN elbaC ( ----| | | | || | | |
) - / + ( leveL -------| | | | | | |
)V5/V42(EGATLOV ---------| | || |
)CD/CA(ECRUOS REWOP --------------| ||
.oN SPMS -----------------|
22P 32P
11P22P
11P
32P
3L
)KCALB( ELBAC FTCV 01#GWA
)A03,V022CA(6# BCCM
ELBAC FTCV 01#GWA)KCALB(
ELBAC FTCV 01#GWA)KCALB(
ELBAC FTCV 01#GWA)KCALB(
)KCALB( ELBAC FTCV 01#GWA
2U
)A03 ,V022CA(5# BCCM
GP)A02,V083CA(3# BCCM
2V
1V
25L
)A02,V083CA(4# BCCM
TFEL _WOLB GNIR
15L
1U
DNG emarF rotoM
)A05,V022CA(2# BCCM
THGIR _WOLB GNIR
DNG emarF rotoM
32L
13L
21L
22L
24L
daolrevO lamrehT1# yaleR
1W
14L
daolrevO lamrehT2# yaleR
12L
11L
23L
33L
1L
2L
3L
3L
2L
1L
2W
EP
1L
2L
RETLIF ESION)A05(
3L
1L
EP
EP
3L-T
1L-T
EP
EP
EP
1L-T
3L-T
EP
EP
N
212121
M
12
21
)A05(1# CM1 2 3
4 5 6
)L(PMAL VU
12
M
12
21
21
)A03(2# CM
1
2
3
4
5
6
M
12
)A03(2# CM
1
2
3
4
5
6
)R(PMAL VU
12
M
12
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 15 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.4. UV Lamp Power Box Connections
411
41
41
4147 7
5
1
1
1
47 7
45
46
46
6
6
20
21
22
23 24
25
30
31
27 26
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
60
61 55
71 53 70 61
60 51
50
86
87 84 85 80
81 82
83
80 80 81 81 82 82 83 83
86 87
84 85
30
31
56 57
52 54
70
71
28 28
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
29
29
K1 K1
K1 K2fan K1 K2L2 L3 L4 L5L1
U V L A M PP L C 24V DC
POWER(2A)
P00 P02 P04 P06 P08 P0A COM0 P0D P0F P11 P13 P15
P14P12P10P0EP0BP07P05P03P01 P09 P0C
FG P43 P45 P47 P49 P4B
AC100~240V P40 P41 P42 P44 P46 P48 P4A
P16
P17
24G 24V
COM1
COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 P4D P4F
P4C P4E
1 2 3 4 6 7 85
9 10 11 13 14 1512
F1 AC 250V 3A
Main BoxRightD-SUB 15P
F2 DC 24V 3A
50Hz 60Hz 208V 220V 250V
S/W HI LOW S-2 S-1 60Hz 50Hz
50Hz 60Hz 208V 220V 250V
S/W HI LOW S-2 S-1 60Hz 50Hz
(POWER_4P)
(POWER_4P)
(SIGNAL_7P)
(SIGNAL_7P)
LOW
MC(L)HI
MC(L)LOW
T/R(L) T/R(R)
MC(R)LOW
MC(R)HI
L11
N
PE
L11 L12 PE-+
left ACfan
right AC fan
left shutter(open)
right shutter(open)
LEFT UV LAMP ASSY RIGHT UV LAMP ASSY
L MC1 LOW
L MC2 HI
R MC1 LOW
R MC2 HI
BA D
CBA D
C
AB C
D E F G
JKH
AB C
D E F G
JKH
3PHASE UVLAMP POWER BOX
LK2 RK1 RK2LK1
N
L11
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 17 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.5. UV Lamp Power Circuit
L1
L2
L1
N
GND
MCCB #2(AC220V,50A)
GND
SMPS #9
+24VDC
PLC
INPUT COM
OUTPUT COM
NTC #2 CHOKE(R)-LOW
T/R(R)
F1 (250VAC-3A)F2(25VDC-3A)
MC(R)-LOW
MC(R)-HIGH
CAP.(R) #1
CAP.(R) #2
CAP.(R) #3
COOLRING (AC FAN)
ACFAN(R)
AC220V,50/60Hz
L12
L11
L12
PE
Ignitor(R)
L12L11PE
KDM-DR40S
L11
L12
L2L1PENL1PE
USEurope
AC 250V
AC 220V
AC 208V
60Hz
50Hz
S-1
HI
S-2
50Hz
LOW
60Hz
S/W
4P CON (R)
4P CON
S/W
L12 AC 250V
L11MC(L)-LOW
HI
CAP.(L) #1
60Hz
AC 220V
CAP.(L) #2
50Hz
NTC #1
T/R(L)
AC 208V S-2
LOW
4P CON
50Hz
60Hz
CHOKE(L)-LOWS-1
CAP.(L) #3
(41) (41)
(41) (41)
(47)
(47)
(45)
(46)
(46) (46)
(47)
(1) (1)
(1)(1)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(5)
(6)
(6) (6)
# UV LAMP HEAD ASS�Y(RIGHT)
MC(L)-HIGH
AWG #12 VCTF CABLE 3C
AC CABLE ( ALL BLACK, PE : GREEN), AWG #12CONTROL CABLE (WHITE : + , BLACK : - ), AWG #14
AWG10 = 5.5 SQUAREAWG12 = 3.5 SQUAREAWG14 = 2.0 SQUAREAWG16 = 1.25 SQUAREAWG18 = 1.0 SQUARE
ACFAN(L)
Ignitor(L)
# UV LAMP HEAD ASS�Y(LEFT)
4P CON (L)
B P L N
RT1
011
t
12
B PL N
41
52
63
UV LAMP(L)
1 2
1 4
2 3
1 4
2 3
RT1
011
t
12
A
BC
D
UV LAMP(R)
1 2
41
52
63
A
BC
D
A
BC
D
1 4
2 3
A
BC
D
1 4
2 3
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 19 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.6. UV Lamp Head Part
A
B
D
C
2
3
4 5
6
7
1
temperatureS/W (110c)
Temperature S/W (110c)
1 2
A
B
D
C
2
3
4 5
6
7
1
1 2
Temperature S/W (110c)
temperatureS/W (110c)
AC FAN DC FAN
(POWER_4P)
(SIGNAL_7P)
UV Lamp box
UV Lamp box housing
(SOLVALVE SIGNAL_2P)
AC FAN DC FAN
LEFT RIGHT
IGNITER
UV LAMP
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
1 2
IGNITER
UV LAMP
B LP N B LP N
B
A D
C
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 21 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
2.7. UV Lamp Power Cables
B
A D
C
AB C
D E F G
JKH
B
A D
C
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
4P CONNECTOR(FEMALE)4P CONNECTOR(MALE)
10P CONNECTOR(MALE)
UV Lamp Assy
UV Lamp Power Box
7P SCN6A16-7S CONNECTOR(FEMALE)
4P<-->4P CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT(1:1)
10P<-->7P CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT
10P ���� 7P CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT
A ������ 7P CONNECTOR 1B ������ 7P CONNECTOR 2C ������ 7P CONNECTOR 3D ������ 7P CONNECTOR 4E ������ 7P CONNECTOR 5F ������ 7P CONNECTOR 6G ������ 7P CONNECTOR 7H ������ 7P CONNECTOR N.CJ � ������ 10P CONNECTOR KK � ������ 10P CONNECTOR J
left
L1(L)
AC FAN(L)
L2(L)
FG(L)
right
A
B
C
D
size
0.5M(AWG12)
0.5M(AWG12)
1M(AWG12)
1.3M(AWG12)
left right size
1.3M(AWG14)
0.5M(AWG14)
0.5M(AWG14)
1M(AWG14)
1M(AWG14)
1M(AWG14)
SHUTTER OPEN(L)A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
DC 24V FAN(L)
DC GND(L)
INTERLOCK(K1)(L)
OVER HEAT(P0C)(L)
INTERLOCK(P44)(L)
N.C(L)
N.C(L)
N.C
N.C
SHUTTER OPEN(R)
DC 24V FAN(R)
DC GND(R)
INTERLOCK(K1)(R)
OVER HEAT(P0D)(R)
INTERLOCK(P44)(R)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
L1(R)
AC FAN(R)
L2(R)
FG(R)
left
L1(L)
AC FAN(L)
L2(L)
FG(L)
right
A
B
C
D
size
0.3M(AWG12)
0.3M(AWG12)
0.3M(AWG12)
0.3M(AWG12)
L1(R)
AC FAN(R)
L2(R)
FG(R)
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) BLOCK DIAGRAM
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 23 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Block Diagram
Overview PLC block diagrams:
! Main PLC
! UV Lamp PLC
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) BLOCK DIAGRAM
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 25 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3.1. Main PLC
MEDIA SET S / W
REFILL J13 SUB J4 3951-6P
VT 301 SOL V/V
36
LAMP P LC
TERMINAL
BLOCK (220V) EPDB
TOWER LAMP
SOL V/V
MS1 RF RR MS2 GND
1 2 3 4 – +
1
GND
1 AC220V P40 P41 P42 – P44 P46 – P48 P4A – P4C P4E – P50 P52 – P54 P56
CM1 CM2FG CM0 P43 CM3 P45 P47 CM4 P49 P4B CM5 P4D P4F CM6 P51 P53 CM7 P55 P57
P0 P04P02 P06 P08 P0A P0C P0E P10 CM0 P13 P15 P17 P19 P1B P1D P1F P21 P23 CM1
P05 P07P01
Wastetank
P03 P09 P0B P0D P0F P11 P12 P14 P16 P18 P1A P1C P1E P20 P22 24G 24+
E44 E34
2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 – +
1 2 3 4
3 –
1 2 + 4
3 –
1
1
2 + 4
3 –
1 2 + 4
3 –
1 2 + 4
– + 1 2 3 4 – +
R/REAR S/W R/FRONT S/W
F/REAR S/WSMPS
LEFT LAMP RIGHT LAMP
24V
GND#4
F/FRONT S/W
RE
AR
BL
OW
ER
N.O
+
COM
–
5045-2P
BLOWER
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) BLOCK DIAGRAM
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 27 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
3.2. UV Lamp PLC
The UV lamp PLC diagram is illustrated in the diagram �UV Lamp Power Box Connections� on page 7-15 .
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 29 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4. Printed Circuit Boards
Overview Printed Circuit Boards:
! Total PCB Diagram Layout
! MAIN PCB
! FPGA PCB
! HEAD PCB
! REFILL PCB
! CARTRIDGE PCB
! HEAD LIFT PCB
! ITV CONTROLLER PCBµ
! SUB PCB
! IF PCB
! I/O PCB
! TAKE UP PCB
! REFILL CONTROL PCB
! INDICATOR PCB
! DRIVER COMMUNICATION PCB
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 31 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.1. Total PCB Diagram Layout
3.3V
TDO
TCX
TMS
TMS
TD
+24V
B
A~
IN+
SUB B
BASE A
+5VSUB B
GND
SUB_HEATER
DN_SEN
A
BASE BTX
SUB_HEATER
UP_SEN
SUB A
GND
+24V
BASE A
GND
SUB A
BASE B
GND
RX
GND
+24V
OUT+
GND
GND
SOL(2)
GND
GND
BASE B'
GND
GND
GND
+24V
GND
B~
SUB B'
BASE_HEATER
N.C
N.C
N.C
GND
N.C
+24V
+24V
SUB B'
SOL(1)
+5V
BASE B'
N.C
N.C
SOL(1),SOL(2)
HV2
HEAT#5
INK3
HV25V
GND
INK7
GND
HV2
HEAT#4 HEAT#8
INK2
HV2
GND
HEAT#2
INK_OVF(5V)
HV2
INK1
GND
HEAT#1
INK6
HV2
GND
HEAT#6
GND
TERMISTOR
GNDGND
INK5
HV2HV2
12V
HEAT#7
GND GNDGND
INK4
5V
INK8
GND
HEAT#3
SUB_B'
N.C
GND
N.C
+24V
N.C
SUB_B
BASE_A
N.C
N.C
GND
PSE
N.C
GND
N.C
WHITE_SUB_HEATER
GND
+24V
SUB_A
ITV
GND
N.C
BASE_B'
+24V
GND
+24V
N.C
+24V
N.C
SUB_HEATER
BASE_B
GND
PSE
GND
GND
+24V
N.C
3
2
1
IN-
OUT-
N.C
CW
+24VDC
INP
N.C
TX
PINCH SENSE
GND
OUT COM
GND
CCW LIMIT
+5VDC
+5VDC
N.C
N.C
HOME SENSE
GND
N.C
GND
N.C
GND
MEDIA ON
+5VDC
+24VDC
RX
BLOWER ON
GND(24V)
INK LOW
+5V
AIR_LOW
LIFT UP
SSR OUT1
GND(5V)
SUC_LEVEL
MEDIA SET
LIFT DN
SSR OUT2
GND
+5V
+5V
LAMP ON
MOTOR -
+24V
N.C
MOTOR +
+24V
24V
0V
IN+
OUT+
INK_FULL_LC
+5V
+5V
S_LED_S
INK_FULL_M
M_R_CW
E_TANK_LM
GND
E_TANK_Y
INK_PUMP_Y
LAMP
ERROR_SW
INK_FULL_K
P_LED_LC
INK_PUMP_C
E_TANK_WHITE
INK_EMPTY_C
5V
INK_PUMP_M
+24V
GND
INK_EMPTY_C INK_EMPTY_S
+5V
N.C
+5V
P_LED_C
GND
N.C
N.C+24V
INK_EMPTY_K
N.C
N.C
+24V
+5V
BUZZER
M_F_CCW
INK_EMPTY_Y
5V
OVERFLOW ERROR
S_LED_KS_LED_LM
INK_FULL_LC
P_LED_WT
INK_EMPTY_LM INK_EMPTY_K
GND
+5V
GND
E_TANK_M
+5V
INK_FULL_C
E_TANK_LC
+24V
INK_FULL_WT
INK_EMPTY_S
+24V
INK_FULL_Y
CCW_SW
+24V
+5V
INK_PUMP_K
5V
S_LED_Y
INK_EMPTY_Y
GND
+24V
E_TANK_C
INK_FULL_LM
INK_EMPTY_WT
MAIN ERROR
S_LED_WT
CCW_LED
INK_FULL_S
INK_FULL_S
5V
+24V
INK_PUMP_LM
P_LED_S
+24V
+5V
AUTO_SW
+24V
+24V
TAKE_F_SEN
CW_LED
S_LED_C
?
OVERFLOW_ERROR
INK_PUMP_WHITE
INK_FULL_SIGNAL
INK_PUMP_SOLUTION
N.C
INK_FULL_C
S_LED_LC
INK_FULL_Y
INK_EMPTY_WT
P_LED_Y
INK_EMPTY_SIGNAL
+24V
INK_EMPTY_M
E_TANK_SOL
N.C
+5V
M_F_CW
5VCW_SW
+5V
TAKE_R_SEN
P_LED_LM P_LED_M
INK_FULL_LM
N.C
INK_PUMP_LC
E_TANK_K TX
ERROR_LED
P_LED_K
AUTO_LED
INK_FULL_M
RX_INK
+24V
GND
+5V
M_R_CCW
PRESSURE_LOW
INK_EMPTY_M
S_LED_M
INK_EMPTY_LC
GND
INK_EMPTY_LM
INK_FULL_WT
+5V GND
INK_FULL_K
INK_EMPTY_LC
N.C
+5V
N.C
N.C
J1~J4
1. HVPULSE2. N.C3. N.C
4. GND
5. CLK
6. DATAOUT
7. DATAIN
8. +12V
9. GND
J51. GND_SIGNAL
2. GND_SIGNAL
3. HV_ERR
4. HV_CK
5. SHIFT_CK_HI6. DATA_CD_HI
7. DATA_AD_HI8. N.C
9. +12V
10. +12V
11. GND_POWER
12. GND_POWER
13. N.C
14. N.C
15. HVIN
16. HVIN
12V
JET
REV5
HV_ADJ
CARTRIDGE PCB
5V
5V
J8
7. GND
9. PCD1511.PCD14
13.PCD13
15.PCD1217.PCD11
19.PCD10
21.PCD9
23.PCD825.PCD7
27.PCD6
29.PCD5
31.PCD433.PCD3
35.PCD237.PCD1
39.PCD0
GN
D
J7
1. EXT1
2. PCSELA3. EXT2
4. PCSELB
34.GND37.O_REQ
J101. 3.3V
2. 3.3V3. GND
4. GND5.
MCSELA
6.
MCSELB7. MCCLK
8. VIA3
9. VIA4
10.PCSELA
11.PCSELB12.MCD0
13.MCD1
14.MCD2
15.MCD316.MCD4
17.MCD5
18.MCD6
19.MCD720.MCD8
21.MCD9
22.MCD1023.MCD11
24.MCD12
25.MCD13
26.MCD1427.MCD15
28.MCS1
29 MCS2
30. EXT1
31. EXT232. GND
33. GND34. GND
35. GND
36. GND
37. GND38. GND
39. GND
40. GND
41. GND
42. GND
43. GND44. GND
45. GND46. GND
47. GND
48. GND49. 3.3V
50. 3,3V
8 1
UV NEO FPGA PCB
GN
D
RE
V5
1. +24V
2. +24V
3. +24V4. GND
5. GND
6. GND
7. IN+
8. IN+
9. OUT+10.OUT+
101
24V
1. +24V2. N.C
3. SOL_A4. N.C
5. +24V
6. N.C
7. SOL_B
UV NEO HEAD BASE LIFT PCB
DILLI PRECISION
UVL_01
REV.1
2004.10.20
SOL(1)SOL(2)
7
RESET
1
24V
HEATER6
UV NEO HEAD PCB
HEATER5
JUMPERINSERT
J10
1. INK6
2. 5V
3. GND
4. GND
5. RESET
6. GND
7. INK8
8. GND9. INK7
10. GND
JET DRIVE
REV-3
HEATER7
J9
1. DATA AB1
2. DATA CD1
3. DATA AB2
4. DATA CD2
5. DATA AB36. DATA CD3
7. DATA AB48. DATA CD4
9. DATA AB5
10. DATA CD5
11. DATA AB6
12. DATA CD6
13. DATA AB714. DATA CD7
15. DATA AB8
16. DATA CD8
17. MEDIA
18. SHIFT-CK
19. RX1_TTL20. TX1_TTL
21. HV_CK
22. ERROR_OUT
23. HT_CNTRL
24. GND
25. GND26. GND
HEATER4
HE
AT
ER
1
HEATER2
EACH INK LEVEL SENSOR
HEATER3 HEATER8
J13
1. HV2
2. GND3. HV1
4. GND
5. 5V
6. GND
7. 24V
8. GND
UV NEO IF PCB
J11. SUB_HEATER
2. BASE_HEATER3. GND
4. GND
5. +24V
6. +24V
J2
1. PSE
2. ITV
3. BASE_B'4. BASE_B
5. BASE_A6. SUB_B'
7. SUB_B
8. SUB_A
UV LAMP ON
RIGHT SHUTTER
MEDIA SENSOR1
J6
1. N.C2. UV LAMP ON
3. N.C
4. N.C
J2
1. +5V
2. MEDIA SENSOR 1
3. MEDIA SENSOR 2
4. MEDIA SENSOR 3
5. FEED LIMITMEDIA SENSOR1
LEFT SHUTTER
J3
1. LEFT SHUTTER2. RIGHT SHUTTER
3. GND
UV NEO I/O PCB
FEED LIMITMEDIA SENSOR1
OFFON
+10V
UV NEO ITV PCB
-10V
+10V
-10V
J5
1. GND2. TX
3. RX4. GND
5. TX
6. RX
UV NEO MAIN BOARD PCB
J17
1. GND2. EXT6
3. EXT54. EXT4
5. EXT3
6. EXT2
7. EXT18.
+5VCD
MA
IN
PR
OC
ES
SO
R
RE
V-4
J18
1. GND2. EXT8
3. EXT74. +24VDC
5. +5VDC
J11
1. GND2. N.C
3. N.C4. TXD
5. N.C
6. N.C
J3
1. MOS3
2. +5V
3. GND4. GND
5. RES3
6. GND7. SCR3
8. GND9. MISO3
10. GND
J2
1. HV_LED
2. +5V
3. GND4. GND
5. RES2
6. GND7. SCR2
8. GND9. MISO2
10. GND
J4
J15
1. DATA AB12. DATA CD1
3. DATA AB24. DATA CD2
5. DATA AB3
6. DATA CD3
7. DATA AB48. DATA CD4
9. DATA AB510. DATA CD5
11. DATA AB6
12. DATA CD613. DATA AB7
14. DATA CD7
15. DATA AB8
16. DATA CD8
J1
1. OEB 2. +5V
3. GND
4. GND
5. RES6. GND
7. OEA
8. GND9. MCSELB
10. GND
J141. CHASSIS
2. GND
3. EN A+4. ENCA-
5. ENCB+
6. GND
7. ENCRI+
8. ENCRI-
9. GND10. +5VDC
11. ENCB-
12. +5VDC
1. PLATEN OVER LOAD
2. PLATEN LOCK
3. N.C
4. N.C
5. PLATEN LIFT MANUAL S/W DOWN6. PLATEN LIFT MANUAL S/W UP
7. PRESET
8. N.C
9. N.C
10. AIR LOW
11. PLATEN OVER LOAD
12. SHUTTER RIGHT13. SHUTTER LEFT
14. UV LAMP ON
AC-IN
UV NEO SUB PCB
+
--
F070494_SS
17. MEDIA18. SHIFT_CK
19. RX1_TTL
20. TX1_TTL
21. HV_CK22. ERROR_OUT
23. HT_CNTRL
24. S.GND25. S.GND
26. S.GND
<MAIN J17, J18 - I/O J1, J4>
<I/O J3, J6
- SUB J13>
AIR TANK PRESSURE
GAGE SIGNAL
P014P020P013P012P011
<SUB J43 -
SMPS #6>
DC24V
PID#2-13
PID#2-4
PID#2-3
PID#2-2
PID#2-1
PID#1-3
PID#1-4
PID#1-2
EACH
HEAD
J1~J81. GND_SIGNAL
2. GND_SIGNAL
3. HV_ERR
4. HV_CLK*
5. SHIFT_CK*
6. DATA_CDK*7. DATA_ADH*
8. N.C
9. +12V
10. +12V
11. GND_POWER
12. GND_POWER
13. N.C14. N.C
15. HV1
16. HV1
<CARTRIDGE -
HEAD(J1~J8)>
HEAD TEMP.
SENSOR
HEAD BASE
THERMISTOR
SMPS #2 +120V
SMPS #2 GND
SMPS #1 120V
SMPS #1 GND
SMPS #3 24V
SMPS #3 GND
<GORE SIGNAL>
PLUS : #2~4 Cylinder Sensor
DELUXE : #2~4 Cylinder Sensor
#5 Limit Switch
J161. +3.3VDC
2. +3.3VDC
3. GND4. GND
5. MCSELA
6. MCSELB
7. MCCLK8. VIA3
9. VIA4
10.
PCSELA11.
PCSELB
12. MCD013. MCD1
14. MCD2
15. MCD3
16. MCD4
17. MCD518. MCD6
19. MCD7
20. MCD821. MCD9
22. MCD10
23. MCD11
24. MCD1225. MCD13
26. MCD14
27. MCD15
28. OEA29. OEB
30. VIA5
31. VIA632. GND
33. GND
34. GND
35. GND36. GND
37. GND38. GND
39. GND
40. GND
41. GND42. GND43. GND
44. GND
45. GND
46. GND47. GND
48. GND49.
+3.3VDC
50.
+3.3VDC
FPGA PCB J10 - MAIN PCBJ16 DIRECT CONNECTION
<MAIN 24V J4 -
SMPS#3>
<HOME MAIN
J8 - LIMIT S/W>
<CARRIAGE
CONTROL -
MAIN J12>
<ENCODER
HARNESS>
<MAIN J7 - PC COM1>
<MAIN J11 - REFILL J17>
<MAIN J18 - REFILL J34>
SMPS #6
<GORE
POWER3>
PURGE
SWITCH
STEP
MOTOR
VT301V
VT301V
PSE531
ITV
#1,2,3
#4,5,6
#7,8
#9,10
PC
MOTHER PCB COM2
<GORE RS 232C>
SUB-INK TANK PT
SENSOR
HEAD BASE
PT SENSOR
UP-Limit Switch
<REFILL J17 -
MAIN J11>
<REFILL +24V
J14 - SMPS #3>
<REFILL J31 - CONTROL J18>
<TAKE UP J11
- REFILL J18>
<REFILL J18 -
TAKE UP J11>
PLC P0B
<IND J11, J13 -
RF J17-1, J4>
<MAIN J18 - REFILL J34>
<AIR TANK -
REFILL J32>
<GORE HEAD REFILL>
+5V
-
+
+5V
-
-
UV NEO TAKE UP BOARD PCB
NOT USED
++
+5V
SW_M
C
-
LC
UV NEO CONTROL PCB
SW_C
-
U1
16. S_LED_LC
17. S_LED_WHITE18. S_LED_S
19. +5V
20. GND
21. P_LED_Y
22. P_LED_M
23. P_LED_C
24. P_LED_K25. P_LED_LM
26. P_LED_LC
27. P_LED_WHITE
28. P_LED_S
29. +24V
30. GND
+
-
16. S_LED_LC
17. S_LED_WHITE18. S_LED_S
19. +5V
20. GND
21. P_LED_Y22. P_LED_M
23. P_LED_C
24. P_LED_K
25. P_LED_LM26. P_LED_LC
27. P_LED_WHITE
28. P_LED_S29. +24V
30. GND
- -
-
+
S
1.
E_T
AN
K_W
HIT
E
2. E
_T
AN
K_LM
3. E
_T
AN
K_LC
4. E
_T
AN
K_Y
5. E
_T
AN
K_M
6. E
_T
AN
K_C
7. E
_T
AN
K_K
8. E
_T
AN
K_S
OL
-
UV NEO REFILL8COLOR PCB
+ -
K
+
+5V
+5V
SW_LM
+
+5V
-
1. GND
2. +5V
3. GND
4. +5V5. N.C
6. N.C
7. N.C
8. N.C
9. DIR_CW_SW
10. CW_LED
11. DIR_CCW_SW
12. CCW_LED13. AUTO_SW
14. AUTO_LED
15. ERROR_SW
16. ERROR_LED
+
SW_K
-
+
UV NEO INDICATOR PCB
1. SW_Y
2. SW_M3. SW_C
4. SW_K
5. SW_LM
6. SW_LC
7. SW_WHITE
8. SW_S
9. +5V10. GND
11. S_LED_Y
12. S_LED_M
13. S_LED_C
14. S_LED_K
15.
S_LED_LM
+
1.COMM LED
2.INK_PUMP_WHITE
3.INK_PUMP_LM
4.INK_PUMP_LC
5.INK_PUMP_Y
6.INK_PUMP_M7.INK_PUMP_C
8.INK_PUMP_K
9.SOLUTION PUMP
10.OVERFLOW_ERROR
-
-
+5V
+
+
+5V +5V
- -
<CONTROL J18 - REFILL J31>
+
+
+
LM
--
UV NEO CONTORL
REV.3
-
SW_WT
+
+
-
1. SW_Y
2. SW_M3. SW_C
4. SW_K
5. SW_LM
6. SW_LC7. SW_WHITE
8. SW_S
9. +5V
10. GND11. S_LED_Y
12. S_LED_M
13. S_LED_C14. S_LED_K
15.
S_LED_LM
-
WT
+5V
+
+5V
+-
+
+5V
-
+
SW_S
-
Y
-
+
+
SW_Y
+
1. GND
2. +5V
3. GND4. +5V
5. N.C
6. N.C
7. N.C
8. N.C
9. DIR_CW_SW
10. CW_LED11. DIR_CCW_SW
12. CCW_LED
13. AUTO_SW
14. AUTO_LED
15. ERROR_SW
16. ERROR_LED
U12
SW_LC
+ -
-+
+5V
+ +
+
+5V
+5V
-
+-
-
TAKE UP BOARD
REV 0
M
+5V
-
RE
FIL
L_
IND
ICA
TO
R
RE
V.2
+
SMPS #1(240W-DC 120V/2A)WK240S120A
PE L51 L52GND120V GND L1PE
SMPS #2(240W-DC 120V/2A)WK240S120A
120V L2 GND L1PE
SMPS #3(240W-DC 24V/5A)WK120S24A
24V L2 GND L1PE24V L2 G L1PE
SMPS #5(75W-DC 24V/1.5A, DC 5V/8A )WK75DS0524A
24V L2 L1PE L2
SMPS #4(240W-DC 24V/5A)WK120S24A
SMPS #6(75W-DC 24V/1.5A, DC 5V/8A )WK75DS0524A
5V G24V G
#1~3 : CARRIAGE DRIVER CN2
#4~6 : FEED DRIVER CN2
<MAIN J17, J18 - I/O J1, J4>
<MAIN J17, J18 - I/O J1, J4>
<MAIN J17, J18 - I/O J1, J4>
<I/O J3, J6
- SUB J13>
<GORE
I-TV/PSE>
<GORE I-TV/PSE>
<SUB J4 - PLC>
<PID SUB -IF J8>
<PID SUB -IF J7, J9>
<PID SUB - IF J7, J9>
<PID HEADBASE - IF J11>
<IF 24V J6 -SMPS #4>
I-TV CONTROL24V - SMPS #5
24V
0V
<GORE POWER1>
<GORE SENSOR>
<GORESENSOR>
<GOREPOWER1>
<CARTRIDGE -
HEAD(J1~J8)>
<GORE POWER2>
<GORE SIGNAL>
<IND J11, J13 -
RF J17-1, J4>
<TAKEUP MOTOR
- REFILL J10, J11>
<TAKEUP MOTOR
- REFILL J10,
J11>
<IND J11, J13 -
RF J17-1, J4>
<IND J11, J13 -
RF J17-1, J4>
<AIR TANK -
REFILL J32>
J4-1,3,5,7 & J1-1,4 : Height Adjustment Solenoide
J1-1,3 : Up Limit Switch
SUB PCB
HEAD LIFT PCBI-TV PCB
PLC
IF-PCB
FAN
REFILL PCB
HEAD PCB
MAIN PCB
FPGA PCB
HEAD
PCBHEAD
PCB
<HOME MAIN J8 -
SENSOR
CONTROLLER(2,3)>
B6
B6
A8
A8
D14 GREEND14 GREEN
J17
5267-3P
J17
5267-3P
RESETRESET
J18 5267-5PJ18 5267-5P
J4
GIL-G-4P
J4
GIL-G-4P
D6
SE
RV
-R/S
D6
SE
RV
-R/S
LED1LED1
J12
5267-8P
J12
5267-8P
P1
5K
P1
5K
A1
3A
13
PC
AP
CA
1
3
J3
5045-3P
1
3
J3
5045-3P
3
2
456
910
128
7
11
1J14
3
2
456
910
128
7
11
1J14
3 63 6
12
1112
J8
12
1112
J8
12
34
56
78
910
1112
J27
3951-2P
J27
3951-2P
INK7INK7GNDGND
1
5
3951-2P
5
3951-2P
J12
5267-2P
J12
5267-2P
J7
5267-3P
KJ7
5267-3P
K
J95
5267-3P
J95
5267-3P
J4
5267-3P
YJ4
5267-3P
Y
D10 REDD10 RED
REDRED
B8
B8
INK8INK8 12V12V
2
65
SW6
C
2
65
SW6
C
J13
5045-2P
J13
5045-2P
TEMPTEMP
1
D11 GREEND11 GREEN
D5 GREEND5 GREEN
J11J11
1
3951-2P
1
3951-2P
MC
AM
CA
J9
D-SUB26P(3row)
J9
D-SUB26P(3row)
INK6INK6
SW1SW1
J17-1
5045-3P
J17-1
5045-3P
J5
3951-2P
J5
3951-2P
2
65
SW2
LM
2
65
SW2
LM
D12
TR
AV
EL
D12
TR
AV
EL
BZ1
5267-4P
BZ1
5267-4P
RUNRUN
PC_CLKPC_CLK1
LED1LED1
LED4LED4
J29
5267-2P
J29
5267-2P
2
65
SW3
LC
2
65
SW3
LC
D3 REDD3 RED
CS
1C
S1
J2
5267-2P
J2
5267-2P
J1
5267-3P
WTJ1
5267-3P
WT
MEDIAMEDIA
1
1
5
J2
5045-5P
1
5
J2
5045-5P
J75045-6P
J75045-6P
J14
3951-3P
J14
3951-3P
CS
3C
S3
B2
0
D6
B2
0
D6
ENC ABNENC ABN
1
J4J4
123456789
J6
3951-5P
J6
3951-5P
12
1112
J3
12
1112
J3
12
34
56
78
910
1112
2
65
SW1
WT
2
65
SW1
WT
MCSELAMCSELA1
B5
B5
INK7
5267-2P
INK7
5267-2P
SW2
FEEDBACK
SW2
FEEDBACK
J3
5267-3P
LCJ3
5267-3P
LC
D1 GREEND1 GREEN
J6
5267-3P
CJ6
5267-3P
C
B1
6B
16
D8
ER
RO
R
D8
ER
RO
R
J1
5267-8P
J1
5267-8P
J11
3951-3P
J11
3951-3P
MCCLKMCCLK1
INK6-LM
5267-2P
INK6-LM
5267-2P
1
3
1
3
A2
A2
D13 GREEND13 GREEN
CS
6C
S6
INK2-C
5267-2P
INK2-C
5267-2P
12
1112
J7
12
1112
J7
12
34
56
78
910
1112
J30
5267-2P
J30
5267-2P
A2
0
D3
A2
0
D3
1929 91929 9
A1
5A
15
J7 5267-3PJ7 5267-3P
GNDGND
1
A4
A4
INK3-M
5267-2P
INK3-M
5267-2P
D2 GREEND2 GREEN
GNDGND
1
CS
5C
S5
J45
? -2P
J45
? -2P
2
65
SW4
Y
2
65
SW4
Y
CS
1C
S1
+ -
110
11
20
D12
+ -
110
11
20
D12
1929 9
J31
HRS-30P
1929 9
J31
HRS-30P
J11
5219-2P
J11
5219-2P
15J11
HRS-16P
15J11
HRS-16P
MCSELBMCSELB
1
J16
3951-10P
J16
3951-10P
A1
2A
12
INK4INK4
LED6LED6
A2
1A
21
D16 REDD16 RED
J25
3951-2P
J25
3951-2P
J26
3951-2P
J26
3951-2P
A1
9A
19
CS
2C
S2
B1
4B
14
B1
5B
15
J12
5045-9P
J12
5045-9P
B3
B3
J13
5045-4P
J13
5045-4P
HV-CLKHV-CLK
1
J30
5267-2P
J30
5267-2P
D1
INK1
D1
INK1
12
910
J3
CON10
12
910
J3
CON10
D10 GREEND10 GREEN
D4
LEDG-SM
D4
LEDG-SM
A3
A3
A5
A5
J29
5267-2P
J29
5267-2P
J1AJ1A
123
D7 REDD7 RED
J11
3951-2P
J11
3951-2P
1 2
11 12
J5
1 2
11 12
J5
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
J32
5267-6P
J32
5267-6P
J14
3951-2P
J14
3951-2P
LED2LED2
D6
INK
_O
VF
D6
INK
_O
VF
B4
B4
CS
4C
S4
12
1112
J1
12
1112
J1
12
34
56
78
910
1112
B1
9B
19
12
910
J2
CON10
12
910
J2
CON10
B2
1B
21
J475267-4P
J475267-4P
D7
HV
D7
HV
A1
A1
J8
5267-3P
SJ8
5267-3P
S
J9
5267-4P
J9
5267-4P
A1
8A
18
J43
3951-4P
J43
3951-4P
J49
5566-2P
J49
5566-2P
A1
4A
14
14 714 7
J28
5267-2P
J28
5267-2P
2
3951-2P
2
3951-2P
D9
EN
C
D9
EN
C
D16 GREEND16 GREEN
D5 GREEND5 GREEN
D2 REDD2 RED
B1
7B
17
J10
PCN10C 50S 2.54DS
J10
PCN10C 50S 2.54DS
1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950
B9
B9
J5
5267-3P
MJ5
5267-3P
M
D4 REDD4 RED
CS
6C
S6
B1
B1
J10
5267-5P
J10
5267-5P
GNDGND1
J24
3951-2P
J24
3951-2P
A0
D1
A0
D1
MEDIA SCANMEDIA SCAN
1
WRWR1
TRAVELTRAVEL
1
MCCLKMCCLK
1
12
1112
J2
12
1112
J2
12
34
56
78
910
1112
15
J11
15
J11
1
5
1
5
J34
5267-3P
J34
5267-3P
CS
3C
S3
20K
ZERO
20K
ZERO
J11
5045-3P
J11
5045-3P
3 83 8
J48
5267-2P
J48
5267-2P
J4
5267-2P
J4
5267-2P
J7
3951-2P
J7
3951-2P
2
65
SW7
K
2
65
SW7
K
LED3LED3
J4
STL950
J4
STL950
J17
5267-8P
J17
5267-8P
A1
1A
11
INK2INK2
J8
PC2
J8
PC2
123456789
10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940
1
4
J6
5045-4P
1
4
J6
5045-4P
2
65
SW5
M
2
65
SW5
M
J352
3951-2P
J352
3951-2P
B1
8B
18
J1
3951-5P
J1
3951-5P
1929 9
J18 HRS-30P
1929 9
J18 HRS-30P
PWR
D9
PWR
D9
B1
2B
12
5V5V
1
PC
BP
CB
J2
5267-3P
LMJ2
5267-3P
LM
D12 REDD12 RED
12
1112
J6
12
1112
J6
12
34
56
78
910
1112
2
65
SW8
S
2
65
SW8
S
2
65
SW3
LC
2
65
SW3
LC
J15 5566-2PJ15 5566-2P
D15 GREEND15 GREEN
A7
A7
A1
6A
16
LED8LED8
INK3INK3
GNDGND
1
GNDGND
1
D2
HV
_E
RR
D2
HV
_E
RR
STOP
5045-2P
STOP
5045-2P
D8 REDD8 RED
J43951-6P
J43951-6P
J39J39
12
MCSELAMCSELA
1
J83951-6P
J83951-6P
J55267-6P
J55267-6P
D11
TE
ST
D11
TE
ST
D9 GREEND9 GREEN
J13
5267-2P
J13
5267-2P
J10
5267-3P
J10
5267-3P
J11J11
12345678
J2J2
123456789
D4
HT
_E
RR
D4
HT
_E
RR
12
910
J10
CON10
12
910
J10
CON10
SHIFT-CKSHIFT-CK
1
MCSELBMCSELB1
J17-1
5045-3P
J17-1
5045-3P
J17
5267-4P
J17
5267-4P
1
4
1
4
D7 GREEND7 GREEN
D11 GREEND11 GREEN
D4 REDD4 RED
SERVO R/SSERVO R/S
1
3.3V3.3V1
TP1TP1
1
D3 GREEND3 GREEN
D3
MO
VE
-R
D3
MO
VE
-R
3
3951-2P
3
3951-2P
J6
5267-2P
J6
5267-2P
2
65
SW4
Y
2
65
SW4
Y
+
-
1 8
916
D108
+
-
1 8
916
D108
CS
4C
S4
B2
B2
FEEDFEED
GNDGND
1
A1
7A
17
8
3951-2P
8
3951-2P
D1 REDD1 RED
12
1112
J5
12
1112
J5
12
34
56
78
910
1112
D6 REDD6 RED
B1
1B
11
4
3951-2P
4
3951-2P
A1
0
D2
A1
0
D2
J22
5267-2P
J22
5267-2P
B7
B7
A6
A6
J16
5219-3P
J16
5219-3P
J7
PC1
J7
PC1
123456789
10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940
D10
MA
RK
D10
MA
RK
D2
MO
VE
-L
D2
MO
VE
-L
J5
3951-2P
J5
3951-2P
D8 REDD8 RED
PCSELBPCSELB1
ENCENC
1
20K
GAIN
20K
GAIN
12
1112
J5
12
1112
J5
12
34
56
78
910
1112
LED2LED2
TP2TP2
1
D4 REDD4 RED
CLOCKCLOCK1
J7J7
J8
5267-3P
J8
5267-3P
INK1-K
5267-2P
INK1-K
5267-2P
INK5-LC
5267-2P
INK5-LC
5267-2P
LED7LED7
MC
BM
CB
J20
3951-2P
J20
3951-2P
D2 REDD2 RED
MARKMARK
1
J1J1
123456789
A9
A9
J17J17
J1
3951-2P
J1
3951-2P
D9 GREEND9 GREEN
D5
WE
EP
D5
WE
EP
6
3951-2P
6
3951-2P
2
65
SW2
LM
2
65
SW2
LM
GNDGND1
LED5LED5
INK4-Y
5267-2P
INK4-Y
5267-2P
J21
5267-2P
J21
5267-2P
GNDGND1
J16
PCN10-50P
J16
PCN10-50P
123456789
1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950
5V5V
J9
3951-3P
J9
3951-3P
INK5INK5
3 6
J1
3951-6P
3 6
J1
3951-6P
D13 GREEND13 GREEN
1
10
19
9
18
26
J15 D-SUB26P(3row)
1
10
19
9
18
26
J15 D-SUB26P(3row)
SW4SW4
B1
0
D5
B1
0
D5
J11 5267-6PJ11 5267-6P
J6
3951-2P
J6
3951-2P
3 8
J2
5045-8P
3 8
J2
5045-8P
CS
5C
S5
12
1112
J5
12
1112
J5
12
34
56
78
910
1112
15
J18
HRS-16P15
J18
HRS-16P
D14 REDD14 RED
CS
2C
S2
SHIFT CLKSHIFT CLK
1
12V12V
1
12
1112
J4
12
1112
J4
12
34
56
78
910
1112
J33
5267-4P
J33
5267-4P
J3J3
123456789
D4
ME
DIA
D4
ME
DIA
D5 REDD5 RED
LED3LED3
J123951-2P
J123951-2P
7
3951-2P
7
3951-2P
3
2
456
910
128
7
11
1J14
ENCODER
3
2
456
910
128
7
11
1J14
ENCODER
J13
5045-5P
J13
5045-5P
SW1
RESET
SW1
RESET
D12 GREEND12 GREEN
14 7
J13
5045-14P
14 7
J13
5045-14P
3.3V3.3V
1
J3
3951-2P
J3
3951-2P
5V5V
1
D3 GREEND3 GREEN
J15
5045-7P
J15
5045-7P
J183951-4P
J183951-4P
J3
5045-4P
J3
5045-4P
1515
J10
5566-2P
J10
5566-2P
J23
3951-7P
J23
3951-7P
PCSELAPCSELA1
B1
3B
13
12
910
J1
CON10
12
910
J1
CON10
J4
5267-5P
J4
5267-5P
HV-CKHV-CK
1
D1
5V
D1
5V
1929 9
J31 HRS-30P
1929 9
J31 HRS-30P
J10
5267-4P
J10
5267-4P
O_REQO_REQ1
INK8-S
5267-2P
INK8-S
5267-2P
D1 REDD1 RED
2
65
SW1
WT
2
65
SW1
WT
J23
5267-2P
J23
5267-2P
1 85
J13
STL950 1 85
J13
STL950
B0
D4
B0
D4
1
10
19
9
18
26
J15
1
10
19
9
18
26
J15
D17 LEDD17 LED
J4
5045-3P
J4
5045-3P
J8
5267-3P
J8
5267-3P
D6 REDD6 RED
J18J18
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 33 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.2. MAIN PCB
GN
D
+24VD
C
GNDHOME SENSE
+5VDC
GNDN.CN.C
+5VDC
GNDDOOR SENSE
GN
D
RX
J161. +3.3VDC2. +3.3VDC3. GND4. GND5. MCSELA6. MCSELB7. MCCLK8. VIA39. VIA410. PCSELA11. PCSELB12. MCD013. MCD114. MCD215. MCD316. MCD417. MCD518. MCD619. MCD720. MCD821. MCD922. MCD1023. MCD1124. MCD1225. MCD1326. MCD1427. MCD1528. OEA29. OEB30. VIA531. VIA632. GND33. GND34. GND35. GND36. GND37. GND38. GND39. GND40. GND41. GND42. GND43. GND44. GND45. GND46. GND47. GND48. GND49. +3.3VDC50. +3.3VDC
J51. GND2. TX3. RX4. GND5. TX6. RX
J141. CHASSIS2. GND3. EN A+4. ENCA-5. ENCB+6. GND7. ENCRI+8. ENCRI-9. GND10. +5VDC11. ENCB-12. +5VDCJ18
1. GND2. EXT83. UV LAMP ON4. +24VDC5. +5VDC
J171. DC5V+2. MEDIA SET13. MEDIA SET24. MEDIA SET35. FEED LIMIT6. LEFT SHUTTER7. RIGHT SHUTTER8. +5VCD
J151. DATA AB12. DATA CD13. DATA AB24. DATA CD25. DATA AB36. DATA CD37. DATA AB48. DATA CD49. DATA AB510. DATA CD511. DATA AB612. DATA CD613. DATA AB714. DATA CD715. DATA AB816. DATA CD8
17. MEDIA18. SHIFT_CK19. RX1_TTL20. TX1_TTL21. HV_CK22. ERROR_OUT23. HT_CNTRL24. S.GND25. S.GND26. S.GND
TO INTERLOCKMODULE
ENCODER
3#SPMS
PC-COM1
HEAD PCB J9
4J BCP O/I
REFILLPCB J17
HOMESENSOR
FPGA J10
<GORE SIGNAL>
<MAIN J7 - PC COM1>
<MAIN 24V J4 - SMPS#3>
<MAIN J8 - LIMIT S/W>
RESETPUSH S/W
<PUSH S/W #3 - MAIN RESET>
<I/O J3, J6 - MAIN J17, J18><I/O J3, J6 - MAIN J17, J18>
<REFILL J17 - MAIN J11>
I/O PCB J1
1
TX
REVIRD.MMOC7J BCP
DRIVER COMM. PCB J5
DRIVERCOMM.PCB J6
DILLIMAIN20
DILLIMAIN10-5 UV
DILLIMARK7-2M
AIN
PRO
CES
SOR
REV
-4
NOT USED
TX
GN
D
GN
D
TXR
X
GND
C-INP
GND
24V+
4J
J12 J12
D9
EN
C
D1
5V
D11
TES
T
RESET
5045-2P
D6
SE
RV-
R/S
3
2
456
910
128
7
11
1J14
ENCODER
D10
MA
RK
5267-6PJ11
J8
5267-3P
5267-4P
5267-5P
5267-8P 5267-8P
J12
5267-8P
J1
5267-8P
J10
D8
ER
RO
R
J30
5267-2P
D4
ME
DIA
RUN
J4
5267-5P
D2
MO
VE
-L
5J P6-7625
5267-5PJ18
61J
PCN10-50P
1234567890111213141516171819102122232425262728292031323334353637383930414243444546474849405
J7
5267-2P
D5
WE
EP
FEED
D3
MO
VE
-R
10191
981
62
D-SUB26P(3row)J15
J17
P8-7625 P8-7625
SERVO/RS
1
J9
11019
918
26J9
D-SUB26P(3row)
STOP
D7
HV
J7
5267-3P
P3-76257J
D12
TRAV
EL
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 35 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.3. FPGA PCB
TMS TDO
TD
TMS
TCX
3.3V
REV5
GND5V5V G
ND
18
J101. 3.3V2. 3.3V3. GND4. GND5. MCSELA6. MCSELB7. MCCLK8. VIA39. VIA410.PCSELA11.PCSELB12.MCD013.MCD114.MCD215.MCD316.MCD417.MCD518.MCD619.MCD720.MCD821.MCD922.MCD1023.MCD1124.MCD1225.MCD1326.MCD1427.MCD1528.MCS129.MCS230. EXT131. EXT232. GND33. GND34. GND35. GND36. GND37. GND38. GND39. GND40. GND41. GND42. GND43. GND44. GND45. GND46. GND47. GND48. GND49. 3.3V50. 3.3V
J71. EXT12. PCSELA3. EXT24. PCSELB34. GND37. O_REQ
J87. GND9. PCD1511.PCD1413.PCD1315.PCD1217.PCD1119.PCD1021.PCD923.PCD727.PCD629.PCD531.PCD433.PCD335.PCD237.PCD139.PCD0
PCI CARDCN2
PCI CARDCN1
MAINBOARD PCBJ16
<PCI-FPGA J7>
<PCI-FPGA J8>
CS
1
A14
CS
1
MCSELA1
GND1
A9
B13
PC
B
B2
CS
5
A10
D2
J8
PC2
12345678901112131415161718191021222324252627282920313233343536373839304
A4
CS
4
O_REQ1
MCSELB1
A21
A16
B9
B11
MC
B
3.3V1
J10
PPCN10C 50S 2.54DS
1234567890111213141516171819102122232425262728292031323334353637383930414243444546474849405
B3
A0
D1
B4
PC
A
CS
4
A18
B12
WR1PCSELA1
A6
B10
D5
A20
D3
A11
B21
B16
B15
A17
A8
B20
D6 PWRD9
PC_CLK1
B0
D4
PCSELB1
CS
3
A12
B6
A1
B18
A7
B17
B14
B1
MC
A
A15
A2
B8
J11
12345678
CS
5
CS
2
A13
B5
MCCLK1
A5
CS
3
J7
PC1
12345678901112131415161718191021222324252627282920313233343536373839304
B7
CS
2
GND1
CS
6
A19
KCOLC KCOLC1
A3
CS
6
GND1
B19
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 37 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.4. HEAD PCB
HV
2
2VH
HE
AT#2
1#TAEH
HE
AT#3
HV
2
HE
AT#4
HV
2
HE
AT#5
HV
2
HE
AT#6
HV
2
HV
2
HE
AT#8
HV
2
HE
AT#7
DNGV5V5
V21
DNG
DNG)V5(FVO_KNI
EVIRD TEJ3-VER
1RETAEH
HEATER
2
HEATER
3
HEATER
4
HEATER
5
HEATER
6
HEATER
7
HEATER
8
LEV
EL
SE
NS
OR
8J~1JLANGIS_DNG .1LANGIS_DNG .2
RRE_VH .3*KLC_VH .4
*KC_TFIHS .5*KDC_ATAD .6*HDA_ATAD .7
C.N .8V21+ .9V21+ .01
REWOP_DNG .11REWOP_DNG .21
C.N .31C.N .411VH .511VH .61
9J1BA ATAD .11DC ATAD .22BA ATAD .32DC ATAD .43BA ATAD .53DC ATAD .64BA ATAD .74DC ATAD .85BA ATAD .9
5DC ATAD .016BA ATAD .116DC ATAD .217BA ATAD .317DC ATAD .418BA ATAD .518DC ATAD .61
AIDEM .71KC-TFIHS .81LTT_1XR .91LTT_1XT .02
KC_VH .12TUO_RORRE .22LRTNC_TH .32
DNG .42DNG .52DNG .62
REPMUJTRESNI
31J2VH .1DNG .21VH .3DNG .4
V5 .5DNG .6
V42 .7DNG .8
DESU TON
DESU TON
NIAM51J BCP
K C CLYM SML
HE
AD
TEM
P.
SE
NS
OR
EA
CH
CA
RTR
IDG
EP
CB
J5
)VH RETAEH DAEH(2#SPMS : 2,1)VH TEJ DAEH(1#SPMS : 4,3
C.N : 6,53#SPMS : 8,7
>LANGIS EROG<
>2REWOP EROG<
- EGDIRTRAC<>)8J~1J(DAEH
SMPS#2
SMPS#1
SMPS#3
GGGGGGGG
LEV
EL
SE
NS
OR
LEV
EL
SE
NS
OR
LEV
EL
SE
NS
OR
LEV
EL
SE
NS
OR
LEV
EL
SE
NS
OR
LEV
EL
SE
NS
OR
G
LEV
EL
SE
NS
OR
12J
W
-
RV
ERUTAREPMET RV
PT PT
W-8KNI
P2-7625
W-8KNI
P2-7625
3
P2-1593
3
P2-1593
CL-5KNI
P2-7625
CL-5KNI
P2-7625
2
P2-1593
2
P2-1593
12
1121
6J
12
1121
6J
2KNI 2KNIV5V5
1
V5V56KNI 6KNI
4
P2-1593
4
P2-1593
Y-4KNI
P2-7625
Y-4KNI
P2-7625
4D
HT_
ER
R
4D
HT_
ER
R
12
1121
7J
12
1121
7J 9J
)wor3(P62BUS-D
9J
)wor3(P62BUS-D
M-3KNI
P2-7625
M-3KNI
P2-7625
59J
P3-7625
59J
P3-7625
1D
1KNI
1D
1KNI
51J
)wor3(P62BUS-D
51J
)wor3(P62BUS-D
5
P2-1593
5
P2-1593
DNG DNG
1
8
P2-1593
8
P2-1593
5KNI 5KNI
12
1121
8J
12
1121
8J
12
1121
2J
12
1121
2J
C-2KNI
P2-7625
C-2KNI
P2-7625
93J 93J
12
6
P2-1593
6
P2-1593
V21 V21
12
1121
3J
12
1121
3J
4KNI 4KNI
K-1KNI
P2-7625
K-1KNI
P2-7625
DNG DNG
1
7
P2-1593
7
P2-1593
8KNI 8KNI
S_7KNI
P2-7625
S_7KNI
P2-7625
2D
HV
_ER
R
2D
HV
_ER
R
12
1121
1J
12
1121
1J
1
P2-1593
1
P2-1593
V21 V21
1
12
1121
4J
12
1121
4J
DNG DNG1
92J
P2-7625
92J
P2-7625
ML-6KNI
P2-7625
ML-6KNI
P2-7625
1ZB
P4-7625
1ZB
P4-7625
3KNI 3KNI
12
901
01J
01NOC
12
901
01J
01NOC7KNI 7KNI
81 5
31J
059LTS
81 5
31J
059LTS
12
1121
1J
12
1121
1J
6D
INK
_OV
F
6D
INK
_OV
F
12
1121
5J
12
1121
5J
03J
P2-7625
03J
P2-7625
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 39 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.5. REFILL PCB
5V GND+5V
PRESSURE LOW
N.CN.CN.C
N.C
+24VA
IR E
RR
OR
N.C
E_TANK_SOL+5V
E_TANK_WHITE+5V
E_TANK_LM+5V
E_TANK_LC+5V
E_TANK_Y+5V
E_TANK_M+5V
E_TANK_K+5V
E_TANK_C+5V
+24V
GNDN.CN.C
BUZZER
LAMP
INK_PUMP_SOLUTION
INK_PUMP_WHITE
INK_PUMP_LM
INK_PUMP_LC
INK_PUMP_Y
INK_PUMP_M
INK_PUMP_C
INK_PUMP_K+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
TX
+5VN.CGND
RX_INK
U12
U1
1. E_TA
NK
_WH
ITE2. E
_TAN
K_LM
3. E_TA
NK
_LC4. E
_TAN
K_Y
5. E_TA
NK
_M6. E
_TAN
K_C
7. E_TA
NK
_K8. E
_TAN
K_S
OL
MAIN PCB J18
<VT301 - REFILL J35><MAIN J18 - REFILL J34>
TAKE UP PCB
11J BCP ROTACIDNI
MAIN PCB J11
AIR TANK
3# SPMS
FRONTPHOTO SENSOR
FRONTGEAR MOTOR
REARPHOTO SENSOR
REARGEAR MOTOR
SUB-TANKFLOW SENSOR
CONTROL PCB J18
PLC P0B
INDICATOR PCB J10
<TAK
E UP J11 - R
EFILL J18>
>4J ,1-71J FR - 31J ,11J DNI<
<AIR TANK - REFILL J32>
<REFILL +24V J14 - SMPS#3>
<TAKEUP MOTOR - REFILL J10, J11>
<TAKEUP MOTOR - REFILL J10, J11> <CONTROL J18 - REFILL J31>
<GORE HEAD - REFILL>
<IND J11, J13 - RF J17-1, J4>
GND
GND+24V
<REFILL J17 - MAIN J11><REFILL J13 - PLC P0B>
MAIN
ERR
OR
GN
D
24VG
ND
TAKE_FRO
NT_SEN
N.C
M_F_C
CW
M_F_C
W
OVERFLO
W ERRO
R+5V
24V
GN
D
TAKE_REAR
_SEN
M_R
_CW
M_R
_CC
W
VT301
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED J25J21
J11
5219-2P
J17-1
5045-3P
J11
5045-3P
15
J18
HRS-16P
SW1
RESET
J3
J3
5045-4P
22J
+
-
1 8
61 9
D108
J28
31J
5045-2P33J
5267-4P
5267-2P
5267-2P
5267-2P
5267-2P
5267-2P
5267-2P
5267-2P
5267-2P5267-3P 3951-2P 3951-2P 3951-2P 3951-2P 3951-2P 3951-2P 3951-2P 3951-2P 3951-2P 3951-2P
J26
J14
3951-2P
92J
J20
+ -
110
11
20
D12
J10
5566-2P
4JJ13
5267-2P
J32
5267-6P
J5J27
5566-2PJ15
6J
J17
5267-3P
J18
5267-5P
51
J18
HRS-16P
9192 9
J31
HRS-30PJ30
5267-2P
J24
12J
32J
J32
5267-6P
J16
5219-3P
J34 J1
2J
91 929
81J
P03-SRH
J35
1. SW_Y2. SW_M3. SW_C4. SW_K5. SW_LM6. SW_LC7. SW_WHITE8. SW_S9. +5V10. GND11. S_LED_Y12. S_LED_M13. S_LED_C14. S_LED_K15. S_LED_LM
16. S_LED_LC17. S_LED_WHITE18. S_LED_S19. +5V20. GND21. P_LED_Y22. P_LED_M23. P_LED_C24. P_LED_K25. P_LED_LM26. P_LED_LC27. P_LED_WHITE28. P_LED_S29. +24V30. GND
1. GND2. +5V3. GND4. +5V5. N.C6. N.C7. N.C8. N.C9. DIR_CW_SW10. CW_LED11. DIR_CCW_SW12. CCW_LED13. AUTO_SW14. AUTO_LED15. ERROR_SW16. ERROR_LED
1. COMM LED2. INK_PUMP_WHITE3. INK_PUMP_LM4. INK_PUMP_LC5. INK_PUMP_Y6. INK_PUMP_M7. INK_PUMP_C8. INK_PUMP_K9. SOLUTION PUMP10. OVERFLOW_ERROR
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 41 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.6. CARTRIDGE PCB
JETREV5
J51. GND_SIGNAL2. GND_SIGNAL3. HV_ERR4. HV_CK5. SHIFT_CK_HI6. DATA_CD_HI7. DATA_AD_HI8. N.C.9. +12V10. +12V11. GND_POWER12. GND_POWER13. N.C.14. N.C.15. HVIN16. HVIN
J1~J41. HVPULSE2. N.C.3. N.C.4. GND5. CLK6. DATAOUT17. DATAIN8. +12V9. GND
HV_ADJ GND
<CARRIAGE - HEAD (J1~J8)>
EACHHEAD
HEAD PCB(J1~J8)
120V
FLAT RIBBON HARNESS
* FACTORY SET
J4
123456789
TP1
1
TP21
1 2
11 12
J1~J8
1 212
1112
J5
J1
123456789
J3
123456789
J2
123456789
D4
LEDG-SM 12V
K5
P1
K5
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 43 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.7. HEAD LIFT PCB
SOL(1)
OUT+N.C
N.C
+24VGND
SOL+24V
+24VGND+5VGND
SU
B B
�S
UB
BS
UB
A
BA
SE
B�
BA
SE
B
N.C
BA
SE
A GN
D
DN_SEN
UP
_SE
N
C.N
N.C
V5+
DNG
SUB_
HEAT
ER
1 7
1. +24V2. N.C3. SOL_A (THE VERTICAL)4. N.C5. +24V6. N.C7. SOL_B (HORIZONTALITY)
1. OUT+2. OUT+3. IN+4. IN+5. GND6. GND
7. GND8. +24V9. +24V10.+24V
RESET 24V
SOL(1)SOL(2)
J14-1,3SUB_INK TANK RUBBERHEATER
STEPMOTOR
1,2 : VT301V4,5 : VT301V
Pressure SensorPSE531
ITV2010
1,2 : ITV PCB OUT+3,4 : ITV PCB IN+5,6,7 : ITV PCB OV8,9,10 : ITV PCB 24VPT SENSOR
HEAD BASEPT SENSORSUB_INKTANK
PURGES/W
SMPS#6
IF PCB J1
IF PCB J2
PC MOTHERPCB COM2
HEIGHTADJUSTMENTSOL
<GORE SENSOR>
<GORE POWER3>
<GORE POWER1>
<GORE RS 232C>
<GORE I-TV/PSE>
SUB ASUB BSUB B�BASE ABASE BBASE B�
T/H BUST/H ESAB
DNGDNG
V42V42
B
AA�
B�
24V+
GND
GND
SOL(2)GND
IN+
IN-IN+24V V1G V3V2 0-0+1
UP LIMITS/W
RX
TX
GN
D
N.CN.CN.C
J17
5267-4P101
J16
5045
-10P
J6
3951-5P
SW1
J7
5045-6P
J7
5045-6P
J135045-4P
J23
3951-7P
J8
3951-6P
J4
GIL-G-4P
J115045-3P
8J
P6-1593
8J
P6-1593
J14
J25
3951-3P
J18
3951-4P
J155045-7P
LED2
LED1
J1
5045-5P
J12
3951-2P
J2
5045-9P
J10
5267-3P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 45 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.8. ITV CONTROLLER PCB
2
+NI
1
V0
+TUO
+V42
-TUO
-NI
361J BCP TFIL DAEH
DNG 5# SPMS
4-1HC 002ESP
2-1HC 002ESP
1-RWP 002ESP
2-RWP 002ESP
1-1HC 002ESP
DNG 5# SPMS
DNG 5# SPMS3-R .RAV2-R .RAV1-R .RAV
+V42 5# SPMS
61J BCP TFIL DAEH
61J BCP TFIL DAEH
61J BCP TFIL DAEH
V01-
V01+V01+
V01-
NO
5# SPMS
002 ESP
>ESP/VTI EROG<
.RVELBAIRAVROTISIGER
EMULOV
12
34
FFO
)1(NOITISOP GNITTES *
)2(NOITISOP GNITTES *
)3(NOITISOP GNITTES *
)4(NOITISOP GNITTES *
GNITTES YROTCAF *K02
NIAG
K02
NIAG
4WS 4WS
K02
OREZ
K02
OREZ
P4-7555 P4-7555
A1J A1J123
4J
059LTS
4J
059LTS
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 47 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.9. SUB PCB
MOTOR -MOTOR +
+5V
+5VLIFT DNLIFT UPGND
SUC_LEVEL
N.C
GN
D(5
V)
+5V
+24V
GN
D(2
4V)
SSR OUT1SSR OUT2
AIR LOWINK LOWLAMP ONMEDIA SET ONBLOWER ON
F070494_SS
J131. N.C2. N.C3. N.C4. N.C5. N.C6. N.C7. N.C8. N.C9. N.C10. AIR LOW11. N.C12. SHUTTER RIGHT13. SHUTTER LEFT14. UV LAMP ON
SMPS#6 I/O PCB J3 I/O PCB J6<SUB J43 - SMPS#6> </O J3,J6 - SUB J13>
<SUB J4 - PLC>
PLC
AIRTANK
<AIR TANK - REFILL 32>
+
-
NOT USED
NOT USED
VR1
VR2
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
4 1
J6
J45
J45-2P
J475267-4P
J49
5566-2P
J43
3951-4P
1 7 14
J13
5045-14P
J48
5267-2P
J43951-6P
RED LED
13
J3
5045-3P 5045-4P
1: PO142: PO203: PO134: PO125: PO11
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 49 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.10. IF PCB
V42+C.NC.NC.NC.NC.NC.NC.N
DNG
V42+DNG
C.NC.N
ESP
DNG
DNGV42+
DNGV42+
SU
B_A N
.C
N.C
WH
ITE_S
UB
_HE
ATE
RG
ND
V42+
DNG
ESP
V42+
DNGC.N
VTI
SU
B_B
SU
B_H
EA
TER
BA
SE
_A
BA
SE
_B
BA
SE
_B�
SU
B_B
�
V42+
2JESP .1
VTI .2�B_ESAB .3
B_ESAB .4A_ESAB .5�B_BUS .6
B_BUS .7A_BUS .8
1JRETAEH_BUS .1RETAEH_ESAB .2
DNG .3DNG .4V42+ .5V42+ .6
DESU TON
>4#SPMS - 6J V42 FI<
2#DIP
8J BCP TFIL ESAB DAEH
7J BCP TFIL ESAB DAEH
>8J FI - BUS DIP<
BUS DIP<>9J ,7J FI -
>9J ,7J FI - BUS DIP<
DAEH DIP<>11J FI - ESAB
4# SPMS
>1REWOP EROG<
>ROSNES EROG<
1234
415432
1#DIP
41
1
5432
3#DIP
41
1
5
GN
D
313131
>ETIHW-DIP EROG<
RETAEHRERLRTNOC
DESU TON
DESU TON
DESU TON
DESU TON
31J
P5-5405
31J
P5-5405
6J
P2-1593
6J
P2-1593
3J
P4-5405
3J
P4-5405
36
8J
P6-159336
8J
P6-1593
11J
P2-1593
11J
P2-1593
5J
P2-1593
5J
P2-1593
01J
P4-7625
01J
P4-7625
3 6
1J
P6-1593
3 6
1J
P6-1593
3 8
2J
P8-5405
3 8
2J
P8-5405
9J
P3-1593
9J
P3-1593 21J
P9-5405
21J
P9-5405
8J
P3-7625
8J
P3-7625
36
8J
P6-159336
8J
P6-1593
4J
P3-5405
4J
P3-5405
7J
P2-1593
7J
P2-1593
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 51 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.11. I/O PCB
+5V
+5V+24VUV LAMP ONLED 8GND
MEDIA SENSOR1MEDIA SENSOR1MEDIA SENSOR1FEED LIMITLEFT SHUTTERRIGHT SHUTTERGND
J21. +5V2. MEDIA SENSOR33. MEDIA SENSOR24. MEDIA SENSOR15. FEED LIMIT
J61. N.C2. UV LAMP ON3. N.C4. N.C
J31. LEFT SHUTTER2. RIGHT SHUTTER3. GND
MEDIA SENSOR1
MEDIA SENSOR1
MEDIA SENSOR1
FEED LIMIT
LEFT SHUTTER
UV LAMP ON
RIGHT SHUTTER
MAIN BOARD J17
MAIN BOARD J18
CYLINDERSEN.
J3-2~3, J6-3 : SUB PCB J13
<I/O J1, J4 - MAIN J17, J18>
<I/O J1, J4 - MAIN J17, J18>
<I/O J3, J6 - SUB J13>
1
5
J2
1714J13 P41-5405 P41-5405
1
3
J3
J1
4
1J6
5045-4P
5045-3P
5045-5P
J4
LED1 LED2
LED3 LED4
LED5 LED6
LED7 LED8
J17
J18
5267-8P
5267-5P 5267-5P
5267-8P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 53 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.12. TAKE UP PCB
CW_LED CCW_LED AUTO_LED ERROR_LED
5V CW_SW CCW_SW5V AUTO_SW5V ERROR_SW5V
1. GND2. +5V3. GND4. +5V5. N.C6. N.C7. N.C8. N.C9. DIR_CW_SW10. CW_LED11. DIR_CCW_SW12. CCW_LED13. AUTO_SW14. AUTO_LED15. ERROR_SW16. ERROR_LED
TAKE UP BOARDREV 0
REFILL PCB J18
<TAKEUP - REFILL J18>
AUTO/MANUALINDICATOR PCB
2
65
3WS
LC
REDD4
5111J
HRS-16P
2
65
4WS
Y
15
J18
HRS-16P
GREEND2 GREEND5GREEND3
2
65
1WS
WT
REDD1
2
65
2WS
LM
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 55 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.13. REFILL CONTROL PCB
S_LED_WT S_LED_LM S_LED_LC S_LED_Y S_LED_M S_LED_C S_LED_K S_LED_S
P_LED_WT P_LED_LM P_LED_LC P_LED_Y P_LED_M P_LED_C P_LED_K P_LED_S
S
1. SW_Y2. SW_M3. SW_C4. SW_K5. SW_LM6. SW_LC7. SW_WHITE8. SW_S9. +5V10. GND11. S_LED_Y12. S_LED_M13. S_LED_C14. S_LED_K15. S_LED_LM
16. S_LED_LC17. S_LED_WHITE18. S_LED_S19. +5V20. GND21. P_LED_Y22. P_LED_M23. P_LED_C24. P_LED_K25. P_LED_LM26. P_LED_LC27. P_LED_WHITE28. P_LED_S29. +24V30. GND
++
+++
++
+
++++
++++
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
V5+V5+V5+V5+V5+V5+V5++5V
S_WSK_WSC_WSM_WSY_WSCL_WSML_WSSW_WT
13J BCP LLIFER
UV NEO CONTROLREV.3
<REFILL J31 - CONTROL J18>
D15
2
65
SW3
CL
D13D11
2
65
SW4
Y
D7D5
2
65
SW5
M
D3
GREEN GREEN GREEN GREEN GREEN GREEN GREEN GREEND9
2
65
SW6
C
D16D14D12
2
65
SW7
K
HRS-30PJ189192 9
91 929
J31
HRS-30P
D10
D8
2
65
SW1
WT
D6
2
65
SW8
S
D4D2RED RED RED RED RED RED RED REDD1
2
65
SW2
ML
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 57 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.14. INDICATOR PCB
TW_YTPME_KNITW_LLUF_KNI
ML_YTPME_KNIML_LLUF_KNI
CL_YTPME_KNICL_LLUF_KNI Y_LLUF_KNI
M_YTPME_KNIM_LLUF_KNI
C_YTPME_KNIC_LLUF_KNI
K_YTPME_KNIK_LLUF_KNI
S_YTPME_KNIS_LLUF_KNI
Y_YTPME_KNI
TW_YTPME_KNI
TW_LLUF_KNI ML_LLUF_KNI CL_LLUF_KNI Y_LLUF_KNI M_LLUF_KNI K_LLUF_KNI S_LLUF_KNIC_LLUF_KNI
ML_YTPME_KNI CL_YTPME_KNI Y_YTPME_KNI M_YTPME_KNI C_YTPME_KNI K_YTPME_KNI S_YTPME_KNI
LANGIS_LLUF_KNIV5+
V5+
C.NV5+
DNG
V5+V5+V5+V5+V5+V5+V5+ V5+
ROSNES WOLF KNAT KNI HCAE
+
+
+
+
++++
+++ +++
+ -+
--
--
--
--
--
-
-
--
-
4J BCP LLIFER
ESU TON
REFILL_IN
DIC
ATO
RR
EV
.2
>4J ,1-71J FR - 31J ,11J DNI<
.GIS_YTPME_KNI
1-71J BCP LLIFER
>4J ,1-71J FR - 31J ,11J DNI<
DER8D DER8D
7J
P3-7625
K7J
P3-7625
K
NEERG5D NEERG5D
11J
P3-5405
11J
P3-5405
21J
P2-7625
21J
P2-7625
DEL71D DEL71DNEERG31D NEERG31D
8J
P3-7625
S8J
P3-7625
S
DER01D DER01D
31J
P2-7625
31J
P2-7625
2J
P3-7625
ML2J
P3-7625
ML
DER2D DER2D
3J
P3-7625
CL3J
P3-7625
CL
DER21D DER21D
4J
P2-7625
4J
P2-7625
11J
P3-1593
11J
P3-1593
4J
P3-7625
Y4J
P3-7625
Y
DER4D DER4D
NEERG1D NEERG1D
DER41D DER41D
NEERG9D NEERG9D
1J
P3-7625
TW1J
P3-7625
TW 5J
P3-7625
M5J
P3-7625
M
DER6D DER6D
NEERG3D NEERG3D
DER61D DER61D
6J
P3-7625
C6J
P3-7625
C
NEERG7D NEERG7D NEERG11D NEERG11D
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
Service Manual 2007 V1.0 - 7 - 59 :Anapurna L/XL Company Confidential
4.15. DRIVER COMMUNICATION PCB
FEED
CARRIAGE
MAIN J9
MAIN J5
MAIN J12
CN
1B
1
CN
3
11
11
1
1
11
CN
1B
1
CN
3
11
CARRIAGE_SERVO
FEED_SERVO
GND
GND
GND
GND
INP
MOTOR DRIVER
24V+
J5
5267-8P
5267-6P
J6
5267-8P
J5
J12
5267-8P
J7
5267-2P
J4
5267-8P
J9
5267-4P
J3
5267-8P